&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH 35(/,0,1$5< -8/< K3822V2 6/01

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH 35(/,0,1$5< -8/< K3822V2 6/01"

Transcription

1 )2&86&$'(7 &RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH 35(/,0,1$5< -8/< K3822V2 6/01

2 .

3 Differences Between the FOCUS 200 PLUS, and the FOCUS CADET Systems NOTE: New features for the Focus Cadet Enhanced are indicated by an and Bold text Item FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462A) FOCUS CADET ( & ) Number of Groups Number of Points FOCUS CADET PHASE 1 ( & ) Number of Operating Panel Users Number of Access Card Users Number of Operating Panels Built-in Hardwired Points (8 per Communication Group) 8 Hardwired Points EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor Support of normally-open or normally-closed sensors Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 (32 total) Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style D configuration Point 8 may be configured as a bell box tamper 8 (4 per Communication Group) 8 (4 per Communication Group) 8 Hardwired Points EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor Support of normally-open or normally-closed sensors Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 (32 total) Does not support the Style "D" loop. Point 8 may be configured as a bell box tamper 8 Hardwired Points EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor Support of normally-open or normally-closed sensors Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 (32 total) Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style D configuration Point 8 may be configured as a bell box tamper History Log Capacity RS-485 Buses SIM /PID Gateways 8 None None Access Control Printer Interface Units Supports 8 Access Control Interface Units Supports 8 Printers 1 Supervised 7 Unsupervised Built-in SIM Loop Assign to Gateway Unit #9 Supports all SIM devices Built-in Output Triggers 8 Output Triggers Each output may be programmed to any of the output point types May be used to trigger Long Range Radio May be used to trigger a relay Output 3 may be configured for cabinet tamper Supports 4 Access Control Interface Units Supports 1 Printer Assign to Gateway Unit #9 Supports all SIM devices 2 Output Triggers Each output may be programmed to any of the output point types May be used to trigger Long Range Radio May be used to trigger a relay Output 3 may be configured for cabinet tamper Supports 4 Access Control Interface Units Supports 1 Printer Assign to Gateway Unit #9 Supports all SIM devices 8 Output Triggers Each output may be programmed to any of the output point types May be used to trigger Long Range Radio May be used to trigger a relay Output 3 may be configured for cabinet tamper iii

4 Item FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462A) Dialer Main dialer is built-in Secondary dialer (472402A) is an add-on module Supports ADT SIA and ADEMCO Contact ID formats FOCUS CADET ( & ) Main dialer is built-in Secondary dialer (472402A) is an add-on module Supports ADEMCO Contact ID format only FOCUS CADET PHASE 1 ( & ) Main dialer is built-in Secondary dialer (472402A) is an add-on module Supports ADEMCO Contact ID format only ADT AC Communicator Module Add-on module (472491) Supports ADT SIA format only Not supported in this version Not supported in this version DES Encryption Supported on AC Communicator module Not supported in this version Not supported in this version Service Telco Jack Located on the main PC board (Control Unit) Located on the main PC board (Control Unit) Located on the main PC board (Control Unit) Transformer Supports 18VAC and 16.5VAC transformers Supports 18VAC and 16.5VAC transformers Supports 18VAC and 16.5VAC transformers 18VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current 18VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current 18VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current 18VAC (72VA) transformer provides 2.3A max output current 18VAC (72VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current 18VAC (72VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current 16.5VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1A max output current 16.5VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1A max output current 16.5VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1A max output current 16.5VAC (82VA) transformer provides 1.8A max output current Use 18VAC transformer for all new installations. Use 16.5VAC transformer for retrofit only. Use P4 Jumper to select current draw. 16.5VAC (82VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current Use 18VAC transformer for all new installations. Use 16.5VAC transformer for retrofit only. 16.5VAC (82VA) transformer provides 1.5A max output current Use 18VAC transformer for all new installations. Use 16.5VAC transformer for retrofit only. Relay Outputs 2 built-in bell outputs (bell 1 & bell 2) rated at 12VDC, 1.7A. Built-in auxiliary relay that may be set for Dry (28VAC/VDC, 2.0A) or Wet (12VDC, 1.7A) operation. Built-in 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset Uses the auxiliary relay Program the relay output point type for 4-wire smoke detector reset (output point type 23) Set Jumper P3 for wet operation Built-in bell output rated at 12VDC, 1.7A. Built-in auxiliary relay (dry contacts) rated at 28VAC/VDC, 2.0A. Uses the auxiliary relay Program the relay output point type for 4-wire smoke detector reset (output point type 23) Built-in bell output rated at 12VDC, 1.7A. Built-in auxiliary relay that may be set for Dry (28VAC/VDC, 2.0A) or Wet (12VDC, 1.5A) operation. Uses the auxiliary relay Program the relay output point type for 4-wire smoke detector reset (output point type 23) Set Jumper P3 for wet operation Cabinet Vista-100 cabinet Vista-100 cabinet Vista-100 cabinet iv

5 Item FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462A) FOCUS CADET ( & ) FOCUS CADET PHASE 1 ( & ) Wireless (RF) Support Supports all ADEMCO 5800 Series transmitters except 5804BD, 5827BD, and 5827 Supports all ADEMCO 5800 Series transmitters except 5804BD, 5827BD, and 5827 Supports all ADEMCO 5800 Series transmitters except 5804BD, 5827BD, and 5827 Additional Point Types Arming (65 - ARM) (RF devices only) Arming (65 - ARM) (RF devices only) Arming (65 - ARM) (RF devices only) Disarm (66 - DAR) (RF devices only) Disarm (66 - DAR) (RF devices only) Disarm (66 - DAR) (RF devices only) No Alarm Response (67 - NAR) (RF devices only) No Alarm Response (67 - NAR) (RF devices only) No Alarm Response (67 - NAR) (RF devices only) Cabinet Back Tamper Supports back tamper for commercial burglary applications Supports back tamper for commercial burglary applications Supports back tamper for commercial burglary applications Cabinet Tamper Mounted on the side of the cabinet and connects to the tamper input (J5 trigger 3) Mounted on the side of the cabinet and connects to the tamper input (J5 trigger 3) Mounted on the side of the cabinet and connects to the tamper input (J5 trigger 3) Auto Cabinet Tamper Bypass Tamper is automatically bypassed when the system goes into Service Mode Tamper is automatically bypassed when the system goes into Service Mode Tamper is automatically bypassed when the system goes into Service Mode Primary Phone Number Programming Can be edited from either the downline loader or the operational panel Can be edited from either the downline loader or the operational panel Can be edited from either the downline loader or the operational panel Earth Ground Fault Detection Is a built-in function and is mapped to point 245 Is a built-in function and is mapped to point 245 Is a built-in function and is mapped to point 245 SRAM 128k bytes 32k bytes (Not Removable) 32k bytes (Not Removable) The FOCUS CADET System Installation Vital Information Use the following table to record the vital information for this installation. We recommend you leave this table with the control unit. Job Location Instrument Number (II) Downloader Phone Number CCC Phone Number CCC Communication Type Contact ID v

6 Fire Alarm Application Note About Fire Alarm Codes Code Enforcement There are various fire alarm codes written by industry associations and institutes; for example, the National Fire Alarm Protection Association writes the National Life Safety Code, also known as NFPA 101. Other fire alarm codes written by other associations or institutes, such as BOCA and ICBO, specify whether or not a given building or structure type is required to have a fire alarm system and, if so, what fire alarm system functions must be supported. Each state and local government jurisdiction adopts in part or in entirety these codes, which become that jurisdiction s code. In addition, there are standards that govern the design, installation, and service of fire alarm systems. For instance, the use and placement of smoke and fire detection devices is specified in the National Fire Alarm Code. The most popularly adopted code is the National Fire Alarm Code, commonly referred to as NFPA 72. Codes are enforced by the person who is designated by the state or local government as the Authority Having Jurisdiction, also simply referred to as the AHJ. The AHJ has the delegated power to review and interpret the code as it may pertain to a particular structure. The AHJ must interpret codes because structures often are not uniform. Therefore, the AHJ will review for example, a fire alarm design for the correct number of smoke detectors and their placement in relation to the structure s layout. vi

7 Table of Contents Fire Alarm Application Note...vi About Fire Alarm Codes...vi Code Enforcement...vi List of Figures... x Conventions Used in This Manual...xi SECTION 1 General Description About the FOCUS CADET System Prominent Features SECTION 2 Installing the Control Unit About the Control Unit Before Installing the System Mounting the Cabinet Installing the Cabinet Lock Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Installing the Control's Circuit Board SECTION 3 Installing the Operating Panels About the Operating Panels Installing the Operating Panels Addressing the Operating Panels Operating Panel Program Mode Adjusting the Contrast Level SECTION 4 Basic Hardwired Points About the Hardwired Points Wiring the Hardwired Points Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration SECTION 5 Built-in SIM Loop About the SIM Loop SIM Loop Supervision Installing SIM and SIM Sensors Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop SECTION 6 Gateways About the Gateways RF Gateway (472490) Installing the RF Gateway Installing the RF Receiver Series Transmitters RF Gateway Off-Normal Conditions Long Range Radio Gateway Installing the LRR Gateway Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions SECTION 7 Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay About the Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay Output Functions Installing the External Sounders Programming the Bell Output vii

8 Table of Contents SECTION 8 System Communication About the System Communication Connecting the Telephone Lines Paging Service Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format Types of Customer Care Center Service Table of CCC Signaling Programming the System Communication Options SECTION 9 J5 Output Triggers About the J5 Output Triggers Types of Output Points Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Programming the Output Triggers SECTION 10 Access Control About Access Control Installing the Access Control Interface Unit Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels Access Control Options Maintenance of the Access Control System SECTION 11 History Log About the History Log Installing the Printer Interface Unit Displaying and Printing the History Log SECTION 12 Power Requirements About Powering the FOCUS CADET Providing Adequate Voltage for the SIM Loop, Each Gateway, and Operating Panel Determining the Control Unit Power Supply Load Determining the Size of the Standby Battery Installing a Power Supply Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the Control Unit Installing the Standby Battery Powering Up the Control Unit SECTION 13 Input and Output Point Types About the Input and Output Point Types Input Point Types Output Point Types SECTION 14 Programming About Programming the System Mechanics of Programming Programming Names for the BA Groups Programming Point Data Programming the BA Groups Turn-Off Data Programming the System Communication Options SECTION 15 Scheduling About Scheduling Permanent Schedules Temporary Schedules Holiday Schedule Ambush Schedule Scheduling Options viii

9 Table of Contents SECTION 16 Downline Loading About Downline Loading Programming the Control Unit for Downline Loading Downline Loading the Customized Data Verifying the Downline Loaded Data SECTION 17 Real-Time Clock About the Real-Time Clock Setting the Time and Date Setting Daylight Saving Time SECTION 18 ID Codes About the ID Codes Service Code Fire Marshall Code Duress Signal Programming ID Codes Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges SECTION 19 System Operation About Operating the System Action Menus Operating Panel Modes ID Codes Control Unit and BA Group Options Recycling Exit Delay Alarm/Trouble Memory SECTION 20 Testing the System About Testing the System Operating Panel Tests Local Tests Transmission Tests Testing the Printer Finishing the Installation Instructing the Customer SECTION 21 Specifications Electrical/Mechanical Specifications Installation Criteria Approvals Access Control Interface Unit SECTION 22 Equipment Basic System Equipment SIM Sensors Index... Index-1 APPENDIX A Warnings and Limitations... A-1 Limitations of This Alarm System ix

10 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide List of Figures Figure 2-1: Installing Cabinet Lock Figure 2-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations Figure 2-3: Cabinet Door Tamper Wiring Figure 2-4: Mounting the PC Board Figure 3-1: Details of the Operating Panel Circuit Board Figure 4-1: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Point 1 (also Point 2, Terminals 27 and 28) Figure 4-2: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Points Figure 4-3: Style "D" Configuration on Points 3 and Figure 5-1: SIM Wiring to System-Powered and Nonpowered Sensors Figure 5-2: Connection for a SIM Loop Powered SIM Sensor Figure 5-3: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe Figure 5-4: SIM Wiring to a Sensor Figure 5-5: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor Figure 5-6: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter Figure 5-7: Wiring of the 4208U to the SIM Loop Figure 5-8: Wiring of the 4209U to the SIM Loop Figure 5-9: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Point Expander Figure 5-10: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Class B to Class A Converter Figure 5-11: Wiring a Horn/Strobe SIM to a 4209U for Resetting Glassbreak Detectors Figure 5-12: Loop Interface Module Figure 5-13: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Powered Sensor Figure 5-14: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Lacing/Foil and Non-powered Sensor Figure 5-15: Keyswitch Wiring Connections Figure 5-16: 4297 Extender Module Figure 5-17: SIM Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module Figure 5-18: SIM Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules Figure 6-1: RF Gateway Wiring Connections Figure 6-3: RF Receiver DIP Switch Settings Figure 6-4: LRR Gateway Wiring Connections Figure 7-1: External Sounder Connections to the Bell Output Figure 7-2: External Sounder Connections to the Auxiliary Relay Figure 8-1: Installing the A Backup Dialer Figure 9-1: Configuration of the 7720P to the J5 Output Triggers Figure 9-2: Configuration of the 7830R to the J5 Output Triggers Figure 9-3: Configuration of the 7835C to the J5 Output Triggers Figure 9-4: Configuration of the 7920SE to the J5 Output Triggers Figure 10-1: Access Control Interface Unit (ACIU) Figure 10-2: Typical Installation Using Card Reader or Keyreader Figure 10-3: Typical Installation Using a Keylok Figure 10-4: Modifying ACIU for Operation with Dorado 7401 or 7901 Card Reader Figure 10-5: Wiring Connections for a Manual Access Pushbutton or Exit Pushbutton Figure 11-1: Printer Interface Unit Figure 12-1: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus Figure 12-2: Determining the Voltage Drop on the RS-485 Bus Figure 19-1: Operating Panel Summary of Connections... Inside Back Cover x

11 Conventions Used in This Manual Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols (icons). UL These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for a UL Listed application. These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation, and which, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties. This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also denotes warnings about physical harm to the user. Product model numbers (unless noted otherwise) represent ADT products. A 6-digit Stock Code Number replaces the 7- digit type number used for ADT devices. For the convenience of the reader, when the 6-digit number is used for a given item, the formerly used type number will be included in parenthesis. This type number is how the devices and systems are referenced in UL reports and procedures. xi

12 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide xii

13 S E C T I O N 1 General Description In This Section About the FOCUS CADET System Prominent Features About the FOCUS CADET System The FOCUS CADET is a UL Listed commercial burglar and fire alarm system that provides: A control unit circuit board that contains a non-volatile chip for storing the programmed data, so the data will not be lost if the system loses all power. Control of the system via user-friendly operating panels (up to 8 for the system). The operating panel provides four lines of interactive messages and menus to guide the user through simple selection processes. Ability to control all BA groups from a single operating panel. Up to 64 points of protection that are divided among input and output points. Up to 4 BA groups. 1 built-in supervised bell output for compliance with local FA requirements, as well as for use with BA applications. Built-in auxiliary relay interface, which can be set for either wet or dry contact or 4-wire smoke detector reset operation. A built-in communicator that supports an optional backup dialer for monitoring purposes to a Customer Care Center. Eight built-in programmable output triggers. Up to 255 users, of which the first 99 may use ID codes and/or card/keys to access the system. The remaining are card/key users only.. The ability to downline load the programming from a remote location using the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Default data parameters stored in a read-only memory (ROM). This default data may be transferred from the ROM to the SRAM by issuing a command at an operating panel. Prominent Features Below is a list of the prominent features of the system. For a detailed explanation of any of the features, see the appropriate section. Point Characteristics Eight built-in points, including two 2-wire smoke detector loops. Built-in programmable style "D" fire loop. Janitorial function that enables point-shunting of movable protection points in areas being cleaned during the closed period. Unique holdup alarm type that permits triggering an alarm as well as tripping a suspicion camera. Provision for hostage signaling. Ambush protection against hide-ins. A Fixed BA point can be set for 24-hour type alarm. Partial turn-off of vault sensors (vibration and/or audio sensors) to avoid nuisance alarms due to construction or other noise/vibration occurring during the premises open period. Detection of carbon monoxide. 1-1

14 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Expansion Capabilities An RS-485 bus employed for communicating with and powering the RF gateways, operating panels, printer interface unit, and Access Control Interface Units. A built-in SIM loop for interfacing with sensors and output devices. Fire System Waterflow monitoring in the fire system. Ability to set all fire points (smoke detector circuits) for fire with verification. An option to set the fire bell to either timeout or no timeout. Communication Capability of commanding up to eight individual relay-controlled functions from the CCC on ADT SIA dialer format. Inhibition of swinger-related alarm transmissions after three swingers have been detected, to minimize nuisance traffic at the CCC. Ability to setup an output to activate only if a communication failure on the dialer is present. Dialer phone numbers programmable up to 32 digits. Ability to uniquely identify Telco line troubles (built-in and backup dialers). Can send reports to 8 different paging services. Can interface to the 7800ADT for Long Range Radio communication. Scheduling Scheduling of events to automatically occur at a specific time of day, such as openings and closings. Each BA group can be assigned permanent and temporary opening and closing schedules. A close timer for no-close supervision for nightdrop/mail-drop types of unscheduled openings and automatic teller machines (ATM's). Ability to force auto-arm a BA Group with an offnormal condition present. User Functions Customer can determine names that will appear on operating panel displays for each point of protection, each BA group, and each ID code. Capability of applying two-man rule for more secure applications. Customer can remotely test motion detection sensors, vault sensors, BA groups, and connected bells, eliminating the need for walk testing. BA groups can be interlocked in different ways for controlling on/off status. Ability to turn ON the system in the STAY mode. Power Continuous supervision and identification of faults associated with low battery voltage, AC power, and internal or external communication. Upon a prolonged AC Loss, system automatic shutdown and backup battery drop to approximately 10 volts, to prevent false alarms on peripheral devices. Self-test of control unit upon power turn-on. Ability to disable the battery charger test. Ability to arm the system with a system low battery condition present. History Log A 512-event history log for recording events such as alarms, troubles, openings, and closings, all with the time and date of the occurrence. A real-time clock for keeping track of time of day, day of week, and date, for controlling time related functions. It automatically accommodates Daylight Saving Time (where used) and leap year, if programmed. Supports one printer via a printer interface unit. Recording of access control capability for each BA group and access events in the history log. 1-2

15 S E C T I O N 2 Installing the Control Unit In This Section About the Control Unit Before Installing the System Mounting the Cabinet Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Installing the Control's Circuit Board Installing the Cabinet Lock About the Control Unit The control unit is the main circuit board of the system. It provides: Dual microprocessor firmware IC chips (16-bit primary MPU, 8-bit secondary). A non-volatile SRAM IC chip for storing the programmed data, so the data will not be lost if the system loses all power. An RS-485 bus for connecting the operating panels, RF gateway, ACIU, and printer interface. 8 built-in hardwired points. 8 built-in output triggers. A built-in communicator and mounting space for an optional backup dialer. 1 built-in supervised bell output and an auxiliary relay. A built-in SIM loop that serves as an interface for sensors and output devices. Before Installing the System Before installing the control unit or any components of the system, go through the following steps to make sure the system will meet the customer s needs and that power requirements and wire runs will ensure proper operation. System Layout Diagram 1. Make a preliminary diagram showing the location of each component on the RS-485 bus. Include the control unit, the RS-485 bus run, the RF gateway, operating panels, etc., as well as any power units that may be required. 2. Indicate the cable distance between each device on the RS-485 bus run and indicate the current drawn by each device. 3. Review the power requirement information that is presented in the paragraphs that follow and finalize the system layout diagrams, making changes as required. 4. Check that the system components to be installed and their location are in agreement with the system layout for the installation to ensure proper operation of the system. 5. Verify the electrical connections to the CWG and 24-hour continuous-duty AC power outlet. 6. Determine any conditions within the premises that will require special attention; i.e., safety, adverse environmental conditions, repairs to deteriorated points, etc. 7. Advise the data group of the following: Any changes in conditions affecting the customization database. Any corrections in the premises telephone number, address, or customer name. 2-1

16 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Power Requirements Mounting the Cabinet The FOCUS CADET System uses the control unit power supply as the primary power source. Because the system power is distributed over the RS-485 bus, it is important to keep the voltage drops along the bus to a minimum. Good installation practices will go a long way toward minimizing both the effect of the voltage drops and the need for adding an external power unit. Where additional power is needed, a Power Supply Module (in a Power Unit Housing) can be introduced at sections of the bus. The power supply will provide power for its associated device, and for additional sections of the RS-485 bus, as well. For more information regarding power requirements, see the Power Requirements and the Specifications sections. Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not supplied) in a clean, dry area that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose. The location must be convenient for the routing of all wiring, and for future repair and maintenance. The control unit must be located in a protected area that is armed, unless occupied. If not occupied at any time, the area must be under 24-hr. protection. This precaution does not apply to any control unit that is protected against attack. Be careful when removing knockouts to avoid damaging the control board. Remove the control board from the control unit, if necessary. Do not drill mounting holes through the backshell. Place the backshell on the wall, mark the locations of the holes, remove the backshell, and drill the holes. Installing the Cabinet Lock Use an ADEMCO No. N6277 Cam Lock and No. P Clip for universal commercial cabinets. 1. Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED. 2. Fasten the control unit to the mounting surface, providing shims or a backboard to prevent distortion of the backshell. LOCKED RETAINER CLIP UNLOCKED RETAINER CLIP (NOTE POSITION) RETAINER SLOTS CABINET DOOR BOTTOM Figure 2-1: Installing Cabinet Lock 2-2

17 Section 2 Installing the Control Unit CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS (Shows typical local Grade A listing installation) RUN BELL WIRES IN CONDUIT PLUG THIS KNOCKOUT CLIP-ON DOOR TAMPER SWITCH PC BOARD CABINET MOUNTING HOLE (4 PLACES) PLUG THIS KNOCKOUT BACK TAMPER PLUG THIS KNOCKOUT TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN: KNOCKOUT OPENING DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE KNOCKOUT OPENING) CARRIAGE BOLT PLUG THIS KNOCKOUT RUN ALL REMAINING WIRES THROUGH HERE HEX NUT AND LOCK WASHER CABINET SIDE WALL (OUTSIDE) Figure 2-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing For a Grade A mercantile premises listed installation, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Mount the clip-on tamper switch to the cabinet's right-side wall as shown in Figure Wire it to the cabinet tamper input as shown in Figure 2-3, and enable the Cabinet Tamper option. Note: Cabinet tampers are automatically bypassed when the system is in Service mode. 3 Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12 or equivalent. The bell housing's tamper switch and inner tamper linings must be wired to point 8 and enable the Bell Box Tamper option via the downline loader. 4 Assign point 8 to a BA Group. Program it for Supervisory (SPV) point. 5 Run all wiring between the bell and control unit in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to be run in conduit. 6 Run all wiring not in conduit through the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the cabinet. 7 Plug all unused knockouts using the disc plugs and carriage bolts, as indicated in Figure Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet back-box using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws after all wiring, programming, and checkout procedures have been completed. Green Wire (Trigger Output 3) Door Tamper Switch Connect to J5 on the control unit board Cable Black Wire Figure 2-3: Cabinet Door Tamper Wiring 2-3

18 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide The cabinet tamper is automatically bypassed when the system is placed in Service mode and automatically unbypassed when the system is taken out of Service mode. Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing For a Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault listed installation, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Follow the instructions given previously for Grade A Mercantile Premises listing. 2 Mount a shock sensor or a back tamper (112) to the control's back-box and wire it to the cabinet tamper input (output 3 of J5 Triggers) and enable the Cabinet Tamper option. If a shock sensor is used, follow the manufacturer's instructions for proper sensor mounting. Installing the Control's Circuit Board DETAIL A SIDE VIEW OF BOARD INSERTED INTO SLOTS DETAIL B SIDE VIEW OF SHORT MOUNTING CLIPS (TYP.) hi_end_mnt-pcb Figure 2-4: Mounting the PC Board Perform the following steps to install the circuit board: Step Action 1 Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. To avoid damage to the clip when the mounting screws are tightened, make sure the clip orientation is exactly as shown in Figure 2-3. This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board. 2 Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated. 3 Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet with the accompanying screws. Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This ensures a good ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress field wiring away from the microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. Use the 2 loops on the left and right side walls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps. These steps are important to minimize the risk of panel RF interference with television reception. 2-4

19 S E C T I O N 3 Installing the Operating Panels In This Section About the Operating Panels Installing the Operating Panels Operating Panel Programming Mode Adjusting the Contrast Level Addressing the Operating Panels About the Operating Panels The FOCUS CADET system is controlled via a user-friendly operating panel. The system supports up to 8 operating panels. The operating panel provides: An interactive 19-character four-line LCD (16 characters per line) display that operates in a manner similar to an automatic teller machine (ATM). A numeric keypad similar to one on a TouchTone phone. An internal sounder, which annunciates for various situations, such as alarms, troubles, during entry/exit delay, and whenever a key is pressed. One operating panel can control all BA groups. Multiple operating panels will usually be needed in installations: Involving two or more BA groups with separate entrance/exit paths. Where an operating panel must be installed inside of a separately protected area within the premises. Where an operating panel is used in conjunction with an access point. Operating Features The operating features of the operating panel are as follows: Menus are employed to guide the user through the various operating procedures. Menu items and other selectable choices are shown on the screen with an arrow (>) that lines up with one of the four selector buttons on each side of the screen. Help screens are available to assist the user in operating the system. The display screen and the numeric keypad become illuminated when any key is pressed. This enables the operating panel to be used in dark or dimly lit areas. The customer can use the operating panel to change certain programming such as descriptors, access codes, privilege levels, and permanent, temporary, and holiday schedules. The operating panel performs an automatic self-test whenever power is applied. If it passes the power-on test, it will emit a single beep, flash the backlight, and display the following message: ADT INTERACTIVE KEYPAD WAITING FOR COMM. Installing the Operating Panels Each operating panel connects to a port in the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The RS-485 bus may be run up to 4000 feet. The total end-to-end reach can be extended to 8,000 feet by using a RS-485 Repeater at the end of the bus. Current loading and voltage drop considerations may limit the maximum allowable wire lengths to less than 4000 feet. See the Power Requirements section for additional information. 3-1

20 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide RS-485 Cable Types Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable as described in the table below, differing only in the type of insulation (B6445) Cable - used as general-purpose (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air-handling plenums. Cable Run Considerations The safeguarding of RS-485 bus cable from physical damage is vital to continuous uninterrupted operation of the FOCUS CADET System. Keep the following guidelines in mind when running the cable: Bus cable should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable, to minimize voltage drop. Any junction boxes (test terminals) that are required can be placed to be accessible from the floor. Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus, and in this way serve as an aid during troubleshooting. There are no bus-terminating jumpers on the control unit circuit board. The bus requires a terminating jumper in the last device of the RS-485 bus. Do not locate the operating panel in any area where the temperature may drop below 32 F (0 C) or rise above 122 F (50 C). At temperatures below 32 F, the display will fade and the glass may crack. Temperatures above 122 F will affect the display output. Mounting and Wiring the Operating Panel JUMPER E1 (REMOVE JUMPER TO DISCONNECT TERMINATION RESISTOR) BLACK WIRE 4 FLYING LEADS FOR FIELD WIRING U4 U3 U2 U1 EXTERNAL TAMPER CONNECTION Figure 3-1: Details of the Operating Panel Circuit Board To mount and wire the operating panel, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Locate the operating panel(s) where the user may conveniently turn BA protection to Day Set or Nite Set. The right-hand side of the operating panel should be located no closer than 4 from a side wall. 2 Run the buses as required and make sure to appropriately tag them, so that they can be readily identified at some future time, if maintenance becomes necessary. Do not T-tap the RS-485 cable. 3-2

21 Step Action 3 Connect the RS-485 bus cable to the control unit (see table below). Wire Gauge/Color Function RS-485 #1 Terminal #19 AWG Blue RS #19 AWG Yellow RS #16 AWG Red + 12 VDC Power 19 #16 AWG Black DC Return Power 20 Section 3 Installing the Operating Panels 4 Remove the nylon screw on the bottom of the operating panel and separate the back plate from the front of the unit. 5 Mount the back plate to the wall using any of the appropriate holes. 6 Connect the operating panel wires to the RS-485 cable, matching color to color. 7 Each device that connects to the RS-485 bus has a terminating jumper designated E1 (see Figure 3-1). Inserting the jumper connects a terminating resistor; removing the jumper disconnects the resistor. Insert the jumper on the last device on each RS-485 bus. All other devices on the RS-485 bus run must have the jumper removed. 8 Reconnect the front plate to the back plate and reinsert the nylon screw. 9 Install the instruction label at the rear of the operating panel in the slot provided. 10 Repeat the steps for each operating panel. Addressing the Operating Panels The control unit must be powered up to address the operating panels. This can be done now, by temporarily applying the AC power, or can be done later, after the AC and standby battery wiring is complete. See the Power Requirements section. Communication Group Number and Unit Number Each operating panel must be addressed with a communication group number and a unit number for proper communication with the control unit. The group number and unit number serve to supervise the panel, permitting the control unit to periodically address each panel and verify a response. There are two group numbers (numbers 00 and 01) that are reserved for the operating panels (the communication group default value is number 31). The unit numbers available are 0 through 3. We recommend that the unit numbers start with the default value 0 for the first operating panel in the communication group, and continue with 1 for the second panel, and so on, up to unit number 3. Addressing Considerations Be aware of the following considerations when addressing the operating panels: One operating panel can control all BA groups. Regardless of whether communication group number 00 or 01 is used, all operating panels display the same alarm and/or trouble information. If the sounder comes on for one panel (because of an alarm, trouble, entry delay alert, etc.), it also comes on for the other panels. When there are several operating panels using the same communication group number, and one of the operating panels is activated by touching a key or entering an ID code, the other panels are locked out and display Keypad In Use, Please Wait until the first panel is deactivated. The active period ends 60 seconds after the last key is pressed. Operating panels using a different communication group number are not affected. 3-3

22 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Where there are two BA groups with the same communication group number and with similar opening or closing schedules, it is possible to generate an Entry alarm unintentionally. An example is when one person enters the premises and triggers an entry delay for one BA group. Another person entering the second BA group will not be able to turn off the second BA group because the operating panel has been locked until the first entry delay expires. An entry alarm may also be generated when an impatient person does not want to wait for an operating panel to clear before being able to close. To avoid such unintentional entry alarms, assign one panel to communication group number 00 and assign the other panel communication group number 01. Any other panel can be assigned either 00 or 01. When addressing operating panels, make sure that no two operating panels have the same address (same group and unit number). Failure to do so may result in a communication clash. Setting the Address of the Operating Panel If you are pre-programming operating panels in the shop, DO NOT change the default communication group number 31 at that time. Wait until the operating panel has been wired to the RS-485 bus in the premises. Failure to do so results in a communication clash when the control unit is powered up, which can be corrected only by powering down the control unit and then powering it back up again. If you desire to address the operating panels at this time, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Apply AC power temporarily to the control unit. If the LCD display cannot be read upon power-up, press [0] and [#] simultaneously and use the middle two keys to the right of the display to adjust the contrast until the display is readable. 2 Wait for the operating panel to perform the power-on self-test. After this is completed, the panel displays ADT INTERACTIVE KEYPAD WAITING FOR COMM. 3 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously to enter the operating panel program mode. 4 Enter the default code (or other number, if you are not using 1 2 3). 5 Press Change. 6 Enter the new communication group and unit number for this operating panel. 7 Press Quit to exit the program mode. The control unit will recognize the operating panel if it has been properly addressed. Note: The firmware level of the operating panel is indicated by the characters at the upper right-hand corner of the parameter display. Where an operating panel is being used for access control with an ACIU, its communication Unit number on the RS-485 bus must coincide with the communication Unit number of the ACIU. An operating panel being used for access control (Communication Group 0) becomes locked out during the period that any other operating panel at Communication Group 0 becomes activated, and vice versa. Operating Panel Program Mode The Operating Panel Program mode is to establish the operating panel s parameters. Selecting CHANGE on the parameter screen while in the operating panel program mode brings up the change menu. From this screen, the system will allow: Any of the RS-485 communication parameters to be changed. The keypad and screen of the operating panel to be tested for proper operation. The adjustment of the contrast level of the screen. The operating panel to be placed in a temporary training mode. The operating panel to be configured as an annunciator. 3-4

23 Changing Parameters Section 3 Installing the Operating Panels To change any parameter, select the parameter to be changed, enter the new value at the keypad, and then select ENTER. The following table explains the parameters and the values to be chosen: Parameter Default Value Explanation of Value Required Keycode 1,2,3 Any three digits, for entering the operating panel program mode. Should not be changed unless there is a particular reason for changing it, such as standardization within the area or region served by a given ADT office. Baud baud is required; 4800 cannot be used at this time. Group Number 31 Range is 0-31 (00 and 01 are reserved for the operating panels). Unit Number 7 Range is 0-3. Contrast Center Can be increased or decreased using the contrast screen. To call up contrast screen without first entering Programming mode, press [0] and [#] simultaneously. Adjusting the Contrast Level The contrast of the screen can be adjusted at any time, without entering a code, by simultaneously pressing [0] and [#]. This will bring up the contrast adjustment screen, allowing the contrast to be increased by pressing CONTRAST (+) or decreased by pressing CONTRAST (-). If the AC and battery power are temporarily disconnected, the contrast setting that is adjusted by the method described above will be overridden by the contrast setting established via the operating panel parameter screen. 3-5

24 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 3-6

25 S E C T I O N 4 Basic Hardwired Points In This Section About the Hardwired Points Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration Wiring the Hardwired Points About the Hardwired Points The FOCUS CADET system has eight built-in hardwired points. The points are individually addressable to one of four BA groups. All eight points may be programmed with any input point type, although points 1 and 2 are set up to support 2-wire smoke detectors. Some additional characteristics of the eight hardwired points: EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor. Support of normally-open or normally-closed sensors. Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 (32 total). Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style D configuration. 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on points 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device). Point 8 may be configured as a bell box tamper. Default point types for the hardwire points are: Point Description Default Type Gateway # Hard ID 1 Hardwire Point 1 Fire (FA) Hardwire Point 2 Fire (FA) Hardwire Point 3 Moveable Delay (MD) Hardwire Point 4 Moveable Instant (MI) Hardwire Point 5 Moveable Instant (MI) Hardwire Point 6 Moveable Delay (MD) Hardwire Point 7 Moveable Instant (MI) Hardwire Point 8 Moveable Instant (MI) To disable a hardwired point, enter "00" for the point type (NZ) and enter zeroes (0) for the Hard ID. Wiring the Hardwired Points The wiring of the hardwired points is divided into three parts: Wiring burglary and panic devices to points 1-8. Wiring 2-wire smoke detectors to points 1 and 2. Wiring 4-wire smoke detectors to points

26 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Points 1-8 To wire burglary and/or panic devices to points 1-8 (terminals 25-38), perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Connect normally closed devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop. Note: The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices, following the last device. 2 Connect normally open devices in parallel (across) the loop. Note: The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last device. The maximum loop resistance is 100 ohms for points 1 and 2, and 300 ohms for all other points (excluding the 2K EOL resistor). Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Points 1 and 2 Points 1 and 2 have the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. Each point provides enough standby current (2mA) to power up to 16 of the smoke detectors listed below. 2K EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each point at the last detector for fire points. The alarm current provided by points 1 and 2 will support only one smoke detector each in the alarmed state. Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors You may use up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 listed in the table below. DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL # Photoelectric 6-24 VDC (switch 1 on ) Photoelectric 6-24 VDC, multi-criteria algorithms, fixed/rate of rise heat (switch 1 on ) Photoelectric 6-12 VDC, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat ESL 521B ESL 521BXT ESL 429AT Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2400 Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2400TH Photoelectric w/b401b base System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric w/heat sensor and B401B base System Sensor 2451TH Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1400 Ionization w/b401b base System Sensor 1451 Photoelectric duct detect. w/dh400 base System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric (3534-2C) Photoelectric duct detect. w/dh400 base System Sensor 2451 Ionization duct detector w/dh400 base System Sensor 1451DH Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1100 Ionization w/b110lp base System Sensor 1151 Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2100 Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2100T Photoelectric w/b110lp base System Sensor 2151 Photoelectric w/thermostat (3534-2CT) UL These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the FOCUS CADET, and are the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be used. 4-2

27 Section 4 Basic Hardwired Points To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to points 1 and 2 (terminals 25-28), perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Select from the list compatible 2-wire smoke detectors. Note: These are the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be used with the FOCUS CADET system. 2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across point 1 and/or point 2 terminals (25 through 28). See Figure 4-1. Note: Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors. 3 If EOL resistors are presently connected across point 1 and point 2 terminals, remove them. Connect the EOL resistors across the loop wires of each point at the last detector. Figure 4-1: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Point 1 (also Point 2, Terminals 27 and 28) Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Points 1-8 When programmed for fire, points 1-8 can monitor 4-wire smoke detectors, normally-open fire alarm initiating devices, or normally-open sprinkler system supervisory devices. You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's Auxiliary Relay Output without exceeding the output's rating. Program the Auxiliary Relay Output to respond to 4-wire smoke detector reset. Also, Jumper P3 must be set to the top position, shorting pins 1 & 2. UL Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device (use a ADT or a System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module). See Figure 4-2. Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay. This allows the detectors to be reset via the Alarm Reset sequence. Programming for the Alarm Reset sequence must be done via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke detectors are listed below. DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL # Photoelectric VDC Photoelectric VDC, multi-criteria algorithms, fixed/rate of rise heat Photoelectric VDC Photoelectric VDC, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat Photoelectric VDC, auxiliary relay, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat Photoelectric VDC, built-in sounder, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat Photoelectric VDC, built-in sounder, auxiliary relay, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat ESL 541C ESL 541CXT ESL 449C ESL 449CT ESL 449CRT ESL 449CST ESL 449CSRT Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412 Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH Ionization, direct wire System Sensor

28 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to points 1-8 (terminals 25-38), perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Select compatible 4-wire smoke detectors. Some are listed on the previous page. 2 Connect 4-wire smoke detectors across points 1 through 8 (25 through 38). See Figure If EOL resistors are presently connected across the terminals, remove them. 4 Connect the EOL power supervision relay module (435243) and the 2k EOL resistor at the last detector on each point. See Figure 4-2. Note: Each point must have its own power supervision relay module. 5 Connect the power wires from the 4-wire smoke detectors and the EOL power supervision relay module to the control unit. Connect the ground wire to terminal 12, and the positive power to the normally closed side of the auxiliary relay (terminal 9). See Figure 4-2. Note: Auxiliary power is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay. 6 Move jumper P3 to short pins 1 and 2, making the auxiliary relay wet (12-volt output). 7 Program the Auxiliary Relay Output to 4-wire smoke detector reset. N.C. 9 + POLE 10 AUXILIARY RELAY N.O. GROUND POINT TERMINALS (25-38) CONTROL PANEL WIRE SMOKE OR COMBUSTION DETECTORS HEAT DETECTOR + BLK + RED VIOLET EOL POWER SUPERVISION RELAY MODULE ADT PART # OHM EOLR SHOWN POWERED. RELAY OPENS WHEN POWER IS LOST. Figure 4-2: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Points 1-8 Points 3 and 4 Style "D" (Class A Fire Loop) Configuration The style "D" configuration is a Class A Fire Loop. It can annunciate an alarm condition even with an open in the wire run. A break or open in the wire run will annunciate a trouble condition on point 3, but the system can still annunciate an alarm condition, if a sensor is shorted. Wiring for Style "D" Configuration CONTROL PANEL 32 POINT k EOLR Break #2 C POINT A Break #1 B Figure 4-3: Style "D" Configuration on Points 3 and 4 4-4

29 Section 4 Basic Hardwired Points Referring to Figure 4-3, if Break #1 occurs, point 3 goes into a trouble condition, but will continue to monitor device "A" for an alarm condition. Point 4 will continue to monitor devices "B" and "C" for alarm conditions. If Break #2 occurs, point 3 goes into a trouble condition and will still monitor devices "A", "B" and "C" for alarm conditions. The trouble and alarm messages will be sent to the CCC as point 3 trouble or alarm. To wire points 3 and 4 for the Style D configuration, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Select UL Listed fire sensors (4-wire smoke detectors, sprinkler system supervisory devices, etc.). 2 Run the wiring starting at point 3 terminals (29 and 30) through the facility and homerun back to the control unit to the terminals for point 4 (31 and 32). 3 Connect the fire sensors in parallel along the wire run. See Figure If EOL resistors are presently connected across the terminals, remove them. Connect only one 2k resistor directly across the terminals for point 4 inside the control cabinet. See Figure Connect the power wires from the fire sensors to the control unit. Connect the ground wire to terminal 12, and the positive power to the normally closed side of the auxiliary relay (terminal 9). Note: Auxiliary power is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay. Programming for Style D Configuration Programming for the Style 'D' configuration may be done via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration Point 8 may be used as a tamper input for the tamper switches and tamper liner on a Grade A Bell Box. See the Installing the Control Unit and Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay sections for wiring information. To program point 8 for the tamper configuration, assign it to a BA group and program the point as a Supervisory (SPV) input type. This disables the ground fault detection for HW point 8. See the Programming section for information about the procedure. If you are using the bell box tamper, program the option via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Otherwise the system will not detect a "short" on point

30 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 4-6

31 S E C T I O N 5 Built-in SIM Loop In This Section About the SIM Loop SIM Loop Supervision Installing SIM and SIM Sensors Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop About the SIM Loop The SIM Loop is a built-in interface used to connect SIM (Sensor Interface Module) sensors with the FOCUS CADET system. The SIM Loop can accommodate up to 64 points and provides up to 128mA of current. The sensor types employed on the SIM loop can be divided into two categories: Sensors that have been uniquely manufactured with a built-in SIM. Standard sensors, which require connection to a separate SIM in order to be connected to the loop. The SIM loop quad cable consists of four wires. The two wires (blue and yellow) are used in a multiplexed arrangement to serve a dual function. During one half-cycle, the wires are used for communication with the panel; during the next half-cycle, they provide limited + 12V operating power. The other two wires (red and black) provide power for those devices that require system power. All SIM Loop devices must be programmed to Gateway 9. Sensor Interface Module (SIM) A Sensor Interface Module (SIM) is either connected to an external sensor or has a built-in sensor (SIM sensor). A SIM sensor is wired to the blue (terminal 39 (+)) and yellow (terminal 40 (-)) wires of the branch cable. When you are using an external sensor, the SIM connects to all four wires of the SIM Loop quad branch cable, (Red (terminal 19 (+) and Black (terminal 20 (-)). Each SIM and SIM sensor comes with a label containing the Hard ID number as well as information that identifies the manufacturer and gives the date of manufacture. The Hard ID number is used to identify the SIM or SIM sensor to the control unit, and is linked to a system point number during the programming of the point. Sensors with a built-in SIM: Have been designed for the multiplexed operation. Require only a 2-wire connection to the SIM Loop quad trunk. Are appreciably smaller than a separate SIM, permitting them to be housed in devices as small as contacts. The SIM connected to a sensor is: A small circuit board, protected by shrink tubing, with four input wires and six output wires. Housed either in the device with which it is being used or in a separately ordered (7032) Junction Box. A low-current device drawing less than 1mA. Powered from the + 12V (red and black) wires of the SIM Loop trunk cable, if system power is required. Capable of being used as an output point. When activated, it will provide a + 12V output to operate a relay, LED, etc. 5-1

32 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide SIM Loop Applications The SIM Loop is designed for use with the following: Sensor Interface Module (SIM), used with Junction Box SCN SIM Door/Window contact SIM Overhead Door contact SIM Manual FA Pullbox SIM Holdup Alarm Switch SIM Relay Output Module kit and/or with Relay Module SCN CTAD SIM Smoke Detector LIM (Loop Interface Module) Supervised Horn/Strobe SIM. 450SIM, 633SIM, 669SIM Motion Sensors. Installation Guidelines The following guidelines should be considered when planning the installation: Total Length of SIM Loop Trunk Cable Must not exceed 2000 feet. This length may be less to comply with minimum voltage to farthest SIM sensor. Maximum Length to SIM Sensor Minimum Voltage to Farthest SIM and Sensor SIM Loop Log Form Maximum Current Draw from SIM Loop Trunk Cable 100 feet. Note: T-tapping to an existing cable without cutting the existing cable is permitted and will not adversely effect supervision. 12.0VDC with a fully charged battery and AC power applied, or an external power supply, if used (8.3VDC at end of standby time). As a part of the installation, complete the SIM Loop Log Form shown previously in this section. When the form has been completed, make a duplicate copy. Store one copy in the control unit and file the other copy in the office. Black and Red wires: 1.0A; Blue and Yellow wires: 128mA. SIM Loop Supervision A short on the SIM Loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory point (241) and reports as a trouble condition only. As such, it should be assigned the point type SPV, if annunciation as a trouble condition is desired. An open in the blue and/or yellow wires of the branch cable will be sensed as a comm fail condition. Installing SIM and SIM Sensors Install each sensor in the manner recommended in the manufacturer s instructions. System-powered sensors cannot be adjusted or tested until the system power has been turned on, the point data has been loaded into the control unit, and communication has been established between the control unit and the SIM sensors. All SIM sensors are connected to the SIM Loop via a 2-conductor cable. Two types of cables are available for the connections. Each is a 2-conductor, 18-AWG cable, differing only in type of insulation. The cables are: Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA where wire is being installed in air-handling plenums (Teflon or equiv.). 5-2

33 Section 5 SIM Loop Sensor Power Classification The various types of sensors employed with the FOCUS CADET System can be divided into the following basic categories according to the source of power required: Sensor Type Power Source Wiring Configuration SIM Sensors System-powered sensor Independently powered sensor Receives operating power and communications from the SIM loop trunk cable's blue and yellow wires. Receives operating power from the SIM Loop trunk cable's red and black wires via the SIM. The sensor must be capable of operating between 8 and 15 volts, with a maximum current of 85mA. Uses operating power from an external source. Uses the blue and yellow wires. The black and red conductors are not used. Two types of system-powered sensors: Integrated, such as Horn/Strobe, which uses the 4 conductors of the SIM Loop trunk cable. Non-integrated, which uses the output wires of the SIM: black/white (-) and red/white (+). They also use 3 wires, for connection of a 33k resistor: orange, blue/white, and white. Wired the same way as a SIM sensor except the 12-volt terminals on the SIM are connected to an external power source. Compatible SIM Loop Devices Model Description Function 4208U 4209U 4208SNF Universal 8-Point Expander Universal Group Zoning Module Universal Class A Module Uniquely identifies 8 EOLR-supervised points (all points use 10k resistors, supplied). Each Hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to any point number. Loops A&B can be programmed for fast (10mSec) response. Can be optionally powered from an external DC power supply to reduce current draw from the SIM loop. Tamper protected. Uniquely identifies 4 supervised points or 2 supervised points in the grouped mode. Supports up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors on each of its 4 loops, regardless of group setting. Each Hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to any point number. Tamper protected. Provides 6 Class B supervised points and 2 Class A supervised points (all points use 10k resistors, supplied). Can be optionally powered from an external DC power supply to reduce current draw from the SIM loop. Each hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to any point number. Loops A&B can be programmed for fast (10msec) response. Tamper protected. Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor A SIM Sensor is connected to the SIM Loop quad trunk cable. The cables are limited to 100 ft long. If the branch cable drops below 6 feet or is subject to damage that may result in shorting of conductors, a Fuse must be installed. This protects the SIM Loop trunk from being disabled in the event of a short on the wires. Only the SIM with the blown fuse will be in Comm Fail, not the entire SIM Loop. When running SIM loop wires, they must not be run within 6" of AC power, telephone, or intercom wiring. Because the SIM loop is carrying data between the control unit and the devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication. The SIM loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used.) 5-3

34 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide SIM Loop Log Form Total Loop Load ma Unit # 9 Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group Point # Description Point # Description ID # Location ID # Location BA Group BA Group 5-4

35 Section 5 SIM Loop Install an SIM or SIM sensor by taking the following steps and referring to Figures 5-1 through 5-6. Step Action 1 Run the branch cable no more than 100 feet long from the SIM Loop trunk. Use cable SCN or for 2-wire SIM connections. Use SCN or for 4-wire SIM connections. 2 Cut the sheathing of the SIM Loop trunk to expose the four wires of the trunk. 3 Use Scotchlok SCN connectors (#558) to connect the branch cable to the SIM Loop trunk, matching the colors of the wires on the trunk with the branch cable. 4 If the branch cable is subject to damage, splice in an SCN in-line fuse with holder and place it close to the SIM Loop trunk. 5 Snap the Trunk Junction box SCN around the connections to enhance appearance. 6 Connect the branch cable to the SIM or SIM Sensor. SIM sensors that have screw terminals include the smoke detector, the FA Pullbox, motion sensors, and glassbreaks. Connect these directly to the branch cable. 7 Splice the SIM module to the branch cable using SCN connectors to splice it. 8 Collect the point description and Hard ID's of all installed SIMs so they can be programmed into the control unit. Use gateway unit # 9 for the SIM Loop. Use the SIM Loop Log Form to record the Hard ID, BA Group, and point description. Once the data has been collected, it must be entered into the control unit via the operating panel. See the Programming section for the procedure. Once the data has been programmed, walktests LEDs on the units will function. The Hard ID label: The top line is the barcode. The second line is in readable text. The first eight digits are the Hard ID. The next six digits are the Stock Code Number (SCN #). The next four digits are the manufacturing date codes ("year week"). The last two digits are for the vendor codes like "P" for Pine Brook. 9 Mark the SIM Sensor point number stick-on labels SCN Peel off the number that represents the point number and stick it on the outside of the sensor so it is clearly visible and can be referred to later. Sensors cannot be walk-tested unless the sensors' point type, group, gateway, and Hard ID are in the control unit's database. CONTROL UNIT CONNECTIONS SIM OUT RED +12V BLK GND TRANSISTOR SWITCH RED-WHT BLK-WHT +12V GND OUTPUT POWER (FOR INPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH IS CONTINUOUSLY CLOSED TO SUPPLY SENSOR POWER. FOR OUTPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH CLOSES ONLY WHEN COMMANDED FROM CONTROL UNIT.) 39 BLU COM ( + ) SYSTEM-POWERED SENSOR W/ TRANSFER CONTACTS AND TAMPER NON-POWERED SENSOR W/ BREAK-ONLY CONTACT (NO TAMPER) +12V +12V GND C5 2.3 uf 25V IN 0 IN 2 ORG AL-TBL BLU-WHT TMPR T 40 YEL COM ( ) WHT IN 0 IN 2 OUT 0 MICROPROCESSOR INPUT MICROPROCESSOR OUTPUT CONDITION IN 0 IN 2 NORMAL 6V GND ALARM GND GND TAMPER 6V 12V OPEN LOOP 12V 12V CONDITION IN 0 IN 2 NORMAL 6V GND ALARM 12V GND TAMPER 6V 12V OPEN LOOP 12V 12V Figure 5-1: SIM Wiring to System-Powered and Nonpowered Sensors 5-5

36 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 39 BLU COM+ +12V POWER LED SEE NOTE 3 SENSOR POWER +12V 40 YEL COM- DATA IN/OUT OUT 0 OUT 1 SIM INTERFACE GND IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 TAMPER SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 2 SELF TEST INPUT SENSOR ELEMENT ALARM OUTPUT DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUT GND NOTES: 1. POINT OPTION 3="Y". 2. DIAGNOSTIC OPTION ENABLED. 3. IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "N", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR ALARMS PROVIDED POINT IS NOT BYPASSED. IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "Y", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR ALARMS ONLY IN WALK TEST OR SERVICE MODE PROVIDED POINT IS NOT BYPASSED. Figure 5-2: Connection for a SIM Loop Powered SIM Sensor HORN-STROBE SIM OUT RED +12V BLACK GND TRANSISTOR SWITCH OUT 0 OR 3K EOLR BRN/W RED/W + + HORN TRANSISTOR SWITCH 3K EOLR STROBE BLK/W 39 BLU COM+ POWER SUPERVISION 33K TRANSISTOR SWITCH IN 0 33K 40 YEL COM- Figure 5-3: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe 5-6

37 Section 5 SIM Loop SIM 19 RED +12V OUT 0 TRANSISTOR SWITCH SEE NOTE 1 RED/W + 20 BLK GND BLK/W 39 BLU COM+ TAMPER 33K 33K NC IN 0 OR AL-TBL C 33K IN 2 BLU/W TMPR NO 40 YEL COM- WHT NOTE: 1) POINT OPTION 3="N" 2) SIM MOUNTED INSIDE SENSOR OR IN JUNCTION BOX SPACED NO MORE THAN 6 FEET FROM SENSOR. Figure 5-4: SIM Wiring to a Sensor SIM RED +12V BLK GND OUT 0 TRANSISTOR SWITCH SEE NOTE RED/W BLK/W ADT FOCUS-VVS VAULT VIBRATION SENSOR X X 33K 39 BLU COM+ + LED C NC NO TAMPER K 33K 40 YEL COM- IN 2 IN 0 OR AL-TBL BLU/W TMPR WHT BLK RED TEST TRANSMITTER NOTE: POINT OPTION 3="Y" Figure 5-5: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor 5-7

38 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide (10K 5% 1/2W) BLK RED YEL BLU SIM ORA BLU/WHT WHT RED/WHT BLK/WHT X X X X X X GRN BLU/GRN WHT 10K 5% 1/2W BLU/WHT RED BLK REMOVE JUMPER J W/2W ADAPTER BOARD (8Ma NORMAL STANDBY) (35Ma ALARM) YEL BLU/YEL ORA BLU/ORA VDC SUPERVISED 4Ma NORMAL STANDBY 30Ma MAX WHEN ALL DEVICES IN ALARM K EOLR (INSIDE ELECTRICALLY LAST DEVICE IN LOOP) Figure 5-6: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter Compatible Detectors for 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter Detector Type UL ID Base UL ID 429C, 429CT, 521B ESL Photoelectric S BXT Photo w/thermostat S AT Photoelectric Head S10A ( ) S ( ) Ionization Head ( ) S ( ) Heat Head ( ) S00 Air-Duct Detector Function Card UL ID ( ) 611UD Photoelectric Head ( ) (609U10) S ( ) 612UD Ionization Head ( ) (609U10) S00 Fire Door Application Smoke and fire doors, normally held in the open position to allow free movement in corridors of buildings, are required to be released when a fire alarm is activated. This requires a Supervised SIM or SIM to release the Door Hold-Open device. To install a Supervised SIM or SIM to release the Door Hold-Open device, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Mount and connect the SIM device. See Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor shown previously in this section. Note: When SIM is used, the cable run between the SIM and Door Hold-Open device cannot exceed 3 feet. 2 Program it as FAC (21) point type. See the Programming section for details on the programming procedure. For NFPA Life Safety applications, install a Door Contact to monitor the status of the door. Program it as MID (5) point type. The 4208U, 4209U and 4208SNF must be set for "Serial Number" mode. See the device's installation instructions for the correct DIPswitch setting for this mode of operation. Each module must be set for a different serial number. 5-8

39 Section 5 SIM Loop 4208U ON ON DIP Switches TB2 5 4 NOT USED ( ) GROUND 3 (+) 12V REED (TAMPER) SWITCH TB ( ) SIM (+)}TO LOOP (USE TWISTED PAIR) 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k LOOPS: A B C D E F G H (EACH LOOP S MAX RESISTANCE: 300 ohms + 10k EOLR) Figure 5-7: Wiring of the 4208U to the SIM Loop } ON ON ON OFF ON SIDEVIEW POSITION 1: REED (TAMPER) SWITCH POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT THE 2 (GROUPED) OR 4 (NON GROUPED) SENSOR DEVICE GROUP ADDRESS (SHOWN ON, ON, ON, OFF = 2nd GROUP SELECTION). POSITION 6: POSITION 7: POSITION 8: TB1 SELECT GROUP MODE (SHOWN OFF = NON GROUPED). DEVICE TYPE (SHOWN ON = SERIAL NUMBER MODE). NOT USED. SET TO OFF. SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION SETTING (SHOWN OFF = TAMPER ENABLED) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) LOOPS: A B C D 4209U TB ( ) GND (+) 12VDC SWITCHED POWER SOURCE, (VIA CONTROL PANEL S AUXILIARY RELAY-PROGRAM RELAY FOR SMOKE DETECTOR RESET. ( ) (+)} TO SIM LOOP (USE TWISTED PAIR) THE EOL RESISTOR MUST BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE LOOP WIRES AT THE LAST DETECTOR (+) ( ) SMOKE (+) ( ) SMOKE (+) ( ) SMOKE (+) ( ) SMOKE 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR MAX OF 100 ohms WIRING RESISTANCE AND 2k EOLR UP TO 16 2-WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS Figure 5-8: Wiring of the 4209U to the SIM Loop DIP SWITCHES (TYPICAL SETTING; ALL SWITCHES SHIPPED IN ON POSITION) TB2 POSITION 1: SELECT RESPONSE TIME FOR LOOPS A &B (SHOWN ON = SLOW: 400 msec.) 6 NOT USED 5 OFF ON POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT SERIAL NUMBERS FOR MODULE LOOPS A - H FROM THE SERIAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT TABLE SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 (SHOWN ON, ON, ON, OFF ) POSITIONS 6,7: SELECT THE SERIAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT TABLE (SHOWN ON, ON = TABLE 1) POSITION 8: SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION SETTING (SHOWN OFF = TAMPER ENABLED) EARTH GROUND (WHEN ( ) MOUNTED REMOTELY) (+) 12 VDC OPTIONAL ( ) GROUND TO SIM LOOP ( ) (USE TWISTED PAIR; (+) WIRING SUPERVISED BY CONTROL PANEL) REED (TAMPER) SWITCH TB LOOPS 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K A B C D E F G H CLASS B ZONES EACH LOOP MAX RESISTANCE: k EOLR CLASS A ZONES EACH LOOP SIDE MAX RESISTANCE: 150 Ω Figure 5-9: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Point Expander 5-9

40 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide DIP SWITCHES (NOT USED) 4208SNF TB LOOP H OUTPUT + LOOP G OUTPUT + ( ) EARTH GROUND (NOT REQUIRED) TO CONTROL PANEL HARDWARE POINTS NOTE: GROUND RETURN IS VIA TB (+) 12 VDC ( ) GROUND TO CONTROL PANEL AUXILIARY POWER (SUPERVISED) 1 NO CONNECTION REED (TAMPER) SWITCH (NOT FUNCTIONAL) TB NO CONNECTION LOOPS G H EACH LOOP SIDE MAX RESISTANCE: 150 Figure 5-10: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Class B to Class A Converter Installing a Horn/Strobe SIM (472488) to Reset a 4208U or 4209U The FOCUS CADET provides the capability to reset latching type glassbreak detectors. This requires the use if a Horn/Strobe SIM (472488) connected to either a 4208U or 4209U module. See Figure 5-11 for the connections. Program the point associated to the Horn/Strobe SIM as Fire Alarm type 09 (FA) with option 1 (Smoke Reset) set as YES. During a Reset Alarm sequence, the Horn/Strobe SIM removes power from the 4208U/4209U for 6 seconds resetting the latching glassbreak detectors connected to the module. BLU (+) THE EOL RESISTOR MUST BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE LOOP WIRES AT THE LAST DETECTOR MAX OF 100 ohms WIRING RESISTANCE AND 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR UP TO 16 2-WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS YEL (-) HORN - STROBE SIM OUT 1 TB2 LOOPS: D (+) ( ) C (+) ( ) B (+) ( ) A (+) ( ) 4209U 19 RED +12V TRANSISTOR SWITCH (ORG) 3K EOLR 1 TB BLACK GND BLU COM+ OUT 1 TRANSISTOR SWITCH POWER SUPERVISION (BRN) (RED) (BLK) K EOLR OFF ON SIDEVIEW } ON REED (TAMPER) SWITCH POSITION 1: SELECT GROUP MODE (SHOWN OFF = NON GROUPED). POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT THE 2 (GROUPED) OR 4 (NON GROUPED) SENSOR DEVICE GROUP ADDRESS (SHOWN ON, ON, ON, OFF = 2nd GROUP SELECTION). POSITION 6: DEVICE TYPE (SHOWN ON = SERIAL NUMBER MODE). POSITION 7: NOT USED. SET TO OFF. POSITION 8: SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION SETTING (SHOWN OFF = TAMPER ENABLED). 33K TRANSISTOR SWITCH NOTES: 1. THE MUST BE PROGRAMMED AS FA TYPE (09) WITH OPTION 1 SET. IN 0 33K 2. DURING A RESET ALARM, THE WILL REMOVE POWER FROM 4209U/4208U FOR 6 SECONDS. 40 YEL COM 4209USIM-001-V0 Figure 5-11: Wiring a Horn/Strobe SIM to a 4209U for Resetting Glassbreak Detectors 5-10

41 Installing the Loop Interface Module (LIM) (472425) Section 5 SIM Loop The LIM connects to the trunk of a SIM Loop and it functions like a SIM, but it employs a 2-wire protection loop that is supervised for grounds. Consequently, it can be used for retrofit applications involving sensors connected to a 2-wire loop, fire alarm applications that require a ground-supervised loop, and other applications in which a SIM cannot be used for one reason or another. Mounting and Wiring the Loop Interface Module TAMPER SWITCH OPERATOR TAMPER SWITCH (ORDERED SEPARATELY) (NOTE 1) SIM GATEWAY TRUNK CONNECTIONS TA TB2 J (BLK) 2 (RED) 3 (YEL) 4 (BLU) JUMPER J1 (REMOVE IF USING TAMPER) LOOP CONNECTIONS HOUSING UNIT Figure 5-12: Loop Interface Module To mount and wire the LIM, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Mount the housing unit in a location where the LIM will be protected from tampering or damage caused by machinery-moving equipment. 2 Record the Hard ID number of the LIM and its associated gateway. 3 Snap the LIM circuit board into the housing. 4 Make the wiring connections from the LIM to the gateway (see Figure 5-12). 5 Make the wiring connections from the LIM to the sensor (see Figures 5-13 and 5-14). The loop resistance must not exceed 300 ohms. 5 Using a Label (sensor number sheet), peel off the appropriate sensor point number and stick it onto the cover of the housing unit. We recommend that a label indicating the type of sensor involved and its location be affixed to the inside front cover of the housing unit. 6 Close the cover of the housing unit. 7 Load the LIM point data into the control unit. See the Programming section for information about the procedure. 5-11

42 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide LOOP INTERFACE MODULE TB1 SENSOR FROM SIM GATEWAY TRUNK { BLK RED YEL BLU TB JUMPER + TA NO C NC 80mA (max.) 3K EOL RESISTOR Figure 5-13: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Powered Sensor LOOP INTERFACE MODULE LACING / FOIL TB BLK RED YEL BLU TB LOW SIDE FEED HIGH SIDE FEED LOW SIDE RETURN HIGH SIDE RETURN BLK RED YEL BLU CONTACT C NO NC Figure 5-14: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Lacing/Foil and Non-powered Sensor 5-12

43 Section 5 SIM Loop Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop The FOCUS CADET supports the Keyswitch on the built-in SIM loop. Two SIM devices ( and ) are needed to interface the keyswitch to the SIM loop. The two SIM devices occupy two points on the system. Wiring the Keyswitch to the SIM Loop SUPERVISED HORN / STROBE SIM BRN/WHT BLK/WHT 3k 3k BLU BLK RED/WHT ORG RED YEL SIM DEVICE WHT ORG 12VDC BUZZER RED/WHT BLU/WHT + BLK/WHT 33k JUMPER YEL RED ORG GRY VIO BLK GRN EARTH GROUND LED YEL LED RED TAMPER SWITCH 2k 2k Figure 5-15: Keyswitch Wiring Connections To install a keyswitch to the SIM loop, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Mount the Keyswitch according to the instruction provided with it. 2 Run the branch cable no more than 100 feet long from the SIM Loop trunk. Use cable SCN or for the 4-wire SIM connections. 3 Cut the sheathing of the SIM Loop trunk to expose the four wires of the trunk. 4 Use Scotchlok SCN connectors (#558) to connect the branch cable to the SIM Loop trunk, matching the colors of the wires on the trunk with the branch cable. 5 If the branch cable is subject to damage, splice in an SCN in-line fuse with holder and place it close to the SIM Loop trunk. 6 Snap the Trunk Junction box SCN around the connections to enhance the appearance. 7 Connect the branch cable to the SIM device see Figure Run an additional branch cable from the device to the SIM device. 9 Connect each SIM device to the appropriate connection on the Keyswitch see Figure

44 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Programming for the Keyswitch Program both SIM devices as input point type 29. Enable option #2 (LED used) for the SIM point and option #3 (buzzer used) for the SIM point. Refer to Programming the Point Data in the Programming section for information about the procedure. Using the 4297 Loop Extender Module The 4297 Loop Extender may be used to provide additional SIM loop current, to extend the SIM loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual electrically isolated SIM loops. Refer to Figures 5-16, 5-17, and 5-18, to follow for proper configurations and the input and extension loop limits. J1 (BLUE) SHORT ISOLATION JUMPER: INTACT: EXTENSION LOOP SHORTS ARE ISOLATED FROM INPUT LOOP. CUT: EXTENSION LOOP SHORTS ARE NOT ISOLATED FROM INPUT LOOP. TB } + EXTENSION LOOP INPUT LOOP + } (FROM CONTROL) AC 16.5VAC, 25VA } TRANSFORMER AC No (SEE NOTE 1) Earth Ground 12VDC POWER INPUT OR + } 12V LEAD ACID BATTERY INPUT. 1.2 AH MIN/ 2.6AH MAX. MAKE CONNECTIONS USING CABLE SUPPLIED. (SEE NOTE 1) NOTES: 1. WHEN A SUPPLEMENTARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED, CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS 1 & 2 AND MAKE NO CONNECTIONS TO 4 & 5. USE A CLASS II (POWER LIMITED) SUPPLY. WHEN A No TRANSFORMER IS USED, CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS 4 & ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED EXCEPT CONNECTIONS TO THE No TRANSFORMER AND TO THE LEAD-ACID BATTERY. 3. ALL OUTPUT CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED. Figure 5-16: 4297 Extender Module Notes: - Do not use the 4197 module. - Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information. - The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions. - Do not connect 4297 modules in series. Input SIM Loop Extension SIM Loop CONTROL PANEL MODULE RPM RPM RPM RPM Input Loop Limits: - 128mA max. No more than 64mA on any individual wire run. - All combined wire runs may not exceed 2000 feet. Extension Loop Limits: - May not exceed 4000 feet. Combined Input and Extension SIM Loop Limits: - No more than 64 devices combined. Figure 5-17: SIM Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module 5-14

45 Section 5 SIM Loop Notes: - Do not use 4197 module. - Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information. The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions. - Do not connect 4297 modules in series. Input SIM Loop 4297 Extension Loop #1 RPM RPM CONTROL PANEL Extension Loop #2 RPM Extension Loop #8 RPM RPM RPM Up to 8 modules may be connected in parallel. Extension loops will be electrically isolated if blue jumper on each 4297 is left in tact. } Extension Loop Limits: May not exceed 4000 feet. Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits: - No more than 64 devices combined on all loops. Figure 5-18: SIM Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules Note: The input SIM loop limits stated in Figure 5-17 apply to Figure 5-18 as well. Devices labeled as RPM may also be SIM devices. 5-15

46 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 5-16

47 S E C T I O N 6 Gateways In This Section About the Gateways RF Gateway (472490) Installing the RF Gateway Installing the RF Receiver Long Range Radio Gateway Installing the LRR Gateway Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions RF Gateway Off-Normal Conditions 5800 Series Transmitters About the Gateways RS-485 Buses A gateway is an interface device for sensors and output devices. There are two types of gateways: RF gateway. 7800ADT LRR gateway. The gateways connect to the RS-485 buses on the control unit and use Communication Group 03. When interrogated by the control unit, the gateway reports any off-normal conditions. Additionally, when signaled by the control unit, the gateway issues commands to reset sensors or control an on/off output function. Each gateway connects to a port in the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The RS-485 bus may be run up to 4000 feet. The total end-to-end reach can be extended to 8,000 feet by using a RS-485 Repeater at the end of the bus. Current loading and voltage drop considerations may limit the maximum allowable wire lengths to less than 4000 feet. See the Power Requirements section for additional information. RS-485 Bus Cable Types Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable, differing only in the type of insulation (B6445) Cable - used as general-purpose (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air-handling plenums. Cable Run Considerations The safeguarding of RS-485 bus cable from physical damage is vital to continuous uninterrupted operation of the FOCUS CADET System. Keep the following guidelines in mind when running the cable: Bus cable should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable, to minimize voltage drop. Any required junction boxes (test terminals) can be placed to be accessible from the floor. Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus to serve as an aid during troubleshooting. There are no bus-terminating jumpers on the control unit circuit board. The bus requires a terminating jumper in the last device of the RS-485 bus. 6-1

48 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide RF Gateway (472490) The 5800ADT RF gateway provides additional RF points for the FOCUS CADET system, up to 64 points. The RF gateway is designed for use in conjunction with a 5881H/5881EH/5882H/5881ENHC RF receiver only, and can support up to two receivers. The gateway continuously monitors individual 5800 Series RF transmitters, and only reports changes in their status to the control panel. Only 1 RF gateway may be connected to the RS-485 bus on the control unit, and is automatically set for Communication Group 03 and Unit 7 once the control unit is powered up with the gateway connected. The control unit identifies each transmitter by its embedded Hard ID number. The control unit uses this information, along with the number of the gateway on the RS-485 bus, to identify the point. This data is programmed into the control unit at the time of installation. The Unit number for the RF gateway s identification with the control unit is fixed at 7. UL The RF gateway used only in conjunction with the 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter areand the listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications. RF Gateway Physical Description The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a plastic housing unit. The following are important items on the board (see Figure 6-1): Part Terminal Strip TB1 Panel LED (red) RF LED (green) Purpose Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus, to the RF receiver, and to power the RF gateway. Indicates the following status: Steady OFF: No communication/activity between the control panel and the RF gateway. Flashing: Normal condition. Steady ON: The RF gateway is in an error state. Indicates the following status: Steady OFF: The RF gateway is in an error state or is receiving no power. Flashing: Normal condition. Steady ON: Power indication for the RF gateway. No RF transmission activity, or receiver(s) have failed, or the receiver s antenna has a problem. PANEL LED (RED) RF LED (GREEN) 5800ADT CONNECT TO 5881H/5881EH/5882H/5881ENHC RF RECEIVER CONNECTOR GREEN YELLOW RED BLACK DATA INPUT DATA OUTPUT (+) 12VDC ( ) GND H BUS (+) H BUS ( ) ECP BUS TB1 YELLOW BLUE RED BLACK RS485 BUS 5800ADT RF EXPANDER MODULE P1 (-) (+) (+) 12V (-) GND TO CONTROL PANEL 5800ADT-002-V1 Figure 6-1: RF Gateway Wiring Connections 6-2

49 Section 6 - Gateways Installing the RF Gateway Mounting the RF Gateway To mount the RF gateway, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Remove the RF gateway s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case with the appropriate mounting hardware. 2 Re-insert the circuit board into the plastic case. Wiring the RF Gateway To wire the RF gateway, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 At the control unit, make sure the power switch is in the "OFF" position. 2 Run the bus as required and make sure to appropriately tag it. Note: It is important to appropriately tag the cables so they can readily be identified. This is especially important if troubleshooting becomes necessary at some future date. 3 Run the cable through the side opening of the housing unit. Cut the cable and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the pressure plates of TB1. 4 Measure the resistance between the black and red conductors (the (+) lead of the meter to the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading of less than 12 ohms indicates a short on the power conductors. Make the necessary corrections before proceeding. 5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the proper wires can be connected to each terminal. See Figure Connect the RS-485 bus cable to the control unit (see table below). Wire Gauge/Color Function RS-485 #1 Terminal #19 AWG Blue RS #19 AWG Yellow RS #16 AWG Red + 12VDC Power 19 #16 AWG Black DC Return Power 20 Installing the RF Receiver 7 Remove jumper P1 unless the RF gateway module is to be located at the end of the RS- 485 bus; in that case, leave the jumper on. Installation Guidelines The receiver can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet. Take this into consideration when mounting the receiver. Mount the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not place the receiver on or near metal objects or inside a metal cabinet. For maximum range, the receiver should be at least 10 feet from the control panel or any remote keypads to avoid interference from their microprocessors. The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary installations and can be enabled only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports a tamper condition. 6-3

50 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide If two RF receivers are used: Each must be at least 10 feet from the other, as well as from the control panel and remote keypads. Using two receivers does not increase the number of RF points that the system can support. In Canada, the 5882H receiver must be used. Mounting and Wiring the RF Receiver To mount the RF receiver, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Remove the RF receiver s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case, using the appropriate mounting hardware. See receiver s instructions for mounting information. Note: The receiver can be mounted up to 500 feet from the RF gateway (see table below). Wire gauge Maximum length for one receiver Maximum length for two receivers # feet 250 feet # feet 112 feet Note: The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 500 feet when unshielded quad conductor cable is used (250 feet if shielded cable is used). 2 If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-head screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab as shown in Figure 6-2. When the receiver is pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break off and remain on the wall. This will activate a tamper switch in the receiver and cause generation of a tamper signal. Note that this signal will also be generated when the receiver s front cover is removed. 3 Connect the RF gateway to the RF receiver. See Figure 6-1 for wiring connections. 4 Install the two antennas into the right-hand terminals of the 2-terminal block in the receiver (see receiver s instructions). If you are using a second receiver, install the antennas on that receiver. SCREW 5881ENHC-001-V0 Figure 6-2: Installer the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection 6-4

51 Section 6 - Gateways Addressing and Programming the RF Receiver ON ON OFF DIP SWITCH SETTING FOR 1st RECEIVER (ADDRESS "1") *SWITCH POSITION 5 IS PRESENT ONLY ON 5881ENHC (SEE RECEIVER INSTRUCTIONS FOR USAGE). ON ON OFF DIP SWITCH SETTING FOR 2st RECEIVER (ADDRESS "2") RF_dip_sw-001-V0 - Figure 6-3: RF Receiver DIP Switch Settings To address and program the RF receiver, perform the following steps: Step 5800 Series Transmitters Action 1 Set the RF receiver s DIP switches as follows: Set the first receiver s device address to 1 (see Figure 6-3). If a second receiver is used, set its device address to "2." 2 Program the number of RF receivers, set the RF Jam options (point 242), and set the supervision interval via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Program the supervision of the receiver(s) (Receiver 1 = point 244 and Receiver 2 = point 243) with input type 13 SPV. Program the supervision for RF Jam (point 242) with input type 13 SPV. Enable the tamper detection for the RF receiver, if used, via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader Series transmitters have built-in serial numbers (Hard ID) that must be programmed into the system. The serial number may be programmed via the operating panel while programming the point data, or via the downline loading. For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such as the 5804, 5802, and 5801, you must assign a unique point number to each individual button used on the transmitter (i.e., arm, disarm). Each button on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number. Refer to the Programming section for a detailed description of the procedure for programming RF points. If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm the system, the point must be assigned to a user. Otherwise, the system will show the arm/disarm prompts when the button is pressed, but the system will not change state. We recommend using an outdoor annunciator for confirmation of arming. Transmitter Input Types All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory-assigned inputs (loops). Each of the inputs requires its own programming point (e.g., 5804 s four-button inputs require four programming points). Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types: Type RF (Supervised RF) UR (Unsupervised RF) BR (Unsupervised Button RF) Description Sends periodic Check-in signals, as well as Fault, Restore, and Low Battery signals. The transmitter must remain within the receiver s range. Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but the control does not supervise the Check-in signals. The transmitter may therefore be carried off-premises (i.e. holdups).. These only send Fault signals. They only send Low Battery signals when they are activated (button pressed). The transmitter may be carried offpremises (i.e. keyfobs).. 6-5

52 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Transmitter Supervision Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises (5802, 5802CP, and 5804), each transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the RF receiver every minutes. If at least one signal is not received from each supervised transmitter within a programmed check-in interval, the missing transmitter(s) will display a trouble condition. For transmitters that may be carried off the premises (5802MN), turn off the supervision by programming it as a UR (unsupervised RF) type. The system is shipped with the transmitter check-in interval defaulted to (0) no supervision. Be sure to program a check-in interval if you are using RF supervised transmitters. Otherwise, the system will not annunciate a supervisory trouble condition from those transmitters. Some 5800 Series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will annunciate a trouble condition if covers are removed. Transmitter Battery Life Batteries may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. The wireless system can identify a true low-battery situation, thus allowing the user time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that point within the system. Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5804) must be periodically tested for battery life. Testing the Transmitters For information about how to test the transmitters, refer to the Testing the System section. Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters Model Product Input Type Description 5802MN 5804KEY 5804ADTGR 5804ADTRD 5804ADTYE Miniature (Personal Emergency Transmitter) Wireless Key Transmitter Blue Green Red Yellow UR or RF Has single pushbutton. If you are using this for arming/disarming, the button must be assigned to a user code. Contains a replaceable battery. BR Only Has four pushbuttons, each with a unique input (loop). Contains a replaceable battery. If you are using this for arming/disarming, the button must be assigned to a user code. 5816MC Money Clip Transmitter RF or UR Has a normally closed contact loop. Typically used in a cash drawer. Triggers when all the money is removed from the money clip Holdup Switch Transmitter RF Typically mounted under a counter or money draw for inconspicuous operation. Once activated, can only be reset by the reset key. Tamper switches are activated when the cover is removed, or if the unit is forcibly removed from its installation location. Contains a replaceable battery. 6-6

53 Section 6 - Gateways RF Gateway Off-Normal Conditions During operation, the gateway polls the point sensors that are connected to its trunk, and stores the status of the protection loop. When interrogated, the gateway reports any change in status to the control unit where it is processed to determine whether there is an alarm or trouble condition. Specific off-normal conditions monitored by the gateway and reported to the control unit are as follows: Off-Normal Condition Cross Cause FA point: Alarm condition. BA point: Normal condition. Open FA point: Trouble condition. BA point: Alarm condition. Comm Fail 1. Failure to receive a response from a point when it is interrogated. RF transmitter may be defective, or there may be a fault with the cable to the gateway trunk, or the gateway has not been addressed correctly. 2. Low battery condition in an RF transmitter. Note: To determine which of these conditions the system is annunciating, check the system's history log. Point Tamper Activation of a tamper on an RF transmitter. Long Range Radio Gateway The 7800ADT LRR gateway is an interface for a single 7845C Long Range Radio. Only 1 LRR gateway may be connected to the RS-485 bus. NOTE: Currently the 7845C Long Range Radio link is not yet Factory-Mutual approved. LRR Gateway Physical Description The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a plastic housing unit. The following are important items on the board (see Figure 6-4): Part Terminal Strip TB1 Panel LED (red) LRR LED (green) Purpose Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus, to the 7845C, and to power the LRR gateway. Indicates the following status: Steady OFF: No communication/activity between the control panel and the LRR gateway. Flashing: Normal condition. Steady ON: The LRR gateway is in an error state. Indicates the following status: Steady OFF: The LRR gateway is in an error state or is receiving no power. Flashing: Normal condition. Steady ON: Power indication for the LRR gateway. No LRR transmission activity or 7845C has failed. 6-7

54 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide PANEL LED (RED) RF LED (GREEN) 7800ADT TO 7845C LONG RANGE RADIO TB2 TB1 DATA OUT DATA IN V+ GND DATA INPUT DATA OUTPUT (+) 12VDC ( ) GND H BUS (+) H BUS ( ) GREEN YELLOW RED BLACK ECP BUS TB1 P1 YELLOW (-) BLUE (+) RED (+) 12V BLACK (-) GND RS485 BUS 7800ADT LONG RANGE RADIO GATEWAY TO CONTROL PANEL 7800ADT-002-V0 Figure 6-4: LRR Gateway Wiring Connections Installing the LRR Gateway Mounting the LRR Gateway To mount the LRR gateway, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Remove the LRR gateway s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case with the appropriate mounting hardware. 2 Re-insert the circuit board into the plastic case. Wiring the LRR Gateway To wire the LRR gateway, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 At the control unit, make sure the power switch is in the "OFF" position. 2 Run the buses as required and make sure to appropriately tag them. Limit each RS-485 bus to a single wire run. Note: It is important to appropriately tag the cables so they can readily be identified. This is especially important if troubleshooting becomes necessary at some future date. 3 Run the cable through the side opening of the housing unit. Cut the cable and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the pressure plates of TB1. 4 Measure the resistance between the black and red conductors (the (+) lead of the meter to the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading of less than 12 ohms indicates a short on the power conductors. Make the necessary corrections before proceeding. 5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the proper wires can be connected to each terminal. See Figure Connect the RS-485 bus cable to the control unit (see table below). Wire Gauge/Color Function RS-485 #1 Terminal #19 AWG Blue RS #19 AWG Yellow RS #16 AWG Red + 12VDC Power #16 AWG Black DC Return Power RS-485 #2 Terminal 7 Remove jumper P1 unless the LRR gateway module is to be located at the end of the RS- 485 bus; in that case, leave the jumper on. 6-8

55 Section 6 - Gateways Installing the 7845C Long Range Radio Operation Use 4-conductor cable to connect the 7845C to the LRR gateway. Refer to Figure 6-4 for wiring connections. The maximum length of the wire run depends on the wire gauge, see the table below. Wire gauge Maximum length # feet # feet Note: The maximum length of the wire run must not exceed 500 feet when unshielded quad conductor cable is used (250 feet if shielded cable is used). The FOCUS CADET features Dynamic Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority message reporting when Long Range Radio is used. These message outputs are programmed only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.. The Dynamic Signaling feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant reports sent to the Customer Care Center. The feature is described as follows: Dynamic Signaling Delay Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225 seconds, in 15-second increments. Dynamic Signaling Priority Select the initial reporting destination for messages, Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1). UL Without line security (Grade A), the maximum Dynamic Signaling Delay, is 15 seconds for Fire and UL Burglary installations. With line security (Grade AA), the Dynamic Signaling Delay must be 0 (no delay) for UL Burglary installations. The reports will be sent to both the primary phone number and the LRR. The chart below provides an explanation of how the Dynamic Signaling feature functions. If the Priority is And message is Then Primary Phone Number Long Range Radio Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no message is sent to LRR. Not acknowledged before delay expires Message is sent to both the Primary Phone No. and LRR. Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no message is sent to Primary Phone No. Not acknowledged before delay expires Programming the Control Unit for the LRR Gateway Message is sent to both the Primary Phone No. and LRR. Programming the control unit for the LRR gateway is done only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software. To programming the 7845C you must use either the 7720P Programming Tool or the 7845C PRO Mode. Refer to the 7845C Installation and Setup Guide for the programming details. 6-9

56 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions The following is a list of trouble conditions that can occur when using the LRR Gateway with the 7845C Long Range Radio. Display T LRR Tamper Fault B LRR Low Batt V LRR VSWR D LRR DC Fault C LRR Comm Fault E LRR ECP Fault R RS485 Fault Description The tamper on the long range radio has been tripped The battery connected directly to the long range radio is low The long range radio s antenna is malfunctioning and not communicating with the tower. The DC power from the gateway is low or not present. The long range radio was unable to transmit the last message The gateway and long range radio are not communicating with each other. The control unit and the gateway are not communicating with each other. 6-10

57 S E C T I O N 7 Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay In This Section About the Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay Output Functions Programming the Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay Installing the External Sounders About the Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay The FOCUS CADET provides one bell circuit and an auxiliary relay. These outputs are programmable via the ADEMCO Compass downloader as to when and how they will function. There are two entries that can be programmed for each output. The first entry is the alarm condition to be monitored, which will cause the output to operate. The second entry determines whether the output is to be used to trigger a backup-connected transmitter in the event of a telco line trouble. In this latter case, the output will not operate for the selected alarm condition unless there is a telco line trouble. The system supports either of two transformers: the 50VA ( or N8167) Plug-in Transformer, or 72VA (472404) Wired-in Transformer. Regardless of which transformer is used, the total alarm current available on auxiliary power #2, the auxiliary relay terminal 10 (set for wet operation), and the bell output is 1.5A max. Characteristics of the Bell Output Rated at 12VDC, 1.5 amps max. Power-limited by PTC type circuit protector (automatically resets when the short is removed). Optional setup for supervision. Can be used for operating fire and burglary alarm notification appliances. Characteristics of the Auxiliary Relay Output Functions Form C relay. Can be set as either wet (12VDC) or dry contacts (determined by Jumper P3). See the Summary of Connections diagram for the location of Jumper P3. Wet Pins 1 & 2 shorted. Terminal 10 is wet and rated at 12VDC, 1.7A max. power limited. Dry Pins 2 & 3 shorted. Terminal 10 is dry and contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC. 2.0A max. UL Commercial burglary alarm systems require bell circuits to be programmed for a minimum timeout of 16 minutes. Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be supervised. Polarized fireindicating devices must be used. Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be programmed for a minimum timeout of 5 minutes. Residential fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be programmed for a minimum timeout of 4 minutes. 7-1

58 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Each output can be programmed for one of the following functions: Description Fire Alarm Holdup Alarm Supervisory Alarm Alarm in any BA Group Alarm in a Selected BA Group BA1 Alarm BA2 Alarm BA3 Alarm BA4 Alarm Bell Function The output activates and latches when an alarm occurs at any fire alarm point. If all fire alarm points have restored to normal, the output resets by entering a RESET command at any operating panel. NOTES: It takes 40 seconds before the output resets. This output type also has the option to complement the output state whereby the output is normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs. The output activates when either of the following occurs: An alarm condition occurs at a holdup point. It resets when the holdup device is restored. A hostage ID code is entered. The output resets when the operating panel deactivates (after 45 seconds). NOTE: This output type also has the option to complement the output state whereby the output is normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs. The output activates when an alarm condition occurs at any supervisory point. It resets when all supervisory devices are restored. NOTE: This output type also has the option to complement the output state whereby the output is normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs. The output is normally activate and releases when an entry alarm occurs in any BA group during Nite Set. The output resets when the involved BA group is changed to Day Set. This form of output control can be used for direct-connect type applications. NOTE: This output type also has the option to complement the output state whereby the output is normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs. This is the same as the above option except that it is used for an alarm in a single selected BA group rather than for any BA group. Output is normally operated. It releases when an entry alarm occurs in BA1 during Nite Set. It returns to operated condition when either the programmed bell time ends and the points are secure or when BA1 is returned to Day Set. Same function as BA1 Alarm, except it relates to BA2. Same function as BA1 Alarm, except it relates to BA3. Same function as BA1 Alarm, except it relates to BA4. Note: The output is reset by entering a valid ID code at any operating panel, unless stated otherwise. Note: Programmed bell timeout is 0 to 255 minutes in 1-minute increments unless stated otherwise. The output activates when triggered by the following occurrences: Burglar Alarm: Alarm in any BA group will cause steady activation until valid ID code is entered or bell timeout is reached. If the BA group has been programmed for a delay in start of bell ringing, the start of the bell is delayed by the programmed delay time (up to 20 minutes in 1-minute increments). Fire Alarm: Bell rings for 10 minutes with the pattern 1-second-On/1-second- Off, with a 5-second pause every 10 seconds until silenced by entering a valid ID code, or until the 10 minutes expire. The bell can also be silenced using special Fire Marshall Code (222222). (May also be set via option 3 for temporal pattern.) See the Input and Output Point Types section. NOTE: The Fire Bell can be programmed for continuous operation (No Timeout) when a fire alarm occurs. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. 7-2

59 Section 7 Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay Description Bell (continued) Function BA Keyswitch Point: Output activates bell ( ) for an open, tamper, or comm fail condition during Nite Set of the BA group. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell timeout is reached. Remote Power Supply Point: Output activates bell ( ) for a tamper or comm fail condition of remote power supply point. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell timeout is reached. System Self-Supervision: Output activates bell ( ) for a cabinet tamper during Nite Set of BA1. Janitor Keyswitch Point: Output activates bell for a tamper or comm fail condition during Nite Set. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell timeout is reached. Bell On No Close: Output activates bell for 10 minutes if system has not been closed at scheduled closing time. Bell ringing starts either 5 or 15 minutes after scheduled closing time, depending on the choice made for the No Close option (see the Scheduling section). Display and Bell Test: This is a 30-second test that is initiated from an operating panel (see the Testing the System section). Output activates bell for the final 4 seconds of test. Auto Bell Test (programmable option): Bell will "bing" at the end of any BA group s exit delay for Local systems. Alternately, for CCC connected systems, bell will "bing" at end of exit delay as an indication that closing has been acknowledged by the CCC. Closing Trouble Bell (programmable option): Bell will ring for 5 minutes if customer has turned the BA group On and has exited, but has failed to close the exit door and exit delay has expired. Used to remind customer to re-enter the premises and turn the BA group off, and re-exit the premises properly. Failure to do so will result in an entry alarm. Start of bell can be delayed up to 255 minutes (1-minute increments). UL The start of bell ringing delay may not be programmed for UL Burglary alarm systems. Description Access Control Access Control BA1 Access Control BA2 Access Control BA3 Access Control BA4 Function Used for controlling access to any selected BA group by having the output operate a door strike. The output is normally locked. It operates for 10 seconds when valid ID is entered at the operating panel (if BA group is Off), or when BA group is turned Off. Used for controlling access to BA1 group by having an output operate a door strike. The output is normally released. It operates for 10 seconds when a valid ID code is entered at the operating panel if BA group is off or when BA group is turned off. Operating panel must be assigned to Unit Number 0. Same function as Access Control BA1 except it relates to BA2. Operating panel must be assigned to Unit Number 1. Same function as Access Control BA1 except it relates to BA3. Operating panel must be assigned to Unit Number 2. Same function as Access Control BA1 except it relates to BA4. Operating panel must be assigned to Unit Number 3. Controlling operating panel must be located outside of the entry door for the associated BA group. For information about installing and addressing, refer to the Installing the Operating Panel and Access Control sections. 7-3

60 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Description Telco Backup 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset Light Function This is a separate option associated with each of the three outputs, and is intended for systems that are connected to a CCC. It is used in conjunction with the selected function for which the output is to operate. If this option is chosen, the output will operate for the selected function only if there is a telco problem on the FSK dialer line, in which case the output can be used to trigger a direct-connect transmitter to a Police Headquarters or other receiving station as a backup. This operates the output when fire alarms are reset during the Alarm Reset sequence. The function requires the power to the 4-wire sensors to be wired via the output. The output operates for approximately 6 seconds. Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected BA group is turned off, or the entry/exit delay period is activated. The output turns off when the protection of a BA group is turned on. Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output turns on whenever any key is pressed on the operating panel. Installing the External Sounders Select compatible alarm-indicating devices from the list that follows. Be sure the total current drawn on each output and the total combined with the auxiliary power outputs does not exceed the values stated earlier in this section. Bell Output Supervision The bell output is automatically supervised whenever an output point type is programmed for point 247. The system will trigger a trouble condition, regardless of the On/Off status of the BA group(s), whenever a short or an open is detected on the bell output wiring. To supervise the bell output: 1. Install a 2k ohm resistor across the last notification appliance on the output. 2. Program an SPV point type for point 247. Compatible Alarm-Indicating Devices Model ADEMCO AB12M-ADT RX7 (875936) System Sensor BBS System Sensor BBS-W System Sensor BB-D System Sensor MP-F System Sensor MP-SF System Sensor S-MP System Sensor MA 12/24D System Sensor MDL System Sensor P1215 System Sensor P System Sensor P1215W System Sensor P24110 System Sensor P2415 System Sensor P System Sensor P2475 Description UL listed Grade A Bell in Housing Indoor Sounder Back Box Skirt Red Back Box Skirt White Back Box Deep Red Mounting Plate Red Flsh Mounting Plate Red Semi-flsh Single Mounting Plate Sounder Red Non-ADA Synch Circuit Mod Red Horn/Strobe Red ADA Horn/Strobe Red ADA Horn/Strobe White ADA Horn/Strobe Red ADA Horn/Strobe Red ADA Horn/Strobe Red ADA Horn/Strobe Red ADA 7-4

61 Section 7 Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay Model Description System Sensor PA400R Sounder Red Non-ADA System Sensor PA400W Sounder White Non-ADA System Sensor S Strobe Low Current Red ADA System Sensor S24110 Strobe Red ADA System Sensor S2415 Strobe Red System Sensor S Strobe Red System Sensor SP200W Speaker White 8 System Sensor SP2R Speaker/Strobe Red 5 System Sensor SP1R2415ADA Speaker/Strobe Red 5 System Sensor SP2R2415 Speaker/Strobe Red 5 Wheelock LS1-12-VFR Strobe Wheelock MS1-12-VFR Strobe Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe Wheelock MT4-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe Gentex GXS-2-15 Strobe Gentex GXS Strobe Gentex SHG Horn/Strobe Gentex SHG Horn/Strobe Faraday 5336L-U DC Horn/Strobe Faraday 5337L-U DC Horn/Strobe Installing an Alarm Housing UL The ( ) Alarm Housing and ADEMCO AB12 Bell are UL-approved exterior sounding devices for local mercantile premises bell certification. For exterior auxiliary BA or FA bell applications, other sounding devices such as the ( ) Bell Unit may be used, provided applicable UL installation guidelines are followed. If Alarm Housing is being used, install it as follows: Step Action 1 Mount the alarm housing on an outside wall of the building, visible from a public street. It should be mounted at least 10 feet above street level, but no higher than the ceiling level of the fourth story above street level. 2 Install the wiring between the control unit and the alarm housing in conduit, without boxes or openings unless covers are tampered or welded to the box. 3 Using locally available caulking compound, caulk around the conduit connection at the rear of the alarm housing to prevent water seepage into the housing. 4 If the alarm housing is flush-mounted, the building wall must include an opening 15" (38.lcm) H x 24" (61cm) W x 5-1/2 (14cm) D with a louvered grille (provided by the customer). Mount the housing within this opening, and affix a sign (supplied by the customer) that prominently displays the words "BURGLAR ALARM." 7-5

62 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Wiring Bell Output Wire sounding devices to the bell outputs as shown in Figure BELL 1 BELL OUTPUT SHOWN AS A FIRE BELL OUTPUT WITH POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES. 2k EOLR AB12M-ADT BELL/BOX WIRING TO PANEL'S BELL + (EG: BELL +; TB5) TO PANEL'S BELL (EG: BELL ; TB6) TO POINT 8 + (TB38) TO POINT 8 (TB37) TO PANEL'S EARTH GROUND (Terminal 3 or 4) AB12M-ADT WIRING NOTES: Disconnect the AB12M-ADT's factorywired connection from its terminal #4 to its outer box. Assign point 8 to a BA Group. Program it as a Supervisory (SPV) Point Type. All wiring from AB12M-ADT to panel must be run in conduit. WIRING FOR AB12M-ADT COMMERCIAL BURGLARY GRADE A BELL BELL TAMPER SWITCHES 2k EOLR AB12M-ADT OUTER BOX INNER LINER Figure 7-1: External Sounder Connections to the Bell Output If using the bell box tamper, program the option via the downline loader. Otherwise the system will not detect a "short" on point 8. Wiring the Auxiliary Relay The auxiliary relay cannot be supervised. It is typically used for annunciating burglary alarms, resetting 4-wire smoke detectors, elevator recall, or other situations that do not require the supervision of the wiring. Be sure to set jumper P3 for either wet or dry operation. Figure 7-2 shows how to wire the auxiliary relay to operate an unsupervised external alarm sounder. Short pins 1 and 2 on P3 for wet operation for this application. See the Basic Hardwired Points section for the wiring of the auxiliary relay for 4-wire smoke detector reset operation. P3 ALARM JUMPER P3 Pins 1 & 2 shorted = wet Pins 2 & 3 shorted = dry AUX. RELAY N.C. WET/DRY N.O. GND BELL Programming the Bell Output Figure 7-2: External Sounder Connections to the Auxiliary Relay Refer to Programming the Point Data in the Programming section for information about the procedure. Bell 1 is point 247. Defaults for the bell output point are: Point Description Default Type Gateway # Hard ID 247 Bell 1 SPV

63 S E C T I O N 8 System Communication In This Section About the System Communication Connecting the Telephone Lines Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format Paging Service Programming the System Communication Options Types of Customer Care Center Service About the System Communication The FOCUS CADET provides the following for communication to the Customer Care Center (CCC): A main built-in dialer. An optional A backup dialer. Additionally the system has the ability to send messages to up to 8 paging services. UL For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72) applications, use either a LORRA alone, the main dialer with the LORRA, or use the main dialer with the A Backup Dialer. For Listed fire remote station (UL864/NFPA72) applications, use the main dialer with the A backup dialer. Telephone line supervision is required for UL commercial fire alarm systems when a dual-line dialer is used for fire signal transmission. The system supports the A backup dialer. The older version cannot be used with the FOCUS CADET system. The system can uniquely identify troubles on the Telco lines. Reporting Formats Available The ADEMCO Contact ID is the only reporting format supported by the FOCUS CADET system. A Successful Transmission Below is the communication sequence whenever a signal is transmitted: 1. The control panel seizes the phone line and dials the Customer Care Center (CCC). 2. The control panel waits to hear a handshake frequency tone from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on-line and ready to receive its message. 3. After the panel hears the correct handshake, it transmits its message. 4. If the message is received and understood by the receiver, it transmits a kissoff frequency tone. 8-1

64 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide The FOCUS CADET system will attempt, up to a programmed number of times, to transmit a signal to the CCC using the built-in dialer. If, after the programmed number of attempts, the signal still has not been properly accepted by the CCC, and the backup dialer is not enabled, a Comm Fail message will be displayed on the operating panel. If the backup dialer is enabled, then, after additional unsuccessful attempts using the backup dialer for a programmed number of times, the system will display the Comm Fail message. The number of dialing attempts is a programmable option. The system is shipped with 10 attempts as the default. The system will switch to the backup dialer only when it detects a fault (low voltage) on the main telephone line or when the maximum number of programmed attempts on the main telephone line is reached. For information about how to program the CCC telco numbers, see the Programming section. UL The number of dialing attempts must be programmed for a minimum of 5 and a maximum of 10 attempts for Commercial fire and UL Burglary alarm systems. Main Telephone Line Supervision The supervision circuit on the main dialer will indicate a fault when the tip/ring voltage falls below approximately 4 volts. Backup Telephone Line Supervision The supervision circuit on the backup dialer will indicate a fault when the tip/ring voltage falls below 25 volts (13 if blue jumper is cut) or when the handset current is less than approximately 10mA. If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the PABX has a backup power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours (central station usage) or 60 hours (remote station usage). Many PABXs are not power-backed up, and connection to such a PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost. Service Telephone Jack The FOCUS CADET system includes a service telephone jack to provide the installer/serviceman a quick access to a telephone line. See the Summary of Connections diagram for the location of this jack. Connecting the Telephone Lines DO NOT connect both dialers to the same telephone line. DO NOT connect the dialers to telephone lines that provide ground start service. To connect the telephone lines to the main and backup dialer, if used, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Conduct an electrical test of the line to the CCC or receiving station in accordance with the requirements for the type of communication method to be employed. Note: Any limitations or conditions that will affect satisfactory operation must be immediately brought to the attention of the local telephone company for correction. Any differences in operation that will affect programmable option selections must be brought to the attention of the CCC data group for correction before the customized database is downline-loaded. 8-2

65 Step Action Section 8 System Communication 2 Install an RJ31X jack within the proximity of the control unit. Install a second one if you are using the backup dialer. 3 Run telephone company lines to the jack(s) and connect them to the red and green terminals. Connect to the brown and gray terminals all premise phones that use the same telephone line(s). 4 Connect the main dialer to the RJ31X jack using the RJ31X Cable supplied. 5 Mount the backup dialer to the main PCB as shown in Figure Connect the backup dialer to the main PCB J6 connector using a ribbon cable (supplied). Do not run the ribbon cable underneath the backup dialer PC board. The J6 header is static-sensitive. Make connections to the header with the power to the control unit off and after grounding yourself. 7 Connect the backup dialer to the RJ31X jack, using the RJ31X Cable supplied. 8 Connect the earth ground screw on the backup dialer to the earth ground screw (terminal 3 or 4) on the main PCB using 16 AWG wire. To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at the RJ31X jack before servicing the panel. OPTIONAL A BACK-UP DIALER MODULE Connect to main PCB header J6 using ribbon cable (supplied) BACK-UP LINE SEIZE LED (GREEN) The A Dialer Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 FCC Reg. No.: AC398U MO-N Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B BACK-UP PHONE JACK RJ31X (connect using supplied cable) Supervision is programmable J BACK-UP DIALER EARTH GROUND SCREW (wire to main PCB, terminal 3 or 4) MAIN DIALER LED CONTROL PANEL J RS-485 #1 RS-485 # POINT 2 POINT 4 POINT 1 POINT 3 POINT 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 POINT SERVICE MAIN RJ31X JACK PHONE JACK Figure 8-1: Installing the A Backup Dialer Do not run the ribbon cable underneath the backup dialer PC board. The J6 header is static-sensitive. Make connections to the header with the power off, and after grounding yourself. 8-3

66 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Paging Service The FOCUS CADET system can transmit messages to up to 8 paging services (typically at least one for each group). The types of messages are divided into 4 categories as follows: System Troubles, Point Troubles, Alarms and Open/Closes. Each category can be enabled or disabled individually. Additionally, the system can be programmed to send the message to the paging service either once or twice (the default is twice). The format of the pager message is as follows: EEE GGG UUUU Where: EEE = Event Code GGG = Group Number ( ) UUUU = User Number (for open/closes) or Point Number. The possible event codes are: 111 = Fire Alarm 222 = Hold-up or Hostage Alarm 333 = Burglary Alarm 400 = Group failed to Turn OFF 444 = Group was Turned OFF 500 = Group Failed to Turn ON 555 = Point or System Trouble 777 = Group was Turned ON 911 = Personal Emergency (Medical Alarm) The following is an example of a pager message: Group 1 was turned OFF by user 25. Programming for the Pager All the programming options for the pager must be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software. Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format When using ADEMCO Contact ID, the FOCUS CADET system transmits the data in DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency). This format requires the 1400Hz/2300Hz dual-tone handshake and the 1400Hz kissoff tone. The signal is comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event qualifier ("new" or "restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit BA group number, and 3-digit zone number, user number, or system status number. ADEMCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format: CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ where: CCCC = Customer (subscriber) ID Q = Event qualifier, where: E = new event, and R = restore EEE = Event code (3 hexadecimal digits) GG = BA Group number (system messages show 00 ) ZZZ = Point number reporting the alarm, or user number for Open/Close reports. System status messages (AC Loss, Walk-Test, etc.) contain zeroes. 8-4

67 Section 8 System Communication System Reset Reset Memory Description System Event Contact ID Event Codes Printable-Only Event X ADEMCO CID AC Fail 301 AC Restore 301 AC Fail 4-Hour 926 AC Fail 4-Hour Restore 926 Telco Line Trouble (built-in dialer) 351 Telco Line Restore (built-in dialer) 351 Telco Line Trouble (backup dialer) 352 Telco Line Restore (backup dialer) 352 Low Battery System 302 Low Battery System Restore 302 Battery Charger Fail 314 Battery Charger Restore 314 Change Date Expansion Module Interactive Keypad Tamper 143 Interactive Keypad Trouble supervision 333 Interactive Keypad Trouble Restore 143 Cardreader Alarm 143 Cardreader Trouble 333 Cardreader Trouble Restore 143 Point Gateway Tamper Alarm 143 Point Gateway Trouble supervision 333 Point Gateway Trouble Restore 143 Printer Tamper Alarm 336 Printer Trouble supervision 336 Printer Trouble Restore 336 RF Low Battery 384 Downloading DLL Aborted 900 Start DLL 901 DLL Interrupted 902 End DLL Altered 412 DLL Comm Fail 413 End DLL Not Altered 901 Burglary BA Burglary Alarm 130 BA Burglary Point Bypass 573 BA Burglary Alarm Restore 130 BA Burglary Point Trouble 380 BA Burglary Point Unbypass 573 X X 8-5

68 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 8-6 Description Open/Close Printable-Only Event ADEMCO CID BA Auto Close 403 BA Auto Close with Bypass within Group 910 BA Trouble Closing (closed with burglary alarm during exit) 920 BA Bypass Closing within group 911 BA Closing 401 BA Auto Open 403 BA Irregular Opening 450 BA Opening 401 BA No Close scheduled close time expired 454 BA Exit Fail exit error (user) 457 BA Bypass Closing by User 928 BA STAY (Local) Arming 441 Fire Fire Alarm 110 Fire Trouble 373 Fire Alarm Restore 110 Fire Alarm Silence Fire Point Bypass 571 Fire Alarm Point Unbypass 571 Supervisory Alarm 922 Supervisory Trouble 924 Supervisory Restore 922 Supervisory Point Bypass 923 Supervisory Point Unbypass 923 Waterflow Alarm 113 Waterflow Bypass 571 Waterflow Restore 113 WaterflowTrouble 373 WaterflowUnbypass 571 Panic Holdup Alarm 122 Holdup Point Trouble sensor trouble 376 Holdup Restore 122 Holdup Point Bypass 925 Holdup Point Unbypass 925 Hostage Alarm Duress 121 Medical Alarm 100 Medical Alarm Restore 100 Medical Trouble 380 Medical Bypass 570 Medical Unbypass 570 Scheduling BA Change Close Time (extend closing) 630 BA Change Open Time 630 Change Close Time X X

69 Change Auto-On Level Description Scheduling (continued) Section 8 System Communication Printable-Only Event ADEMCO CID Change Latest Close sent only if closing schedule is altered 630 Change Open Time schedule change 630 Change Time time/date reset Other Supervised Bell Alarm (remote bell) 323 Supervised Bell Trouble (remote bell) 320 Supervised Bell Trouble Restore (remote bell) 323 Remote Power Supply Alarm 380 Remote Power Supply Trouble 380 Remote Power Supply Trouble Restore 380 Keyswitch Alarm 140 Keyswitch Trouble 380 Keyswitch Restore 140 Janitor Keyswitch Alarm 140 Janitor Keyswitch Trouble 380 Janitor Keyswitch Alarm Restore 140 Janitor On Premises user on premises 458 Janitor Off Premises user on premises restore 458 ADT On-Premises 466 ADT Off-Premises 466 Tamper Alarm 137 Tamper Restore 137 Tamper Bypass 570 Tamper Unbypass 570 VVS Bypass 578 VVS Unbypass (after 12 AM auto-off) 578 Keypad Active Audible Walk-Test Change Code Change Early Open Change Holiday Long Range Radio DC Fault 337 DC Fault Restore 337 Tamper Fault 341 Tamper Fault Restore 341 Low Battery 338 Low Battery Restore 338 VSR Fault (antenna) 353 VSR Fault Restore (antenna) 353 ECP Fault 355 ECP Fault Restore 355 Communication Fault 353 Communication Fault Restore 353 X X X X X X X 8-7

70 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 8-8 Walk-Test Bell Test Holdup Test Alarm Holdup Test Restore Description System Test Printable-Only Event X X X X ADEMCO CID Start Fire Alarm Test 604 End Fire Alarm Test 604 Start Burglary Alarm Test 607 End Burglary Alarm Test 607 Start Supervisory Test 913 End Supervisory Test 913 Start Holdup Alarm Test 914 End Holdup Alarm Test 914 Long Print Short Print Supervisory Test Print manual trigger test report Supervisory Test Restore Fire Alarm Test Print Fire Alarm Test Print Restore Burglary Alarm Test Print Burglary Alarm Test Print Restore Holdup Suspicion Print Keypad No Access Untyped Bypass 570 Untyped Unbypass 570 Burglary Alarm Diagnostics 917 Fire Alarm Diagnostics 918 Output Trouble 927 Output Trouble Restore 927 Point Trouble 380 Point Alarm general alarm 140 Point Alarm Restore general alarm restore 140 Untyped Diagnostics 919 Burglary Alarm Weak Battery 384 Fire Alarm Weak Battery 384 Holdup Alarm Weak Battery 384 Supervisory Alarm Weak Battery 384 Untyped Alarm Weak Battery 384 Weak Battery Restore 384 Carbon Monoxide Alarm 162 Carbon Monoxide Bypass 571 Carbon Monoxide Restore 162 Carbon Monoxide Trouble 380 Carbon Monoxide Unbypass Man 2 ND Person Keypad Lockout Access X X X X X X X X X X X X

71 Description Access (continued) Section 8 System Communication Printable-Only Event ADEMCO CID Cardreader Irregular Access 436 Manual Pushbutton Access remote arm/disarm opening Access Denied Code Known access denied 421 Access Denied Code Unknown access denied 921 Dialer Test Dialer Test Report 602 Dialer Test Report with System Trouble Present 608 Types of Customer Care Center Service The Customer Care Center (CCC) can provide several types of service. The types of service range from monitoring only alarm signals to monitoring opening and closing schedules along with the ID codes (passcodes) of the person involved. There are five types of CCC service, as follows: 1. Passcode Schedule Supervision (PCS) In addition to monitoring alarm and trouble signals, the CCC: Maintains a daily log of openings and closings along with the passcodes that performed these functions. A record of the daily log can be provided. Maintains a listing of all passcodes and schedules, and has sole control of making changes. If an attempt is made to open a BA group outside of a schedule by someone without the proper privilege level, a PVF (Passcode Verification Failure) condition will be generated at the CCC. Monitors up to five daily schedules (2 permanent, 2 temporary, and 1 holiday) for a given BA group. The CCC must be notified immediately of any changes to the schedules, or the introduction of a temporary schedule. Will generate a No Close condition if the BA group is not closed at the scheduled closing time. If the closing time is extended, the CCC must be notified. Then the monitoring of the No Close condition is transferred to the control unit. This service exceeds the requirements for UL Central Station Connect Certification. To establish PCS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following: UUUU (unscheduled) for the Permanent Opening Schedule for the BA group. The same close time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group as recorded in the CCC schedule. This is to provide a time when a Change Close Time signal will be transmitted. NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." All supervision of schedules is performed at the CCC. NO for the SANS option for the BA group. Non-changeable for all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service. (Changes can only be made from the CCC.) The capability of changing a permanent schedule as non-changeable for any customer ID code. 2. Access/Passcode Schedule Supervision (ACS) The ACS type of service exceeds the requirements for UL Central Station Connect Certification. The CCC will only log openings and closings. The control unit: Monitors the schedules and ID codes. Is programmed with the permanent opening and closing schedules. Temporary changes to these schedules can be made locally using an ID code with a temporary-change privilege, or via downline loading. The control unit PVF option must be selected to supervise against irregular openings. Upon occurrence of an irregular opening, the control unit will transmit an irregular opening message to the CCC. X 8-9

72 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide To establish ACS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following: The opening time for the Permanent Opening Schedule for the BA group. The control unit monitors this and supervises for irregular openings based on the programmed opening time. The closing time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group. The control unit provides No Close supervision based on the programmed closing time. YES for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This enables the control unit to transmit an irregular opening signal to the CCC if a BA group is opened early by someone without the proper privilege level. NO for the SANS option for the BA group. Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as changeable. 3. Passcode No Schedule Supervision (PCNS) With this type of service, the CCC: Supervision is limited to Closing Troubles and No Close conditions. Monitors alarm and trouble signals generated by the BA group. Does not supervise the schedules of openings and closings. Logs the openings and closings along with ID codes. Logs No Close signals. With this type of service, the control unit: Is programmed with a permanent close time only, which can be changed temporarily. Does not monitor for irregular opening conditions. To establish PCNS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following: The closing time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group. The control unit provides No Close supervision based on this closing time. NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This inhibits an irregular opening signal. NO for the SANS option for the BA group. Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as changeable. 4. Local Closing Supervision (LCS) This service qualifies for UL Central Station Connect Certification. This service is a form of SANS service (see next item) and differs from PCNS service in that the control unit: Only sends Alarms, Troubles, No Close, and Closing Troubles. Does not transmit Openings, Closings, Change Closing Time, or Bypass at Close points. Is programmed with a permanent close time only (no opening), which can be changed temporarily by someone with an ID code having a temporary change privilege. To establish LCS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following: The closing time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group. The control unit provides No Close supervision based on this closing time. NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This inhibits an irregular opening signal. YES for the SANS option for the BA group. Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as being changeable. 5. Alarm Events Only (SANS) The control unit will transmit only alarms and troubles to the CCC. No BA group openings or closings will be transmitted. To establish SANS service, you must, via downline loading only, program: NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This inhibits an irregular opening signal. 8-10

73 Section 8 System Communication YES for the SANS option for the BA group. Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as changeable. Note: Do not program the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group. Table of CCC Signaling Signal SANS (2) Significance BA (#) Day Set (3) No BA group (#) turned to Protection Off condition. BA (#) Nite Set (3) No BA group (#) turned to Protection On condition. Burglar Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes BA alarm at Point (#). Burglar Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes BA Point (#) has been bypassed. Burglar Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes BA Point (#) has been unbypassed. Burglar Alarm Trouble Yes BA trouble at Point (#). Typically indicates open in SIM loop, SIM comm fail, or tamper. Holdup Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Holdup alarm at Point (#). Holdup Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Holdup alarm Point (#) has been bypassed. Holdup Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Holdup alarm Point (#) has been unbypassed. Holdup Alarm Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Holdup trouble at Point (#). Typically indicates open in SIM loop, SIM Comm fail, or tamper. Supervisory Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Supervisory alarm at Point (#). Supervisory Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Supervisory Point(s) has been bypassed. Supervisory Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Supervisory Point (#) has been unbypassed. Supervisory Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Trouble at supervisory Point (#). Typically indicates open in SIM loop, SIM comm fail, or tamper. Fire Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Fire alarm at Point (#). Fire Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Fire alarm Point (#) has been bypassed. Fire Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Fire alarm Point (#) has been unbypassed. Fire Alarm Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Trouble at fire alarm Point (#). Typically indicates open in SIM loop, SIM comm fail, or tamper. Untyped Alarm (Point #) (4,6) Yes Untyped alarm at Point (#). Untyped Bypass (Point #) (3,6) Yes Untyped Point (#) has been bypassed. Untyped Unbypass (Point #) (3,6) Yes Untyped Point (#) has been unbypassed. Untyped Trouble (Point #) (4,6) Yes Trouble at Untyped Point (#). Typically indicates open in SIM loop, SIM comm fail, or tamper. Cabinet Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Cabinet tamper has operated. Operating Panel Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Operating panel tamper has operated. Printer Interface Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Printer interface unit tamper has operated. ADT On Premises (3) Yes Signals entry of ADT service code at operating panel; system is in service mode. ADT Off Premises (3) Yes Signals entry of Off Premises command at operating panel to terminate service mode. Janitor On Premises Yes Key inserted in Janitor keyswitch. Janitor Off Premises Yes Key removed from Janitor keyswitch. BA Group (#) Closing Trouble (3) Yes One or more BA protection points in BA group (#) are in alarm after expiration of exit delay. BA Group (#) Exit Fail No Customer did not exit after turning on protection in BA group (#). BA Group (#) Bypass (3) No Protection has been turned on with BA point(s) bypassed in BA group (#). BA Group (#) No Close No Protection not closed at the end of closing timer timeout at BA group (#). BA Group (#) Change Closing Time (3) No Close time of BA group (#) has been temporarily changed at an operating panel. 8-11

74 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Signal SANS (2) Significance BA Group (#) Irregular Opening (3) No Alarm due to someone turning a BA group off outside of the scheduled open period, without having the privilege to do so. The irregular opening and user ID number are transmitted. (Used with ACS service only.) Dialer Test Yes Transmitted once upon initialization of control unit, again after 12 hours have elapsed (as programmed), and thereafter as programmed. Serves to verify operation of dialing circuitry and integrity of telco line. Output Trouble Yes Trouble at a SIM output point (e.g., comm fail). Output Restore Yes Trouble has been restored. Start BA Test Yes Walk test of BA points has started. End BA Test Yes Walk test of BA points has ended. Start FA Test Yes Walk test of FA points has started. End FA Test Yes Walk test of FA points has ended. Start SPV Test Yes Walk test of supervisory points has started. End SPV Test Yes Walk test of supervisory points has ended. System Self-Supervisory Signals AC Fail Yes Signal initiated after loss of AC power for 4 hours. May be sent with a BA trouble (Day Set) or entry alarm (Nite Set). Low Battery (4) Yes AC power has failed and standby battery is sensed as being low. May be sent with a BA trouble or entry alarm. Telco Line Trouble (4) Yes Telco line problem; or, if immediately followed by a restoration, it signals that problem on telco line has been cleared. Interprocessor Communication Trouble (4) Yes Problem in communication link between communicator module and control unit microprocessors. Downline Loading Signals Start DLL Process Yes Signals that the downline loading (DLL) process with the Compass downloading software unit has started upon receipt of a Contact Compass downloading software command from the Compass downloading software unit. End DLL Process Yes Signals that DLL process has been completed. Abort DLL Process Yes Signals that the DLL process has been aborted. Signal is initiated if communicator loses contact with Compass downloading software. DLL Interrupted Yes Signals that communication with the Compass downloading software unit has been interrupted due to alarm condition. DLL Time Limit Exceeded Yes Signals that the downline loading (DLL) time limit has been exceeded during communication with the Compass downloading software unit. DLL Comm. Fail Yes Signals that control unit has failed in three attempts to establish communication with the Compass downloading software unit. Notes: 1. Signals are transmitted in ADEMCO Contact ID format and include time and date. 2. "Yes" indicates signal is also applicable to SANS service. 3. Signal includes data that identifies the person performing the operation. 4. Signal is cleared when condition is restored. 5. BA points will be automatically unbypassed when the BA group is opened. 6. Untyped designation is used for the following points: BA Keyswitch, BA Janitor Keyswitch, BA End Delay, BA Blocklock, and Remote Power Supply. Programming the System Communication Options To program for system communication, see the Programming section. 8-12

75 S E C T I O N 9 J5 Output Triggers In This Section About the J5 Output Triggers Types of Output Points Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Programming the Output Triggers About the J5 Output Triggers The FOCUS CADET system provides 8 output triggers and 1 connection for ground by means of the J5 connector pins. The J5 connector is located in the upper right-hand corner of the control unit PC board. Each output may be set to activate in response to a specific condition being monitored by the control unit. Additionally, Output Trigger 3 can be configured as a tamper input to monitor the cabinet tamper(s). Output Trigger 3 is normally configured as a tamper input to monitor the cabinet tamper(s). Types of Output Points The 4142TR cable is used to make connections to the J5 connector. The output triggers are primarily intended to sink current, and are rated as follows: Low Output: 0.7VDC through 100 ohm limiting resistor (can sink 33mA with a 4VDC drop). High Output: 12VDC through 4k ohm limiting resistor. These outputs can trigger low-current devices such as relays and sounders by wiring the device's (+) terminal to one of the control unit's auxiliary power outputs and the device's (-) terminal to the desired output trigger. A 12VDC relay with a 320 ohm coil and a 7.8VDC pull-in voltage is an example of a device that may be used. The following table indicates the entry number required at the operating panel, how the output point type functions and the options associated with each type (see the Input and Output Point Types section for an explanation of each option). Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (CSC) Central Station Output turns on or off upon a command signal from the CCC. Note: The command can only be issued using AC communication. 15 (SMC) Service Output turns on the first time a valid service ID code is entered at an operating panel (ADT on-premises), and turns off when an ADT off- premises signal is initiated by selecting RESET~ ADT OFF at the operating panel. 16 (TFC) Telco Fault Output turns on if a telco fault condition occurs (low voltage or current, or loss of interrogation on AC telco line). The output turns off when the telco line becomes normal. Complement Complement Complement 9-1

76 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (SCC) BA Schedule Output turns on at the start of the scheduled open period for a designated BA group, and turns off when the close schedule starts. 18 (LTC) BA Lights Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected BA group is turned off, or the entry/exit delay period is activated. The output turns off when the protection of a BA group is turned on. Complement Complement Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output turns on whenever any key is pressed on the operating panel. 19 (FXC) BA Fixed Output turns on when any BA Fixed or Fixed Local type point goes into alarm or, during Day Set, an Instant Daytime Annunciation type point goes into alarm. Output turns off when a valid ID code is entered at any operating panel. 20 (OFC) BA Off Output turns on when the protection of a selected BA group is turned off, and turns off when the protection is turned on. 21 (FAC) Fire Output turns on and latches when any fire type point in the system goes into alarm. The output turns off when the alarm condition has been cleared and the fire alarm is reset. 22 (SPC) Supervisory Output turns on if any supervisory type point goes into alarm, and turns off when the point restores. 23 (HUC) Holdup Output turns on if: 24 (HSC) Holdup Suspicion 25 (RSC) BA Remote Sonalert A holdup type point goes into alarm and turns off when the holdup device is manually reset. The ambush feature is activated and turns off when the operating panel times out. A duress signal is initiated at any operating panel and turns off when the operating panel times out. Output turns on when a Holdup type point or a Holdup Special type point in which the Suspicion option has been selected goes into alarm. The output, which can be used to control a holdup and suspicion camera, turns off when the point restores. Output turns on to operate Sonalert(s) during any of the following periods: Output follows the steady keypad audible pattern during the pre-alarm entry delay of the selected BA group, and operates the 2-seconds-On, 2- seconds-off pattern during the exit delay. During the holdup test (regardless of the BA group involved), output operates the 2-seconds- On, 2-seconds-Off pattern while the point being tested is normal, and turns on steady when the point is in alarm. When the point is restored to normal, the output reverts to the 2-seconds-On, 2- seconds-off operation until the test is ended. Output turns on for 2 seconds, once each minute, during the programmed closing reminder time of the selected BA group, and turns on steady during the close warning period. Complement Complement Complement Complement Complement Complement Complement Silence 9-2

77 Section 9 J5 Output Triggers Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (TSC) BA Bell and Vault Sensor Test Output turns on for 30 seconds when a test of the local bell and/or vault sensors is commanded from the operating panel. When used in conjunction with the testing of vault sensors, the output can be used to turn on the test signal transmitter of a vault vibration sensor system, and/or to turn on the test sounder of a vault audio system. 27 (RBL) Remote Bell This output point type is intended for retrofit FOCUS applications in which the Horn/Strobe point cannot be used. It can be used for controlling a bell for BA and FA applications, and for controlling a fire alarm strobe. 33 (STC) System Trouble The output is employed for controlling and supervising the wiring to a sounder or strobe for local fire alarm applications. In the event of a fire, the sounder pulses on and off, and the strobe flashes continuously. Note: A separate point is needed both the sounder and strobe. The supervised bell control unit is employed for connecting a bell housing and local bell in order to provide a local alarm for BA applications. The bell operates steadily for a burglar alarm, and rings on and off for a fire alarm. Output turns on for any of the following conditions and remains on until the condition is cleared: A point has been installed, but the point has not been entered into the control unit data base. A comm fail has occurred for a point, an operating panel, or a printer interface unit. A tamper condition has been detected at a Holdup point, a keyswitch interface, a Remote Bell point, an Ambush Start or End point, or a Remote Power Supply point. A trouble condition has occurred at a Janitor Keyswitch point. 34 (PLC) Point Link Output follows the status of a designated input point, or the output of a designated Point Link output point. 37 (ACC) BA Access Output turns on for 10 seconds when: A valid ID code is entered at the operating panel during the Day Set condition of the associated BA group. The BA group is turned to Day Set. A typical application is having the output control a doorstrike release mechanism, permitting access to a controlled area. Complement Strobe Complement Complement Complement Common BA Off Normal Output Link Active When Turned On 9-3

78 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (HST) Horn/Strobe For use with a horn/strobe that will operate for an FA alarm and, optionally, also for a BA alarm, as follows: For an FA alarm, strobe flashes continuously and horn operates for an ongoing series of five 1- second rings followed by a 5-second pause. Horn/strobe can be silenced only after all FA points become normal by entering any valid ID code (or 2,2,2,2,2,2); otherwise, turn-off occurs when 10-minute timeout expires. For a BA alarm, horn sounds continuously unless silenced by entry a valid ID code (or automatic turn-off occurs for the BA group that is involved). Strobe does not operate for a BA alarm. Note: Set option 3 for NFPA temporal pattern (Yes). If set for (NO) the output is steady. 40 (PRC) AC Fail This point type is normally on and turns off whenever an AC failure condition occurs on the system. 59 (ACD) Access Denied 68 (ABA) Alarm in any BA Group This output point can be used to trigger a camera or activate an annunciation device in the event that someone uses a card/key having a code that either: Is not in the system. Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Does not have Irregular Open, Open or Close access to all BA groups associated with that ACIU. Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option for any of the associated BA groups that may be On. Has a Close option and the person attempts to enter outside of the scheduled open period even though the associated protection is Off. When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10 seconds and then goes Off. This point type is normally off and turns on when an alarm occurs in any BA group that is armed. The output returns to the off condition when the BA group with the alarm condition is changed to Day Set. Inhibit BA Complement Complement Complement Common BA Code 3 Comm Fail Comm Fail The J5 output triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEMCO's 7720P, 7835C, 7830R, and 7920SE Long Range Radios. These units are typically used as a backup to the Telco lines. They may be configured to send signals when the system detects a Telco line fault. Refer to Figures 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 and 9-4 for the wiring and configuration of the Long Range Radios to the J5 output triggers. When a Long Range Radio is installed, configure the sense select for zones 1 and 2 in the Long Range Radio to activate on +5V (positive trigger). This is necessary to prevent false alarms from occurring. Refer to the installation instructions provided with your radio for instructions on setting the zone 1 and 2 levels. 9-4

79 Section 9 J5 Output Triggers CADET AUX. Relay N.O. 11 Ground SafetyNet Radio Power 16.5VAC / 40VA J5 Out 5 6 Out 6 7 Out 7 8 Out 8 9 Output Triggers CADET Setup: Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Program the AUX. Relay to activate on any BA [ABA] Program Output 6 (Point 253) to activate on Fire (type 21, FA) Program Output 7 (Point 254) to activate on Holdup (type 23, HU) Program Output 8 (Point 255) to activate on Telco Fault (type 16) Use any of the eight Hardwired Inputs (ZN 1-8) on the control and Program this point as an FI (Type 1), or an SPV (Type 13) to monitor Radio Fault Yellow Gray Violet 2k EOLR Ground Zone1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 ECP In ECP Out Radio Fault Output B A +V GND +V GND J3 J2 J1 CADET V1 Figure 9-1: Configuration of the 7720P to the J5 Output Triggers CADET AUX. Relay N.O. 11 Ground 12 J5 Out 5 6 Out 6 7 Out 7 8 Out 8 9 Output Triggers CADET Setup: Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Program the AUX. Relay to activate on any BA [ABA] Program Output 5 (Point 252) to activate on BA Off (type 20, OFC) Program Output 6 (Point 253) to activate on Fire (type 21, FA) Program Output 7 (Point 254) to activate on Holdup (type 23, HU) Program Output 8 (Point 255) to activate on Telco Fault (type 16) Use any of the eight Hardwired Inputs (ZN 1-8) on the control and Program this point as an FI (Type 1), or an SPV (Type 13) to monitor Radio Fault White Yellow Gray Violet 2k EOLR 7830R SafetyNet Radio Power 16.5VAC / 40VA Trigger Ground Zone1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 ECP In ECP Out Radio Fault Output B A +V GND +V GND J3 J2 J1 CADET V1 Figure 9-2: Configuration of the 7830R to the J5 Output Triggers CADET AUX. Relay N.O. 11 Ground 12 J5 Output Triggers Out 6 7 Out 7 8 Out 8 9 CADET Setup: Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Program the AUX. Relay to activate on any BA [ABA] Program Output 6 (Point 253) to activate on Fire (type 21, FA) Program Output 7 (Point 254) to activate on Holdup (type 23, HU) Program Output 8 (Point 255) to activate on Telco Fault (type 16) VA ADEMCO 7835C AC1 AC2 + Trigger Voltage - Trigger (GND) Zone 1 (FA) Zone 2 (HU) Zone 3 (BA) Zone 4 (Telco Fault) Zone 5 Zone 6 (Enable Radio) Radio Fault Relay 1 Radio Fault Relay 2 New Programming Options: Q 27= Y Q27a=Y Q27b=Y Q27c=Y Q27d=N Q27e=N CADET V1 Figure 9-3: Configuration of the 7835C to the J5 Output Triggers 9-5

80 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide CADET AUX. Relay N.O. Ground J5 Output Triggers CADET Setup: Out 6 Out 7 Out 8 Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Program the AUX. Relay to activate on any BA [ABA] Program Output 6 (Point 253) to activate on Fire (type 21, FA) Program Output 7 (Point 254) to activate on Holdup (type 23, HU) Program Output 8 (Point 255) to activate on Telco Fault (type 16) Yellow Gray Violet TB1 Tamper No. 112 TB2 7920SE CKT Zone Earth GND TEST GND Red Blk XMFR Imputs Zone Inputs k EOLR Battery Radio No VAC 40VA Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 OK Fuse No A, 32V 20 Gnd Blk SIM Red-Wht ALTRONIX RBTUL V Red Com (-) Yel To SIM Loop Org To CP + 12V Pos NO NC Trig Neg To CP GND 39 Com (+) Blue Blue-Wht White 33k EOLR C Fix Instant BA pt CADET V1 Figure 9-4: Configuration of the 7920SE to the J5 Output Triggers Programming the Output Triggers The output triggers are points 248 through 255 (output triggers 1 through 8). For information about the procedure, refer to the Programming section. Defaults for the Output Triggers: Point Description Wire Color Default Type Gateway # Hard ID 248 Trigger 1 Blue PLC Trigger 2 Brown PLC Trigger 3 (Tamper) Green PLC Trigger 4 Red PLC Trigger 5 White PLC Trigger 6 Yellow PLC Trigger 7 Gray PLC Trigger 8 Violet PLC

81 S E C T I O N 1 0 Access Control In This Section About Access Control Installing the Access Control Interface Unit Access Control Options Maintenance of the Access Control System Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels About Access Control The FOCUS CADET System accommodates up to 4 of the Access Control Interface Units (ACIU). The ACIU's interface access devices into the system for the purpose of controlling access to one or more designated BA groups. The devices are installed at the door to the protected area, allowing only persons with a valid code on their card, key, or operating panel to gain access to the area being controlled. The access devices available are: Card Readers Keypads Key Readers Keyloks Operating Panels Features of the ACIU Each Access Control Interface Unit: Attaches to the RS-485 bus, and can be distanced up to 4000 cable feet from the control unit. Note: Required distance may be shortened to comply with the ACIU's minimum voltage rating. Can accommodate one card/key reader with associated electric strike (or a Keylok) for controlling one door. Supports a Marlok key reader or Marlok Keylok, as well as a variety of specified card readers (magnetic stripe, Wiegand or proximity) that communicate using an industry-standard Wiegand format. Supports a separately ordered on-board battery, which provides power to the door strike. The battery also enables the ACIU to operate in a super-degraded mode (explained later in this section). Can be used to arm/disarm one or more BA groups. Supports buzz-through capability. Additional Features when Using Access Control Each reader can be programmed to determine the length of door unlock time. The system can be programmed to log all attempts at entry or only unsuccessful attempts, plus openings and closings (person, reader number, time, and date). All user cards and keys are shipped pre-coded, ready for use; no special site codes are required. Users can be assigned varying degrees of access to the BA group(s). 10-1

82 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide A total of 255 access control users can be programmed, of which 99 can also have use of the operating panels. A user with Janitor privilege may shunt alarms on Janitor point in all BA group(s) with card/key. The system can be programmed to release all access control doors when a fire alarm occurs. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Basic Operation Using Card/Key Reader Each door being used for access control requires: A card-or key-reading device installed. An electric door-releasing mechanism installed. Both the reader and door-releasing mechanism wired to the ACIU. The card or key's unique code enrolled into the database of the control unit. When a card/key is used at the reader, the following sequence of events occurs before the person is permitted entry: Step Action 1 The reader interprets the code on the card/key and forwards this data to the ACIU. 2 When interrogated by the control unit, the ACIU sends the code that was read. 3 The control unit then processes the information to determine whether to permit access. Some of the questions that must be satisfied during this processing are: Does the code exist in the control unit database? Does the person have access to all of the BA groups assigned to the ACIU? Are the BA group(s) turned on in the area being accessed? Does the person have an open privilege? Is the time of day within the open schedule? Does the person have an irregular open privilege? 4 If the control unit determines that it is OK for the person to gain access, it signals the ACIU, which then uses its battery to provide the power for operating the door strike or other lock-releasing mechanism, thereby allowing the person to open the door. The card/key code for the various users can be assigned locally from an operating panel or can be downline loaded. See the ID Codes section for the details of the procedure using an operating panel. Physical Description of ACIU The ACIU fits into a separately ordered Housing Unit. The following are important items on the board (see Figure 10-1): Part Terminal Strip TB1 Terminal Strip TB2 Terminal Strip TB3 Battery Area and Connector Terminating jumper E1 Jumpers E2 through E9 Jumper E10 Jumper E11 Purpose Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus. Used for connecting the reader. Used for powering the door-releasing mechanism. There is space for a separately ordered 12V 0.8 AH standby battery that connects to a polarized connector on the circuit board. Insert only if the ACIU is located at the end of the RS-485 bus. Used for setting the ACIU communication address on the RS-485 bus. Remove jumper if you are using an on-board battery. Leave the jumper intact if it is powering a 12V device. Remove jumper if it is powering a 5V device. Connect a standard 3k EOLR across TB3-1 and TB3-2 if it is not powering a door releasing mechanism. 10-2

83 Section 10 Access Control Part TXD and RXD LEDs Tamper Purpose Indicates the ACIU communication status as follows: TXD LED - flashing when the ACIU is transmitting. RXD LED - flashing when the ACIU is receiving. Space is provided for adding a tamper switch, which must be ordered separately as a Tamper Kit. RS-485 BUS LEDs TXD (YEL) RXD (RED) TERMINAL STRIP TB1 FOR RS-485 BUS CONNECTIONS RS-485 BUS ADDRESS JUMPERS (SEE DETAIL "A") JUMPER E10 (SEE NOTE 4) JUMPER E11 (SEE NOTE 3) E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 DS1 TXD RS-485 DS2 RXD BATTERY TB3 CONNECTION FOR ON BOARD BATTERY IF USED) TERMINAL STRIP TB3 FOR POWERING STRIKE OR SOLENOID (NOTE 3) (BLK) 1 (RED) 2 (YEL) 3 1 (BLU) TB1 GND + 12V COM COM + E1 JUMPER E1 (REMOVE JUMPER TO DISCONNECT RS-485 TERMINATING RESISTOR) BATTERY AREA 12V, O.8AH "0" 4 "1" 5 "A" 6 "B" TB2 FOR TAMPER (IF USED) SEE NOTE 2 TERMINAL STRIP TB2 FOR READER CONNECTIONS UNIT NO. COMMUNICATION GROUP NO. 4 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E UNIT NO. JUMPER IN JUMPER OUT JUMPER CONDITIONING SHOWN FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP 4 IN COMBINATION WITH UNIT NUMBERS 0 THROUGH 7. NOTES: 1. RS-485 BUS LEDs: (A) TXD (YEL) FLASHES WHEN ACIU IS TRANSMITTING (B) RXD (RED) FLASHES WHEN ACIU IS RECEIVING. 2. A TAMPER KIT (ORDERED SEPARATELY) MUST BE INSTALLED FOR UL INSTALLATIONS. CONSISTS OF TAMPER SWITCH PLUS MOUNTING HARDWARE. 3. LEAVE JUMPER E11 IN IF POWERING A 12V STRIKE (CARD READER OR MARLOK KEYREADER). REMOVE JUMPER E11 IF POWERING A 5V MARLOCK KEYLOCK OR OTHER 5V DEVICE. CONNECT STANDARD 3K EOL RESISTOR ACROSS TB3-1 AND TB3-2 IF NOT USING KEYLOCK OR STRIKE. 4. REMOVE JUMPER E10 IF USING ON-BOARD 12VDC 0.8AH BATTERY. Figure 10-1: Access Control Interface Unit (ACIU) 10-3

84 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Installing the Access Control Interface Unit The following installation procedures are limited to the installation of the Access Control Interface Unit and the wiring to the various readers, the door strike (or Keylok), and the RS-485 bus. Manufacturer's installation instructions for the various card/key readers, door strikes, etc. come with those devices. Always follow these instructions when installing or working on these items. The installation procedure entails installing the ACIU's and their on-board batteries and making connections to the RS-485 bus to allow the batteries to charge. During this charging time, you can install the card/key readers, electric strikes, Keyloks, etc. Once the batteries have fully charged, power down the control unit and connect the readers, strikes, etc. to the ACIU. Then use the construction card/keys to check that each electric strike or Keylok functions properly, and make mechanical adjustments where necessary. The Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers Table, shown later in this section, provides important information concerning the various card/key readers, including user operation, required reader DIP switch settings, and instructions for jumper settings for E11 on the ACIU. Application Guidelines Use the following guidelines when planning an installation: All access control applications require a separate ACIU for each door. All readers, except for the Marlok Keyreader and Keylok, can be used on both sides of a door, and share the same ACIU. Reserve the first 99 user ID codes for people who must use an operating panel. When using an access-controlled perimeter front door, always make sure that there is another perimeter door having a mechanical lock for gaining access. In this way, if there is a problem with the door release mechanism or the ACIU, someone with the key can enter the other door and then open the front door to let people in. Where general access to an unprotected lobby is required, and there is no concern for scheduling, a card/key reader can be used with an ACIU that does not have any BA groups assigned to it. This will allow access to the lobby for all persons with valid card/key codes, while requiring all others (visitors, etc.) to be buzzed in. If access to the lobby is to be limited to certain working hours, assign the lobby reader to a BA group that does not have any BA points. Then assign a schedule to that BA group. All persons having limited access must be programmed with a close-only privilege. All persons requiring round-the-clock access must be programmed with either open or irregular open privilege. Install a card/key reader near an operating panel to facilitate the enrolling of new cards/keys. Installation Guidelines Use the following guidelines when installing the ACIU: Do not use a mag stripe card on a Wiegand reader. It may corrupt the code on the mag stripe card. Each ACIU must receive a minimum of 12.5V from the RS-485 bus. Otherwise, the on-board battery will not charge and there will not be any power for releasing the door strike. If necessary, add a power supply to ensure that this voltage will be available. Maximum current for the electric door strike = 550mA. Make certain that the length of cable between the ACIU and its associated reader and door strike does not exceed 150 feet. The ACIU must not be subjected to temperatures below 32 F (0 C) or above l20 F (49 C). Include each ACIU in the System Layout Diagram of the FOCUS CADET System, indicating the BA group(s) that will be accessed via the ACIU. 10-4

85 Section 10 Access Control Each ACIU draws 60mA (including battery charge). Similarly, each card/key reader (or Keylok) draws a current that is specified in the Equipment section. These current draws affect the overall system power requirements; therefore, they must be incorporated into the power calculations outlined in the Power Requirements section. When you are calculating power requirements, make sure that each ACIU will receive a minimum of 8.5 volts (the same as the gateways and operating panels). This is based on 10.5 volts being supplied by the control unit battery with all sensors in alarm, and is calculated based on voltage drops on the RS-485 bus. The 8.5 volts cannot be measured, however, when the power transformer is plugged in, the ACIU should be receiving 12.5 volts from the RS-485 bus in order to recharge the on-board battery. This voltage can be measured. Note: The current for operating the door strike is furnished by the battery in the ACIU or by an external power supply, and does not enter into these calculations. Where an operating panel is being used with an ACIU for access control, it must be assigned communication Group # 0 on the RS-485 bus. All other operating panels that are not being used for access control must be assigned to communication Group # 1. The purpose is to prevent access control operating panels from being locked out if someone else is using a non-access control panel for a period of time, and visa versa. RS-485 Buses Each ACIU connects to a port in the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The RS-485 bus may be run up to 4000 feet. The maximum bus distance can be extended to 8,000 feet by using a RS-485 Repeater at the end of the bus. Current loading and voltage drop considerations may limit the maximum allowable wire lengths to less than 4000 feet. See the Power Requirements section for additional information. RS-485 Bus Cable Types Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable, differing only in the type of insulation (B6445) Cable - used as general purpose (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air handling plenums. Cable Run Considerations The safeguarding of RS-485 bus cable from physical damage is vital to continuous uninterrupted operation of the FOCUS CADET System. Keep the following guidelines in mind when running the cable: Bus cable should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable to minimize voltage drop. Any junction boxes (test terminals) that are required can be placed to be accessible from the floor. Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus to aid troubleshooting. There are no bus-terminating jumpers on the control unit circuit board. The bus requires a terminating jumper in the last device of the RS-485 bus. Mounting the Access Control Interface Unit To mount the ACIU, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Locate the ACIU close to the door that it will be used with. Choose a spot inside the protected area, where it will not be susceptible to tampering or to damage due to the moving of office furniture, machinery, etc. 2 Mount the Housing Unit (standard white box). 3 Set the Jumpers E2 through E9 for the appropriate address on the RS-485 bus (all ACIUs use communication Group number 4). 4 Set Jumpers E1, E10, and E11 as required. 10-5

86 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Step Action 5 Install the battery on the ACIU circuit board and fasten it with tie wraps. Mark the battery with the date of installation. 6 If you are using a Tamper Kit, install it on the ACIU circuit board at this time. 7 Install the ACIU circuit hoard in the housing unit. 8 Mark the housing with the number that will be transmitted to the CCC for an ACIU trouble, tamper, or restore condition. This number is related to the communication unit number of the ACIU. Also, be sure to record this number on the installation layout diagram so that the ACIU can be readily located, if necessary. Wiring the Access Control Interface Unit To wire the ACIU, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 At the control unit, make sure the power switch is in the "OFF" position. 2 Run the bus as required and make sure to appropriately tag it. Note: It is important to appropriately tag the cables so they can readily be identified. This is especially important if troubleshooting becomes necessary at some future date. 3 Cut the trunk cable and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the pressure plate of a terminal strip screw. 4 Measure the resistance between the black and red conductors (the (+) lead of the meter to the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading less than 12 ohms indicates a short on the power conductors or an excess of protection points. Make the necessary corrections before proceeding. 5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the ACIU. Identify terminal wires so that the proper wires can be connected to each terminal (see Figure 10-1). 6 Connect the battery leads to the connector on the circuit board. 7 Connect the RS-485 bus cable to the control unit (see table below). Wire Gauge/Color Function RS-485 #1 Terminal #19 AWG Blue RS #19 AWG Yellow RS #16 AWG Red + 12 VDC Power 19 #16 AWG Black DC Return Power 20 8 Power up the control unit to allow the ACIU battery to charge. Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels The cards and keys that are employed for ADT applications are listed in the Summary of Access Card/Key Readers Table, shown later in this section. They all come pre-coded and ready to use as soon as the code has been enrolled into the database of the control unit. The control unit stores the entire code number (site code plus individual person's code), so there is no need for the use of special site codes for the cards or keys. Existing customer cards for a given type of reader may be utilized for FOCUS CADET system. The FOCUS operating panel can control access, not only through card/keyreaders, but also through keypad entry of a valid 6-digit code. 10-6

87 Card Readers Section 10 Access Control The card readers: Are installed near the frame of the door. Read a coded card to determine whether a person will be permitted access. Are used with a separate electric door strike or other electrically controlled door-releasing device. Are categorized by the type of card that they read. Three basic types of cards are: 1. Magnetic stripe (mag stripe) 2. Wiegand 3. Proximity (prox) Card readers are therefore generally known as mag stripe, Wiegand, or prox readers. Are also categorized by the way the card must be presented for reading: 1. Card Swipe The card is "swiped" across a slot in the reader. 2. Insert The card is inserted fully into a narrow slot, and is read as it is withdrawn. 3. Proximity The card is passed in close proximity to the reader, which uses energy to determine the code on the card. May come with a keypad for added security, so that a PIN number can be entered in addition to the card code. For these applications, the ACIU can accommodate any PIN number of 1-8 digits along with the associated card code. May feature an LED display to inform the user of the card-reading and access-control process. Typically, a red-green LED lighting arrangement is used. Some readers use a bi-color LED and others use two LED's. On most readers, the red LED is normally lit to indicate that the reader is receiving power. When a card/key is being read, the red LED blinks off and, if access is granted, it turns green. Key Readers The key readers: Read the code embedded in the shaft of a metal key. Utilize a reader that has been integrated into a lock cylinder. Are installed near the door frame. Are used with a separate electric door strike or other electrically controlled door- releasing device. Keyloks The Keyloks: Are installed in the handle of a key-operated door knob or other door-locking mechanism. Cylinder, which replaces the key cylinder of the lock, has both a key reader and a built-in electrical releasing mechanism. When a key with valid code is inserted, the ACIU provides the releasing voltage allowing the key to be turned to unlock the door. When the key is turned, it operates a cam that can be linked to various types of unlatching mechanisms. Note: Because the Keylok is installed on the door rather than near the frame, wiring must be run from the Keylok, through the door, to a flexible cord. The flexible cord carries the wires from the edge of the door onto the door frame, so that a connection can be made to the ACIU. 10-7

88 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers Access Control Device Model Card/Key Type Application User Operation Card/Key Programming Reader DIP Switch Settings ACIU Strike Voltage Settings Sensor Engineering Wiegand Card Reader Motorola Indala Proximity Card Reader Dorado Pass- Through Card Reader Dorado Pass- Through Card Reader Dorado Insertion Card Reader Marlok Keylok (cylinder w/key reader and integral solenoid) Marlok Keyreader Northern Computers Wiegand Output Weatherized Keypad FOCUS Operating Panel Epic Three LED Slimline Proximity Card Reader 4 Range WallSwitch Proximity Card Reader 4 Range /6441 Pass-Through Card Reader w/keypad Pass- Through Ruggedized Card Reader w/keypad Pass- Through Ruggedized Card Reader w/keypad /5841 Insert Card Reader w/keypad / Keylok Mortise Rim Cylinder Keylok Key In Knob (D Knob) Gang- Mount Keyreader Mullion- Mount Keyreader Panel- Mount Keyreader KP-11-8 BIT Wiegand Card Indoor/Outdoor Card swipe None card comes pre-programmed with site code and user code. Proximity Card or Proximity Key Tag Magnetic stripe card (highcoercivity polyester) Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Only with Keypad Indoor/Outdoor with Keypad Card introduced within 4 of reader Key Tag introduced within 2.5 of reader Any of the following: Keypad PIN code only (1-8 digits, then enter # key). Card swipe only. Card and keypad (enter PIN of 1-8 digits, then swipe card). None card comes pre-programmed with site code and user code. None ADTordered card comes pre-programmed with site code and user code. (Possibility of using credit cards and driver s license that is coded.) None required None required ABA card, 34 bits Wiegand: Reader DIP switch settings. A B C D on on on off 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) Same as above Indoor/Outdoor Card swipe Same as above Same as above 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) Same as above Indoor/Outdoor with Keypad Any of the following: Keypad PIN code only (1-8 digits, then enter # key). Card insertion only (extraction read). Card and keypad (insert card, enter PIN of 1-8 digits, then remove card). Coded Key Indoor/Outdoor Coded key is inserted into Marlok keyreader cylinder. If key is OK, ACIU provides voltage for integral solenoid, permitting key to turn and release mechanically-linked latch. (Keylok requires running wires through door and installation of a flexible door cord between door and its frame.) Coded Key Indoor Only Coded key is inserted into Marlok keyreader cylinder. If key is OK, ACIU provides voltage for operating a door strike. Numerical Codes Indoor/Outdoor Keypad PIN code only (1-8 digits, then enter # key). Same as above, but cannot accept credit cards or driver s license. None key comes pre-coded. None key comes pre-coded. Same as above None required None required 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) 5-volt solenoid in Keylok (E11 = OUT on ACIU) 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU and insert 330-ohm dropping in series with TB3-2) N.A. N.A. 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) Indoor Only Enter 6-digit user ID code. N.A. N.A. 12-volt strike (E11 = IN on ACIU) Dorado and other mag stripe readers and cards may experience wear, necessitating periodic reader maintenance and eventual card replacement. Consult vendor literature for details. Refer to vendor literature for environmental and other limitations. 10-8

89 Installing and Wiring the Electric Door Strike and Card/Key Reader (or Keylok) ACIU Terminal Wiring Connections Between ACIU and Readers/Strike Marlok Keylok (2) Reader and Strike Wire Connections (1) Marlok Keyreader (2) Sensor Engineering (Epic) Dorado (5) Section 10 Access Control Motorola Indala TB2-1 (-) (4) Brown Brown Black Black Black TB2-2 (+) Green Green Red Red Red TB2-3 (data 0 ) Orange Orange Green Green Green TB2-4 (data 1 ) Black Black White White White TB2-5 (LED A ) Violet Brown Brown TB2-6 (LED B ) NOT USED TB3-1 Strike (-) Red (2a) Red (2b) (3) Strike (-) TB3-2 Strike (+) Yellow (2a) 330-ohm Yellow (2b) (3) Strike (+) Brown Blue Orange Yellow Yellow Blue Orange Strike (-) (3) Strike (-) (3) Strike (-) (3) Strike (+) (3) Strike (+) (3) Strike (+) (3) (1) To extend reach of card/key readers for connection to ACIU, use manufacturer s extension cable or use Cable as noted below. (2) For Marlok applications: a. For a Marlok KEYLOK (comes with 5V internal solenoid), connect red and yellow keylok wires to TB3-1 and TB3-2, respectively, and remove Jumper E11 in order to supply 5V to solenoid. b. For Marlok KEYREADER (works with the 12V stand-alone strike): 1. Connect (+) and (-) terminals of strike to TB3-2 and TB3-1, respectively. 2. Insert a 330-ohm +/- 5%, 1-watt resistor in series with the yellow wire from Keyreader to TB Connect red wire from Keyreader directly to TB Insert Jumper E11 to supply 12V. (3) Strike requires 12VDC (E11 = IN). If not using strike, connect a 3K resistor across TB3-1 and TB3-2. (4) Connect TB2-1 to CWG so that wire from reader will be returned to CWG. (5) Cut resistor R8 on the ACIU circuit board, if you are using Dorado 7401 or 7901 card readers. See Figure Using ( ) Cable for Extension 1 BLK 6 BRN 2 RED 7 RED/BLK = Violet 3 BLU 8 BLU/BLK = Green 4 ORG 9 YEL/BLK = White 5 YEL 10 ORG/BLK To install the electric door strike and card/key reader or Keylok, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Install the electric door strike and the card/key reader or Keylok in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2 Run the wiring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, making sure that all wiring to the ACIU does not exceed 150' (see Figures 10-2 and 10-3). Where vendor extension cables are not available for the connections, use ( ) Cable for the extension. 3 Set the DIP switch settings for the card reader, as required. 4 If you are not using a strike or a Keylok, install a standard 3K EOL resistor across TB3-1 and TB3-2 on the ACIU to simulate the strike load for the strike supervisory circuit. 10-9

90 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide ACIU TB1 RS-485 BUS TB3 TB CABLE (2-WIRE, #18 AWG) CABLE ( ) (10-WIRE, #22 AWG) 100 FEET MAX. 1 CARD READER KEY READER ELECTRIC STRIKE Figure 10-2: Typical Installation Using Card Reader or Keyreader ACIU TB1 RS-485 BUS TB3 TB2 MARLOK EXTENSION (15 FEET) (SEE NOTE) MARLOK KEYLOCK 1 PULL FLEXIBLE ARMORED DOOR CORD (16") NOTE: MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CABLE DISTANCE BETWEEN KEYLOCK AND ACIU IS 150 FEET Figure 10-3: Typical Installation Using a Keylok 10-10

91 TERMINAL STRIP TB1 FOR RS-485 BUS CONNECTIONS JUMPER E1 (REMOVE JUMPER TO DISCONNECT RS-485 TERMINATING RESISTOR) Section 10 Access Control DS1 TXD RS485 DS2 RXD E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E11 E10 BATTERY + TB (BLK) 1 GND (RED) V (YEL) 3 COM (BLU) 4 COM + TB1 D11 D1 R7 R8 D3 D2 E1 C4 C3 C6 C7 D10 BATTERY AREA 12V, O.8AH U "0" C5 4 "1" 5 "A" 6 "B" TB2 U2 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 CUT R8 Figure 10-4: Modifying ACIU for Operation with Dorado 7401 or 7901 Card Reader Using the Operating Panel for Access Control Access can be controlled not only by card/key readers, but also by the FOCUS operating panel. The person requesting access must enter a valid 6-digit code to gain entry. Either of three methods can be used: Using an ACIU to control power to a 12-volt door strike. The control unit commands the ACIU to have its on-board battery provide the 12V potential for releasing the door strike when a valid code is entered at the operating panel. No connection is required between the operating panel and the ACIU. The only ACIU connections that are needed are to the RS-485 bus and to the door strike. The operating panel is linked to the ACIU through programming. Sharing an ACIU with a card/key reader. An operating panel is linked to the same ACIU as a card/key reader, so that either the card/key reader or the operating panel can be used for access control. In this arrangement, a person who forgot his card can use the operating panel to gain access. Note that the operating panel can only be installed indoors. Using a BA Access output point to control the power to the strike. The control unit commands the BA Access output point to turn on when a valid code is entered at the operating panel. When turned on, the BA Access output point closes the circuit to a separate power source, thereby applying power to the door strike. Installing the Operating Panel for Use With Access Control If an operating panel is being used for access control, it must be assigned to communication Group 0. Install the operating panel in the usual manner. Where an operating panel is being used for access control with an ACIU, its communication Unit number on the RS-485 bus must coincide with the communication Unit number of the ACIU. An operating panel being used for access control (Communication Group 0) becomes locked out during the period that any other operating panel at communication Group 0 becomes activated, and vice versa

92 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Installing the RPX-264 Pushbutton The RPX-264 Pushbutton may be used for manual buzz-in and egress (exit) applications (MAP/EXP point types. Where the RPX-264 Pushbutton is being used for manual buzz-in: Install it at the location specified by the customer. The associated SIM (Sensor Interface Module) connects to the trunk of the SIM loop in the building. See Figure 10-5 for the wiring connections. Program the point as Manual Access Pushbutton Point. Where an RPX-264 Pushbutton is being used for an egress (exit): Install it inside of the protected area close to the exit door along with its SIM (Sensor Interface Module). The LED on the pushbutton serves to annunciate the status of the associated BA group(s). Therefore, it must be visible from outside the door. If this is not possible, a separate seriesconnected LED must be installed just outside of the exit door. See Figure 10-5 for the wiring connections. Program the point as Exit Pushbutton Point. For an explanation of these input point types, see Point Types Associated with Access Control later in this section BLU YEL RED BLK SIM RED/WHT BLK/WHT ORA X X 33K 5% 1/4W RED BLK + 12V RED LED NORMALLY OPEN MOMENTARY PUSHBUTTON SWITCH ALARM CONTROL CORP. RPX-264 SWITCH AND LED ON MOUNTING PLATE BLU/WHT WHT Figure 10-5: Wiring Connections for a Manual Access Pushbutton or Exit Pushbutton 10-12

93 Section 10 Access Control Access Control Options The following table describes the options available for access control operation: Option Unlock Time Log Event Keypad BA Group Control XMIT Denied XMIT Invalid CDR SCH Function This is the number of seconds (1-255) that an access-controlled door is to become unlocked (strike activated) when a valid code is read by a card/key reader or entered at an operating panel. When this option is selected, all successful attempts at access are logged. The control unit will always log an unsuccessful attempt at entry, an opening, a closing, or an irregular access. This includes the detection of a code that: Is not in the control unit database. Has been enrolled in the database, but has not been authorized to access the BA group(s) associated with that ACIU. Involves an irregular opening by someone who is not privileged to do so. All logged access data can be viewed at an operating panel or printed out on a printer, and includes the time and date, reader number, and the name of the person. This option allows for the automatic turn-off of selected BA groups when a valid code is entered at a specified operating panel. The automatic turn-off function eliminates the need to step through the various operating panel screens for doing the turn-off. The user must have the privilege of turning off the selected BA groups. This option is selectable for each ACIU. It enables transmission of a signal to the CCC any time that a person attempts to gain access but is denied entry. Reasons for denial include: Person does not have authority to enter the area(s) involved. Person is attempting access at time of day outside of scheduled open period. BA group is on and person does not have authority to enter unless the BA group is off. The signal transmitted to the CCC is DK, and includes the time and date, the person's PC number, and the communication unit number of the ACIU. This information is also stored in the history log, but the name of the person is substituted for the PC number. The customer can determine the area(s) to which access has been denied by using an operating panel to see the number and name of the BA group(s) associated with the ACIU. This option is selectable for each ACIU. It is used to alert the CCC when someone attempts gain access with a card/key that has not been registered in the system. The signal transmitted is DD, and includes the time, date, and communication number of the ACIU. This information is also stored in the history log. This option is employed to keep a strike activated (door unlatched) for a period of time that is equal to the scheduled open period of any single specified BA group. The BA group that is specified may be different than the BA group(s) associated with the ACIU. In order for the strike to become activated, the time of day must be within the scheduled open period for the BA group that is specified, and the BA group(s) associated with the ACIU must be off. If any of the ACIU-associated BA group(s) are turned on, the strike will deactivate to lock the door, and normal access control will resume. If you are using a 120VAC strike, then you must connect an appropriate 12- volt relay to Terminals TB3-1 and TB3-2 of the ACIU, and use the relay contacts to close the 120-volt circuit to the strike. In this case, the relay must be capable of being energized continuously and its contact rating must be sufficient for handling the power that is involved

94 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide The strike being used for the CDR SCH option must be capable of continuous activation; otherwise it may burn out. Also, the strike must be powered from a separate power supply in place of the ACIU battery. Therefore: The battery must be removed from the ACIU. The red (12V) bus wire must be disconnected from TB1-2 of the ACIU. The 12 VDC power from the power supply must be connected to terminals TB 1-1 and TB1-2 (12V) of the ACIU. Jumper E10 must be inserted on the ACIU board because the battery is not being used. Where a Marlok Keylok is involved, DO NOT use the CDR SCH option because the Keylok will burn out if its solenoid is continuously powered. Instead, the Keylok must be opened with the key and must not be locked until the open period is terminated, typically by the last person leaving for the day. Point Types Associated with Access Control Entry Description Function Number 59 (ACD) Access Denied 60 (MAP) Manual Access Pushbutton This output point can be used to trigger a camera or activate an annunciation device in the event that someone uses a card/key having a code that either: Is not in the system. Does not have Irregular Open, Open, or Close access to all BA groups associated with that ACIU. Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option for any of the associated BA groups that may be On. Has a Close option and the person attempts to enter outside of the scheduled open period even though the associated protection is Off. When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10 seconds and then goes Off. This point type is employed when a receptionist (or security guard) uses a RPX-264 Pushbutton to buzz someone through an accesscontrolled door. The buzz-in duration is determined by the unlock time that was programmed for the door strike. You can install the pushbutton in a remote location or alongside the desk of the receptionist (or security guard) so they can view the door being controlled. Where the buzz-in will be done from a remote location, a telephone or intercom can be used for conversation with the person who wants to enter. Pressing the pushbutton causes a buzz signal to be sent to the control unit, which signals the ACIU to activate the door strike. Multiple MAP points, in different areas, can each be used for the buzz-in capability so that people in different parts of a building can buzz someone through a common door

95 Entry Number Description 64 (EXP) Exit Pushbutton Person Without Janitor Privilege User Action BA Groups Status Person leaving presses pushbutton. Person exits, closes the door, and uses the coded key/card. Person exits, closes the door, but forgets to use the coded key/card. Function Section 10 Access Control This point type uses a RPX-264 Pushbutton, installed inside of the access-controlled area, to establish a 1-minute exiting-time window for the last person leaving. This allows the person time to open the door, exit, and use a coded key at a Keylok to lock the door, thereby automatically tuning on the BA groups. The pushbutton is ordinarily connected to a SIM. However, for retrofit purposes, the pushbutton can also be connected to a Switch Interface Module. When someone with a Janitor privilege uses the pushbutton for exiting, then closes the door and uses the coded key to lock the Keylok, the shunt is removed from all Janitor points that were alarm shunted. Also, a Janitor Off Premises signal is sent to the CCC. The LED option serves to annunciate the exit delay. See the tables below for the status indications for a person with and without Janitor privilege during entry and exit. LED Status Result OFF OFF Indicates BA groups are Off. Normal Begins flashing (1-sec On/1-sec Off). 1-minute window starts. Not Ready Off 1-minute window does not start. Normal On Steady. Indicates BA group(s) are On and door can now be locked. Not Ready Off BA group(s) will not turn On. (Where Keylok is involved, person will not be able to turn key to lock the door.) Normal Person With Janitor Privilege User Action Entry Janitor uses the coded key/card and unlocks the door. Exit Janitor exits and presses the pushbutton. Janitor exits and presses the pushbutton, closes the door, uses the coded key/card (or Janitor Keyswitch). Janitor closes the door, but forgets to use the coded key/card (or Janitor Keyswitch. BA Groups Status Goes Off at the end of 1-minute time window. LED Status Indicates BA groups are Off. Result On On Indicates BA groups are On. Normal Slow flashing (1-sec On/2-sec Off). Indicates janitor points in all BA groups have become alarm shunted. Normal Changes from slow to fast flashing (1-sec On/1-sec Off). 1-minute window starts. Not Ready Remains slow flashing. Indicates BA groups are not normal. Normal Changes to On steady. Indicates alarm shunt has been removed from each janitor point in system and BA groups are On. Door can now be locked. Normal At end of 1-minute window, slowly flashes. Indicates BA groups are On, but Janitor points in each group are still alarm shunted

96 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entering Point Data Via the Operating Panel See the Types of Input and Output Points section for information about point data options. See the Programming section for instructions on entering the point data via the operating panel. Assignment of Person Data There can be up to 255 persons assigned to the system. The system and the CCC uniquely identify each person by a user number. The user number serves as the basis for assigning the operating panel code, the card/key code, the person's name and privileges, as well as the BA groups that the person will be capable of entering or controlling. The following table explains these options: Option Function Operating Panel Code Card/Key Code Holder (person's name) BA Group Level Access Level (Privileges) An operating panel code is formed by adding four digits to the user number to make up a 6-digit code. This 6-digit code is used at an operating panel for controlling the system. Where an operating panel is used for access control, the operating panel code also serves the same function as a coded card or coded key. An operating panel code can be established only for user numbers 1 through 99. Users 100 through 255 can be assigned only to the access control function, and will not be able to use an operating panel to turn any of the BA groups On or Off, or to perform any other function associated with the operating panel. Persons with an operating panel code can use any operating panel, and can also be assigned a card/key for access control areas. When a card/key is assigned to someone, its code is entered into the control unit database for the appropriate user number. This can be done at any operating panel when a person's privileges and other data are assigned. The card/key code is entered automatically when the card or key is read by swiping or inserting it at any card/key reader in the system. The card/key code that is stored in the control unit database is an 8-digit Hex code that has been read from the card or key. Up to 16 characters can be used for assigning a name to the person's user number. For security reasons, it is often necessary to confine a person's access to the areas the person normally conducts business. Each of the protected areas must be identified by assigning it to a BA group. A person can be assigned access to any combination of BA groups. There are four access levels for controlling a person's access to the BA groups. The four levels are explained below, based on an irregular opening privilege of NO. See the Table of Access Capabilities for further details. A. "-" Access denied. Person cannot enter area of BA group under any circumstances. B. "C" Close only. Access granted, but only if the associated BA group(s) are Off. (Person will be able to turn protection On.) C. "O" Open: Inside of scheduled open time - Access granted and associated BA group(s) turned off automatically. (Automatic turn-off can be disabled for the associated BA group(s).) Outside of scheduled opening time - Access is denied and associated BA groups remain On. (Person will also be able to turn protection On.) D. "I" Irregular open. Differs from the "O" level in that it includes the capability for gaining access outside of scheduled opening time. The access level is determined by assigning individual privileges to a given user number from a choice of nine privileges. See the Table of Privileges

97 Option Cancel Date BA Group Control Function Access Capability Time Condition of BA Group(s) Person can open and access any time. Same as above, but an irregular event is flagged for access outside of schedule (PVF). Person can open and access, but only within schedule. Person cannot open, but can access within schedule. Person cannot gain access at any time. Inside or Outside Schedule Inside Schedule Outside Schedule Inside Schedule Outside Schedule (2) Inside Schedule Outside Schedule (2) Inside or Outside Schedule Section 10 Access Control A date can be assigned for temporary users of the system, after which their card/key or operating panel code will become invalid. Note: If an RF button is linked to a user code, when the user code cancel date expires the link is severed. Entering a new cancel date does not re-establish the link to the RF button. This serves to identify the number of each BA group within the accesscontrolled area, and it is used in conjunction with the BA Group Level (described above) that is assigned to each person who will have a coded card/key. In this way, the control unit can determine whether a person's card/key can be used to gain access to the BA group(s) associated with a given card/key reader: If the associated BA groups are Off, any persons having a "C," "O," or "I" level of access to these groups will be allowed to enter. All other persons ("-" level) will be locked out. If the associated BA groups are On, only persons with an "I" or "O" level of access to these groups will be allowed to enter; persons with a "C" or "-" level will be locked out. Table of Access Capability Access Action CCC Signal Log and Print Programming Required On Open and Access Opening Opening Off Access No Signal Access (1) On Open and Access Opening Opening Off Access No Signal Access (1) On Open and Access Irregular Opening (PVF) Irregular Opening Off Access No Signal Irregular Access On Open and Access Opening Open and Access Off Access No Signal Access (1) On No Access No Signal No Access Off No Access No Signal No Access On No Access No Signal No Access Off Access No Signal Access (1) On No Access No Signal No Access Off No Access No Signal No Access On No Access No Signal No Access Off No Access No Signal No Access BA Group Level = I plus Access Level 0 = Y (3) BA Group Level = I plus Access Level 0 = N (3) plus PVF = Y BA Group Level = O plus Access Level 0 = N (3) BA Group Level = C plus Access Level 0 = N (3) BA Group Level = 1. Nothing will be logged or printed if the Log Option = N. Selectable at each reader. 2. Access can be granted by establishing a temporary schedule. 3. An access Level of "0" allows users to open and access all BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without initiating an irregular opening (normal opening signal to CCC) or irregular access (no signal to CCC). Table of Privileges The following table explains the 9 privilege levels available for each user. Privilege levels 1 through 5 apply to users with an operating panel code only. Level Privilege 0 Ability to open and access all BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without initiating an irregular opening (open signal to CCC) or irregular access (no signal to CCC). 1 Ability to bypass and unbypass BA points, and ability to bypass VVS sensors. 2 Ability to change temporary schedules and change closing times, and ability to change real time by up to 5 minutes per day. 3 Ability to change permanent schedules, make unlimited changes in real time, and to conduct FA sensor test

98 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Level Privilege 4 Ability to change person/point/ba group descriptions, and privilege level. Ability to change ID code accessibility to BA group. 5 Ability to bypass fire, holdup, or supervisory points, and to conduct FA sensor test. 6 Service ADT on-premises signal is transmitted to CCC when the ID code is entered and will lock out all other ID codes. This privilege must be assigned to all Service ID codes, and is not to be made available to the customer. 7 Operating panel code and/or card/key code is permitted to be changed by person having a code with level 4 privilege. 8 Janitor Use of valid card/key will cause the alarm shunting of any Janitor BA points in the associated BA group(s). Note: Basic privilege assigned to each code allows user to turn BA protection On and Off for assigned BA group(s), and to perform tests. Assigning Access and Privileges for Users Perform the following steps to enter the card/key access data for a user via the operating panel. See the ID Codes section for the procedure on entering access capabilities of users using ID Codes. Enter the Service Code at an operating panel. <? Enter choice: Action Menu #1 is displayed. < Lesson Turn on > Select More three times to display the last action menu. < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > < PERSON #1 USER 001 Delete > < Previous Change > < Quit Next > < Insert or swipe key or card < 1 A < Quit Continue > <? Code and card will be deleted < on 08/21 < Quit Enter > <? Code and card will be deleted < on 08/21 < Quit None > <? Code and card will be deleted < on 08/21 < Quit None > Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select ID codes. Person Data Entry Screen is displayed. Pressing the [#] key at this screen will bring you to the Enrolling Key or Card Screen. Also pressing Continue at the last access screen "ID code may (not) be changed" for BA Group 4 will bring you to that screen. The Enrolling Key or Card Screen is displayed. Insert the key or swipe the card in the reader. An 8-digit number will be displayed. Select Continue to move to the next screen. The Person s Deletion Date Screen is displayed. Enter the digits for the month and day after which the person will be prevented from using the system. Select Enter to register the date in the system. After you press Enter, that button changes to None. Select None to delete the date and/or change it. Select Quit to return to the Person Data Entry Screen

99 Construction Mode Section 10 Access Control The system is capable of operating in a Construction mode in which building contractors can be given a special coded card or key for gaining access before the system is fully operational. This mode is in effect if the ACIU is not communicating with the control unit. Checking Operation and Using Construction Key/Card The Construction key or card has a unique code that has been embedded in a special location in the memory of the ACIU. The ACIU will look for the construction code only if it loses communication with the control unit. Once the ACIU battery has been charged, the Construction key/card can be used to check the operation of the electric door strike or other releasing mechanism, enabling adjustments to be made where necessary. Remember, to use the Construction key/card, the control unit must be powered down or the ACIU communication wires must be disconnected from the RS-485 bus. After making all required adjustments and powering up the system, you can enroll the Construction key/card into the system and give it to construction people for use until the system is turned over. Then the Construction key/card can be deleted. Where a Keylok is involved, a small terminal is provided just above the LED to enable emergency operation in the event of an extended AC power outage or the control unit is down for an extended period. Applying a + 12-volt potential to this terminal from a battery will power the ACIU and allow a Construction Key to be used to unlock the door. Maintenance of the Access Control System Dorado and other mag-stripe readers and cards may experience wear, necessitating periodic reader maintenance and eventual card replacement. Consult the manufacturer's/vendor's literature at the end of this supplement for details. Make sure all readers are tested periodically for proper operation. Supervision of ACIU The ACIU is supervised for three conditions: A low-battery condition If the battery voltage falls below 12.0 volts, a low-battery supervisory signal will be generated. The voltage is checked every time the door strike is powered. An open in the wiring between the electric strike or Keylok mechanism and the ACIU. A tamper condition If the tamper is used and the cover is removed. In either case, the operating panel will display a trouble message (shown below), that indicates the RS- 485 Communication Unit number of the ACIU. <? TROUBLE DV 003 Card Reader < OPEN < Quit Prev > In the event that a low battery or an open is detected, a 333 (device trouble) signal will be sent to the CCC. If a tamper is detected, a tamper signal will be sent. Both signals will include the number that identifies the address of the associated ACIU

100 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Identifying the ACIU in the CCC Transmission The table below shows the information sent to the CCC for the various trouble conditions for each unit number: Unit Number CCC Transmission , , or , , or , , or , , or , , or , , or , , or , , or = Tamper, 333 = Trouble (battery or strike wiring), 143 = Restore Super-Degraded Mode If the control unit fails or the ACIU loses communication with the control unit, the ACIU goes into the Super-Degraded mode, operating on its battery power. In this mode, the reader will recognize only the last 63 different card/key codes that were granted access. This allows these people to continue to gain access in the interim until normal operation is restored. Attempts at access during the Super-Degraded mode, whether they are successful or not, will not be logged in the History Log. Troubleshooting The following table describes access control troubleshooting procedures: Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action Red LED on reader or keylok does not go on. 1 Battery is not fully charged or is not properly connected to ACIU. 2 Insufficient power to reader. 3 Insufficient voltage to ACIU. 1 Make sure that battery is fully charged and is properly connected to ACIU. 2 Check for 5VDC between TB2-1 (-) and TB2-2 (+). If you are using a Marlok Keylok or Keyreader, key must be fully inserted in keyway for this measurement. A. If reading is too low, either RS-485 bus voltage to ACIU is too low or ACIU is defective. B. If reading is OK, problem is in reader or wiring to reader. 3 Check for at least 12.5VDC across TB1-1 (-) and TB1-2 (+). A. If reading is too low, add a local power supply. B. If reading is zero or if polarity is reversed, check wiring to TB1. 4 Defective ACIU. 4 Disconnect all wires from TB2. If voltage between TB2-1 (-) and TB2-2 (+) is not 5VDC, replace ACIU. 5 Wrong reader. 5 Replace reader with one that is rated to operate between 4.75 and 5.25VDC. 6 Defective reader. 6 Disconnect all reader wires on TB2, except wires TB2-1 (-) and TB2-2 (+). If reader had connection to TB2-6, momentarily connect this wire to TB2-1. If red LED does not light, replace reader

101 Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action Section 10 Access Control Red LED on Marlok Keylok or Keyreader stays bright red with key removed. Construction card (Wiegand mag stripe or proximity) does not work (green LED does not light). Marlok construction key does not cause green LED to light. Marlok Construction key causes LED on Keylok to turn yellow. 1 Dirt in reader keyway. 1 Clean using cleaning swab. Refer to vendor literature for details. 2 Broken data line ( 1 or 0 ). 3 Top surface of reader is shorted to metal portion of lock. 2 Check wiring connections and correct or make repairs, as required. 3 Check and insulate top surface of lock, if shorted. 4 Bad or damaged reader. 4 Replace Keylok or Keyreader. 1 ACIU is communicating with control unit. 2 Incorrect wiring between ACIU and reader. 3 Improper card orientation or card swiping. 4 Bad or defective construction card. 1 Construction card only works when ACIU is NOT communicating with control unit. Either turn of control unit or disconnect yellow and blue RS-485 bus wires from TB1-3 and TB Check wiring to TB2-5 for opens, shorts, and grounds. Insulate all unused wires. 3 When swiping, card must be properly seated in slot, and swiped straight through in the direction of the arrows without lifting or twisting. The ADT logo should face you, and the edge marked This edge up should be up. 4 Card should not be cracked. A mag stripe card can be damaged internally if it is subjected to a strong magnetic field. Try a known good construction card. 5 Bad or damaged reader. 5 Disconnect wire from TB2-5 and momentarily connect it to TB2-1. If green LED does not light, replace reader. 1 ACIU is communicating with control unit. 2 Incorrect wiring between ACIU and Keylok or Keyreader. 1 Construction key works only when ACIU is NOT communicating with control unit. Either turn off control unit or disconnect yellow and blue RS-485 bus wires from TB1-3 and TB Disconnect wire from TB2-5 and momentarily connect it to TB2-1. If green LED does not light, replace reader. 3 Improper key insertion. 3 Marlok keys are read from the key tip to shank, but only on insertion. Key must be inserted in a continuous fluid motion without stopping, hesitating, or reversing direction. If key is not read, remove and reinsert. (The key may be inserted upside down with no difference in reading.) 4 Bad or defective construction key. 5 Dirt in reader is partially blocking light path. 6 ACIU battery missing or low. 4 Key should not be cracked, bent, scratched, or dirty. Try a known good construction key. 5 Clean reader keyhole using Marlok cleaning swab. 6 Install a fully charged battery. Make sure Jumper E11 is out. 7 Bad or defective ACIU. 7 With all wires disconnected from TB3, check for 12VDC across TB3-2 (+) and TB3-1 (-) for 10 seconds after inserting construction key. If voltage is incorrect, replace ACIU. 8 Bad or defective Keylok or Keyreader. 1 Green LED is receiving too much current because Jumper E11 on ACIU is IN. 2 Green LED is receiving too much current because 330- ohm resistor is not installed. 8 Momentarily connect yellow wire to TB2-2 (5V). If LED does not turn green, replace Keylok or Keyreader. 1 Remove Jumper E11. 2 Install 330-ohm, +/- 5%, 1-watt resistor in series with yellow wire to TB

102 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action Marlok Construction key causes green LED on Keylok to light, but key does not turn. Construction card causes green LED on reader to light, but strike does not activate. Red LED on reader does not wink off when user card/key is swiped/inserted. Yellow LED on ACIU does not flash. Cardreader (ACIU) Comm Fail. Cardreader (ACIU) trouble. 1 Set screws on Keylok are preventing key from turning. 2 Keylok is defective. 2 Replace Keylok. 1 ACIU battery missing or is low. 2 Incorrect wiring from ACIU to strike. 3 Jumper E11 is OUT. 3 Insert Jumper E11. 1 Using a 1/16 allen wrench, unscrew (in counterclockwise direction) the left and/or right (not center) set screw(s) on top of the Keylok cylinder until lock core turns freely in the desired direction(s). 1 Install a fully charged battery. Make sure Jumper E11 is out. 2 Check strike wiring to TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+). Check wiring for opens, shorts, and grounds. 4 Wrong strike. 4 Replace strike with one rated for 550mA. 5 Excessive voltage drop on strike wires. 5 Check strike wire, which should be 18 AWG minimum and length should not exceed 150 feet. 6 Bad strike. 6 Connect strike directly to 12VDC battery. If strike does not operate, replace strike. 7 Bad ACIU. 7 Disconnect all wires from TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+) of ACIU. If 12VDC is not read across these terminals for 10 seconds after card is swiped, replace ACIU. 1 Improper or defective card. 1 Card must be compatible with reader. Card should not be cracked. Mag stripe cards should not be subjected to strong magnetic fields. Try using a known good card. 2 DIP switch in reader not set for operation with FOCUS control panel. ACIU tamper is installed and is normal. 1 ACIU is addressed incorrectly. 2 RS-485 terminating Jumper E1 is not being used properly. 3 Incorrect wiring from ACIU to control unit. 2 Refer to Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers chart for proper DIP switch settings. Release tamper. 1 Make sure ACIU is addressed for Communication Group 4 and with a unique Unit Number (0-3). 2 Remove Jumper E1 from all devices on the RS-485 bus except the two end devices. 3 Check wiring to TB1-3 (yellow wire) and TB1-4 (blue wire). 4 Bad ACIU 4 Connect ACIU directly to control unit. If Comm Fail persists, replace ACIU. 1 Incorrect wiring from ACIU to strike. 1 Check wiring from TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+) to strike and correct, if necessary. 2 No strike installed. 2 ACIU supervises the strike. If you are using some doorreleasing device other than a strike, connect a standard 3K EOLR across TB3-1 and TB Battery in ACIU is weak. 3 Check if battery is connected and check voltage. If voltage is low, check that input voltage from RS-485 is greater than 12.5VDC. If bus voltage is not OK, add a power supply. If bus voltage is OK, let battery charge for several minutes. If voltage does not increase, check for 12VDC minimum at battery terminals on ACIU with battery disconnected. If voltage is not OK, replace ACIU

103 Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action Section 10 Access Control Card/keys cannot be enrolled at any reader. Not using proper screen at operating panel when enrolling card/keys. Make sure that the following screen is displayed when swiping/inserting a card/key: Insert or swipe Key or card < < Quit Continue > Successfully enrolled card/key does not activate green LED and strike or Keylok. Control unit history and/or printer show User XXX DENIED NA. Card code changes with each swipe when enrolling. I level person does not generate an Irregular Opening (PVF). 1 Person does not have access to all BA Groups associated with this reader. 2 Time is outside of scheduled open period and person does not have irregular privilege. 3 Time of day or date is incorrectly set in control unit. 4 BA Off Disable option has been selected for one of the BA Groups associated with this reader. 5 BA Group associated with this reader is ON and cannot be turned of because: a. Person has not been programmed with capability to turn off the BA Group. 1 Program person with access to ALL BA Groups associated with this reader. 2 Wait until time is inside of scheduled open period or reprogram person with irregular privilege. 3 Correct time of day and/or date. 4 Only person with an operating panel code (1-99) can turn off the BA Group. Change the BA Off Disable option or assign an operating panel code to this person. 5 Corrective actions are: a. Re-program person with turn-off capability ( I or O level). b. Schedule is locked. b. Wait until inside of schedule. c. ATM interlock option has been selected. d. BA Group has 2-man rule. 1 Card is not 100% compatible with reader. c. Turn on other interlocked BA Group. d. BA Group must be turned off from operating panel. 1 Use cards that are specified for the particular reader being used. 2 Incorrect reader 2 Use readers specified earlier in this section. 1 Control unit PVF is not 1 Program PVF From Control as (Y) Yes. selected. 2 Time is inside of schedule. 2 Correct time, date, and/or schedule (Permanent or temporary)

104 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 10-24

105 S E C T I O N 1 1 History Log In This Section About the History Log Displaying and Printing the History Log Installing the Printer Interface Unit About the History Log The history log: Is used to log each event that is detected by the FOCUS CADET system. Stores up to 512 events, including the time and date of occurrence. Serves as a means of verifying events occurring in the system such as openings and closings, alarms, troubles, etc. May be displayed at an operating panel or printed on a local printer. You must install a printer interface unit if you want to use a local printer. Types of History Log Entries The types of events the FOCUS CADET system will enter into the history log include: Openings and closings of BA group(s), name and number of the group(s), and name of the person(s) involved. Changes to any schedule along with the name of the person(s) involved. Alarms and troubles, name of the point and point number, and restoral of the point. Bypass and unbypass of points, name of the point and point number, and name of the person(s) doing the bypass and unbypass. The name of the person commanding the printout of data. The results of BA sensor walk tests and other tests. Installing the Printer Interface Unit A ( ) Printer Interface Unit is required for interfacing a printer with the control unit. It comes with fixed baud rates for operation on the RS-485 bus (9600 baud) and for operation with the printer (1200 baud). The printers required for this system are either the ADEMCO printer, or the printer that is part of the ( ) Printer Kit. An 18' cable is supplied. Supervision of the Printer Interface Unit The printer is supervised as Unit # 0. The system will alert you if the connections are lost or if the printer runs out of paper. Physical Description of the Printer Interface Unit The printer interface unit consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a separately ordered housing unit. The following are important items on the board (see Figure 11-1): 11-1

106 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Part Terminal Strip TB1 Terminal Strip TB2 Printer Header J2 (RS232 Port) RS232 Printer LEDs Jumpers E2 through E9 Terminating jumper E1 RS-485 bus LEDs Tamper Purpose Used for making connections to the separately ordered 12VAC transformer (443241). Used for connecting to the RS-485 bus. Used for connecting the printer to the printer interface unit. Indicates the unit s communication status to the printer as follows: TXD LED - on steady when data is being transmitted to the printer. BUSY LED - on steady when the printer is busy. Used for setting the communication address on the RS-485 bus. Insert only if the printer interface unit is located at one end of the RS-485 bus. Indicates the unit s communication status to the control unit as follows: TXD LED - flashing when the printer interface unit is transmitting. RXD LED - flashing when the printer interface unit is receiving. Space is provided for adding a tamper switch, which must be ordered separately as a Tamper Kit. RS-485 USER BUS LEDs TXD (YEL) RXD (RED) RS-485 USER BUS LEDs CONNECTIONS (TB2) RS-232 PRINTER LEDs BUSY (RED) TXD (YEL) TXD RXD RS485 RS232 BUSY TXD TB2 USER BUS ADDRESS JUMPERS (SEE DETAIL A) E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 SHIELD GND V 2 COM 3 COM + 4 RS485 IN E1 SHIELD 12VAC INPUT (TB1) +12VAC TB1 2 1 (See Note 4) J RS232 OUT PRINTER HEADER RS232 (J2) JUMPER E1 (REMOVE JUMPER TO DISCONNECT TERMINATING RESISTOR) NOTES: UNIT NO. COMMUNICATION GROUP NO. 3 USER BUS ADDRESS JUMPERS E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 LSB (LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT) LSB (LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT) SHOWN PROGRAMMED FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP '2', UNIT '0' (E6 REMOVED) ON EACH ADDITIONAL PRINTER INTERFACE BEING USED, REMOVE E2, E3, E4 AND E6 (GROUP '2', UNIT '7') 1. RS-485 USER BUS LEDs: (A) TXD (YEL) FLASHES WHEN PRINTER INTERFACE IS TRANSMITTING. (B) RXD (RED) FLASHES WHEN PRINTER INTERFACE IS RECEIVING. 2. RS232 PRINTER LEDS: (A) RXD (RED) GOES ON WHEN PRINTER IS BUSY. (B) TXD (YEL) GOES ON WHEN DATA BEING TRANSMITTED TO PRINTER. 3. USER BUS JUMPERS SHOWN ADDRESSED FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP '2', UNIT '0'. 4. A TAMPER KIT MAY BE ORDERED SEPARATELY; CONSISTS OF TAMPER SWITCH PLUS MOUNTING HARDWARE. piubd-001-v1 Figure 11-1: Printer Interface Unit 11-2

107 Mounting and Wiring the Printer Interface Unit Section 11 History Log The printer interface unit must be installed in a separately ordered housing unit. It is powered locally by a separately ordered plug-in transformer rather than by the RS-485 bus. Step Action 1 Mount the printer interface unit in the separately ordered housing unit. 2 Connect the printer to the interface unit using the 18 cable supplied. 3 Connect the AC wires from the 12VAC transformer. You may plug the transformer into the 120VAC outlet, but do not plug in the transformer for the printer at this time. Plug that transformer in when the installation of the system is complete. Addressing the Printer Interface Unit The printer interface unit uses communication group number 02 on the RS-485 bus, and unit number 0. The printer interface unit comes pre-addressed for communication group number 2 and unit number 0, so normally no adjustment to the addressing is required. Displaying and Printing the History Log The FOCUS CADET system can display the history log on the screen of an operating panel or produce a hard-copy printout of events. The operating panel will display the last event that occurred, and, by means of selector buttons, you can scroll through the history log. The printer can be operated on-line or off-line. When the printer is operated on-line, events will be printed out as they occur. When operated off-line, printouts are made on command from an operating panel. A printout can be made of the most recent 60 events or the most recent 500 events, and will begin with the oldest event. The printout can be terminated at any time by selecting Stop Print. To display or print the history log, proceed through the following prompts: <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > Enter the Service Code. Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More twice. <? Enter choice: < Bypass History > < Status Time > < Previous More > <? See history: On this screen > On Printer > < Quit 09/28/98 11:06 AM PNT245 OUTPUT RST < Previous Pgdn > < Quit Next > Print history Last 60 events > Last 500 events > < Quit Stop Print > Action Menu #3 is displayed. Select History to display the next screen. This is the See History Screen. Select On this screen to display the history on the operating panel s screen. Select On Printer to print the history. Select Quit to move back to Action Menu #3. If On this screen was selected, this screen is displayed. The first line shows the date and time of the event. The second line shows a description of the event. Select Previous to display the previous event. Select Next to display the next event. Select Pgdn to display more detail of this event. Select Quit to move back to the See History Screen. If the On Printer was selected, this screen is displayed. Select either 60 or 500 events to print. Select Stop Print to stop the printing. Select Quit to move back to the See History Screen. 11-3

108 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Typical Printout of FOCUS CADET History Log 0042 JUL :21:47 PERSON #88 SER OFF DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :22:33 FIRE ALARM PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE CROSS 0042 JUL :22:48 HOLDUP ALM PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP CROSS 0042 JUL :22:53 CRIT ALARM PT54 POINT #54 SUPV CROSS 0042 JUL :22:53 CRIT ALARM PT25 POINT #25 SUPV CROSS 0042 JUL :23:50 FA SILENCE DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :25:39 PERSON #1 ACCESS DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :27:50 PERSON #1 ACCESS 2ND DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :27:50 PERSON #88 SERVICE ON DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :27:51 PERSON #88 ACCESS DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :46:01 AC RESTORE 0042 JUL :46:34 PERSON #99 HHHHHHHHHH DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :46:34 PERSON #99 ACCESS DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :46:47 PERSON #2 HHHHHHHHHH DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :46:47 PERSON #2 ACCESS DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :47:21 FA SILENCE DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :47:36 PERSON #1 HHHHHHHHHH DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :47:36 PERSON #1 ACCESS DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :56:04 PERSON #88 SERVICE ON DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :56:04 PERSON #88 ACCESS DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :53:28 PERSON #88 RESET DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :53:48 HOLDUP RST PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP 0042 JUL :53:49 CRITL RST PT25 POINT #25 SUPV 0042 JUL :54:08 FIRE RST PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE 0042 JUL :54:15 PERSON #88 RESET DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :55:03 BURGLAR TB PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD OPEN 0042 JUL :55:44 FIRE TBL PT64 POINT #64 FIRE OPEN 0042 JUL :56:15 BURGLAR RS PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD 0042 JUL :56:17 FIRE RST PT64 POINT #64 FIRE 0042 JUL :56:19 CRIT ALARM PT25 POINT #25 SUPV CROSS 0042 JUL :56:46 FIRE ALARM PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE CROSS 0042 JUL :57:22 FIRE RST PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE 0042 JUL :57:23 CRITL RST PT25 POINT #25 SUPV 0042 JUL :58:30 PERSON #88 RESET DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD 0042 JUL :59:10 EXPAND TBL DV1 POINT EXPANDER COMM FAIL 0042 JUL :59:10 BURGLAR TB PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD COMM FAIL 0042 JUL :59:10 FIRE TBL PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE COMM FAIL 0042 JUL :59:10 HOLDUP TBL PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP COMM FAIL History Log Alpha and Event Codes Description System Event System Reset Reset Memory AC Fail AC Restore AC Fail 4-Hour AC Fail 4-Hour Restore Telco Line Trouble (built-in dialer) Telco Line Trouble (built-in dialer) Telco Line Restore (built-in dialer) Alpha RESET RESET MEM AC FAIL AC RESTORE AC FAIL 4H AC 4H RST TEL T MCUT TEL T MCUT TEL R MCUT 11-4

109 Section 11 History Log Description System Event (continued) Telco Line Trouble (backup dialer) Telco Line Restore (backup dialer) Low Battery System Low Battery System Restore Battery Charger Fail Battery Charger Restore Change Date Interactive Keypad Tamper Expansion Module Interactive Keypad Trouble supervision Interactive Keypad Trouble Restore Cardreader Alarm Cardreader Trouble Cardreader Trouble Restore Point Gateway Tamper Alarm Point Gateway Trouble supervision Point Gateway Trouble Restore Printer Tamper Alarm Printer Trouble Supervision Printer Trouble Restore RF Low Battery DLL Aborted Start DLL DLL Interrupted End DLL Altered DLL Comm Fail End DLL Not Altered BA Burglary Alarm BA Burglary Point Bypass BA Burglary Alarm Restore BA Burglary Point Trouble BA Burglary Point Unbypass BA Auto Close Downloading Burglary Open/Close BA Auto Close with Bypass within Group BA Trouble Closing (closed with burglary alarm during exit) BA Bypass Closing within group BA Closing BA Auto Open BA Irregular Opening BA Opening BA No Close scheduled close time expired BA Exit Fail exit error (user) Alpha TEL T BCUT TEL R BCUT LOW BAT BATTERY RS CHARG FAIL CHARG RST CH DATE KEYPAD ALM KEYPAD TBL KEYPAD RST READER ALM READER TBL READER RST GATEWAY AL GATEWAY TB GATEWAY RS PRINTER AL PRINT TBL PRINT RST RF LOW BAT DLL ABORT START DLL DLL INTER END DLL AL DLL COMM F END DLL NA BURGLAR AL BA BYPASS BURGLAR RS BURGLAR TB BA UNBYP AUTO CLOSE AUTO CL BY TBL CLOSE BYP CLOSE CLOSING AUTO OPEN IRR OPEN OPENING NO CLOSE EXIT FAIL 11-5

110 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide BA Bypass Closing by User BA STAY (Local) Arming Fire Alarm Fire Trouble Fire Alarm Restore Fire Alarm Silence Fire Point Bypass Fire Alarm Point Unbypass Supervisory Alarm Supervisory Trouble Supervisory Restore Supervisory Point Bypass Supervisory Point Unbypass Waterflow Alarm Waterflow Bypass Waterflow Restore Waterflow Trouble Waterflow Unbypass Holdup Alarm Description Open/Close (continued) Fire Panic Holdup Point Trouble sensor trouble Holdup Restore Holdup Point Bypass Holdup Point Unbypass Hostage Alarm Duress Hostage Alarm Restore Medical Alarm Medical Alarm Restore Medical Trouble Medical Bypass Medical Unbypass Scheduling BA Change Close Time (extend closing) BA Change Open Time Change Close Time Change Auto-On Level Change Latest Close sent only if closing schedule is altered Change Open Time schedule change Change Time time/date reset Other Supervised Bell Alarm (remote bell) Supervised Bell Trouble (remote bell) Supervised Bell Trouble Restore (remote bell) Remote Power Supply Alarm Alpha BYPASS USR CLOSE STAY FIRE ALARM FIRE TBL FIRE RST FA SILENCE FA BYPASS FA UNBYP CRIT ALARM CRIT TBL CRITL RST CRIT BYP CRIT UNBYP WF ALARM WF BYPASS WF RST WF TBL WF UNBYP HOLDUP ALM HOLDUP TBL HOLDUP RST HU BYPASS HU UNBYP HHHHHHHHHH HOSTAGE RST MED ALARM MED RST MED TBL UT BYPASS U UNBYPASS CH CLOSE T CH OPEN TM CH CLOSE T CH AUTO ON CH LT CLOS CH OPEN TM CH TIME BELL ALARM BELL TBL BELL RST POWER ALM 11-6

111 Section 11 History Log Description Other (continued) Remote Power Supply Trouble Remote Power Supply Trouble Restore Keyswitch Alarm Keyswitch Trouble Keyswitch Restore Janitor Keyswitch Alarm Janitor Keyswitch Trouble Janitor Keyswitch Alarm Restore Janitor On Premises user on premises Janitor Off Premises user on premises restore ADT On-Premises ADT Off-Premises Tamper Alarm Tamper Restore Tamper Bypass Tamper Unbypass VVS Bypass VVS Unbypass (after 12 AM auto-off) Bypass by User Keypad Active Audible Walk-Test Change Code Change Early Open Change Holiday Carbon Monoxide Alarm Carbon Monoxide Bypass Carbon Monoxide Restore Carbon Monoxide Trouble Carbon Monoxide Unbypass Long Range Radio DC Fault DC Fault Restore Tamper Fault Tamper Fault Restore Low Battery Low Battery Restore VSR Fault (antenna) VSR Fault Restore (antenna) ECP Fault ECP Fault Restore Communication Fault Communication Fault Restore System Test Walk-Test Bell Test Holdup Test Alarm Holdup Test Restore Alpha POWER TBL POWER RST KEY ALARM KEY TBL KEY RST JANITOR AL JAN TBL JAN RST JANITOR ON JAN OFF SERVICE ON SER OFF TAMPER ALM TAMPER RST TMP BYPASS TMP UNBYP VVS BYPASS VVS UNBYP BYP USER ACCESS AUDIBLE TS CH CODE CH ER OPEN CH HOLIDAY CO ALARM CO BYPASS CO RST CO TBL CO UNBYP LR DC FLT LR DC RST LR TMP FLT LR TMP RST LR BAT FLT LR BAT RST LR VSR FLT LR VSR RST LR ECP FLT LR ECP RST LR COM FLT LR COM RST WALK TEST BELL TEST HU TEST AL HU TEST RS 11-7

112 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Description System Test (continued) Start Fire Alarm Test End Fire Alarm Test Start Burglary Alarm Test End Burglary Alarm Test Start Supervisory Test End Supervisory Test Start Holdup Alarm Test End Holdup Alarm Test Long Print Short Print Supervisory Test Print manual trigger test report Supervisory Test Restore Fire Alarm Test Print Fire Alarm Test Print Restore Burglary Alarm Test Print Burglary Alarm Test Print Restore Holdup Suspicion Print Keypad No Access Untyped Bypass Untyped Unbypass Burglary Alarm Diagnostics Fire Alarm Diagnostics Output Trouble Output Trouble Restore Point Trouble Point Alarm general alarm Point Alarm Restore general alarm restore Untyped Diagnostics Burglary Alarm Weak Battery Fire Alarm Weak Battery Holdup Alarm Weak Battery Supervisory Alarm Weak Battery Untyped Alarm Weak Battery Weak Battery Restore Access 2-Man 2 ND Person Keypad Lockout Cardreader Irregular Access Manual Pushbutton Access remote arm/disarm opening Access Denied Code Known access denied Access Denied Code Unknown access denied Dialer Test Dialer Test Report Dialer Test Report with System Trouble Present Alpha SRT FA TST END FA TST SRT BA TST END BA TST SRT SV TST END SV TST SRT HU TEST END HU TST LONG PRINT SHT PRINT CRIT TST A CRIT TST R FIRE TST A FIRE TST R BA TST AL BA TST RST SUSPICION NO ACCESS UT BYPASS U UNBYPASS BA WAN FA WAN OUTPUT TBL OUTPUT RST POINT TBL POINT ALM POINT RST UA WAN B WEAK BAT F WEAK BAT H WEAK BAT S WEAK BAT U WEAK BAT BAT RESTOR ACCESS 2ND KEYPD LOCK IRR ACCESS MAP ACCESS DENIED NA INVALID NA DLR TEST TBL TEST 11-8

113 S E C T I O N 1 2 Power Requirements In This Section About Powering the FOCUS CADET Providing Adequate Voltage for the SIM Loop, Each Gateway, and Operating Panel Determining the Control Unit Power Supply Load Determining the Size of the Standby Battery Installing a Power Supply Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the Control Unit Installing the Standby Battery Powering Up the Control Unit About Powering the FOCUS CADET The FOCUS CADET security system uses either an 18VAC, 50VA plug-in transformer ( or N8167) or an 18VAC, 72VA wired-in transformer (472404), which is hardwired into the premises electrical system. The 50VA transformer may be used in any installation except commercial fire installations. The 72VA transformer may be used in all installations including commercial fire installations. AC Transformer Alarm Current and Battery Size Limits The total alarm current available and the largest size battery that can be supported depends on which transformer is used, as specified in the table below. Transformer Total Alarm Current (*) Largest Battery (**) 50VA 1.5A 24AH 72VA 1.5A 34.4AH * Total current drawn from aux power 2 and bell 1 ** Largest battery that can be recharged within 48 hours While wiring connections are being made or removed, make sure the POWER switch (on control unit circuit board) is in the OFF position. We recommend wiring all points and expansion modules according to each section's instructions before powering up the system for programming and testing. Providing Adequate Voltage for the SIM Loop, Each Gateway, and Operating Panel To determine that each gateway and each operating panel will have adequate voltage, the voltage drops along the RS-485 bus must be calculated. Use the procedure below along with the tables and forms that follow to determine whether an additional power supply is needed. 12-1

114 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Calculating the Current Loads for the SIM Loop and Each Gateway Table 1: SIM Loop Standby and Alarm Loads (Maximum 64 Points) Device SIM Door Contact A B AxB C AxC Quantity Standby Current (ma) Total Standby Current (ma) Alarm Current (ma) 1 1 Total Alarm Current (ma) SIM PIR Motion SIM Dual Motion SIM Smoke Detector SIM Holdup Button SIM FA Pull Station SIM U 4209U 4208SNF Total Loads of SIM Sensors (Total alarm load must not exceed 128mA) Horn/Strobe Standby Alarm Sounder PA400W Powered Sensors Relay Total Standby and Alarm Loads on SIM Loop Standby Alarm SIM connected to external contact, powered sensor, self-powered sensor, output SIM, or horn/strobe 190mA for bell mode with strobe, 260mA for horn/strobe 12-2

115 Section 12 Power Requirements Table 2: RF Gateway, RF Receiver & LRR Gateway Standby and Alarm Loads Gateway Unit No. 7 (Max. 64 Points) Device A B AxB C AxC Quantity Standby Current (ma) Total Standby Current (ma) Alarm Current (ma) Total Alarm Current (ma) RF Gateway RF Receiver (maximum 2) LRR Gateway Total Gateway & Receiver Standby and Alarm Current Standby Alarm To calculate the standby and alarm loads for the SIM loop and each gateway, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Make a copy of each table. 2 Fill in Tables 1 and 2 to calculate the standby and alarm current loads for the SIM Loop and the RF Gateway. Use Table 1 for the SIM Loop and Table 2 for the RF Gateway. These totals will be used to determine the gateway trunk cable lengths and the size of the system s backup battery. Drawing Load Diagram for the RS-485 Bus Step Action 1 Using the Load Diagram shown in Figure 12-1 as an example, make a similar diagram showing each device (gateway, operating panel, etc.) along each RS-485 bus. 2 Estimate the cable distance in feet from the control unit to the first device on the bus, and also the distance between devices. Then, mark the distances on the Load Diagram. 3 Enter the total alarm load that each operating panel and gateway present to the RS-485 bus. Enter this data in the appropriate boxes that represent the operating panels (use 65mA for each) and gateways (total from the previous tables). 4 Record, on the Load Diagram, the current that will flow through each section of the RS- 485 bus using the following information: a. The current through the first section of the bus is the sum of all loads presented by the operating panels and gateways. b. The current through the second section is the sum of all loads (obtained in item (a) above) minus the load for the first gateway, operating panel, or other device on the bus. c. The current through the third section will be the sum of all loads minus the loads for the first and second devices on the bus. 12-3

116 12-4 Figure 12-1: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus CONTROL UNIT 10.2V l 1 = ma FT. V = (8.5V min.) RF GATEWAY BUS LOAD = ma GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = ma (TABLE 2) l 2 = ma OPERATING PANEL 1 FT. V = (8.5V min.) BUS LOAD = 65mA FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide NOTES: 1. TOTAL GATEWAY BUS LOAD = TABLE 2 2. l 1 = GATEWAY 1 BUS LOAD + OPERATING PANEL 1 BUS LOAD

117 Determining the Voltage Drops along the RS-485 Bus Section 12 Power Requirements The input voltage to any gateway or operating panel must be at least 8.5VDC or 9.7VDC. If the voltage is too low, either position the gateway or operating panel closer to the control unit or add a supplementary power supply. To determine the voltage drops along the RS-485 bus, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Use the graph in Figure 12-2 to determine the input voltage available to each gateway and operating panel. This graph shows distance in feet along the horizontal axis, and voltage drop across the bus along the vertical axis. Referring to the Load Diagram (you prepared), find the cable length of the first section of the RS-485 bus (distance in feet between the control unit and the electrically first device on the RS-485 bus). 2 Locate this distance on the horizontal axis of Figure Then, use a straight edge to project a line straight upward until it hits the diagonal current line that is equal to, or greater than, the total current alarm current load obtained in Step 4 previously. 3 Use the straight edge to project a horizontal line to the left until it hits the vertical Voltage Drop axis. Record the value of voltage that is indicated, rounding it off to the next higher number if necessary. This is the voltage drop across the first section of the bus. 4 Calculate the input voltage to the first device on the RS-485 bus by subtracting the voltage drop determined in the previous step from the supply voltage of 10.2 volts. For example, if the voltage drop is 0.3 volts, then the input voltage to the first device is 9.9 volts (10.2 volts minus 0.3 volts). 5 Repeat for each device on the bus. Use the input voltage to the previous device on the bus as the supply voltage in determining each subsequent voltage drop. 6 If you are using additional bus runs, repeat all the above steps for each bus run. Voltage Drop (volts) A.75A.50A.40A.30A.20A.15A.10A.05A Length of RS-485 Bus Section (feet) Figure 12-2: Determining the Voltage Drop on the RS-485 Bus 12-5

118 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Determining the Control Unit Power Supply Load Use the tables below to calculate the total current for the RS-485 bus, auxiliary relay (when set for wet operation), and the bell output. In each table, multiply each device's standby and/or alarm current by the number of units used. 1. In Table 3, enter devices used on the RS-485 bus. Calculate standby and alarm currents, then add to get the RS-485 bus current subtotal. Table 3: RS-485 BUS CURRENT LOAD Total Current Device Model # Device Current X # of Units = Standby Alarm RS-485 Bus Subtotal (terminals 19 & A max.) 2. In table 4, enter devices connected to Auxiliary Relay (if used for wet operation). Calculate standby and alarm currents, then add to get Auxiliary Relay current subtotal. Table 4: AUXILIARY RELAY CURRENT LOAD Total Current Device Model # Device Current X # of Units = Standby Alarm Auxiliary Relay Subtotal (terminal 10)1.5 amp max (If setup for wet operation) 12-6

119 Section 12 Power Requirements 3. In Table 5, enter devices connected to the bell output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get the bell output current subtotal. Table 5: BELL OUTPUT CURRENT LOAD Total Current Device Model # Device Current X # of Units = Standby Alarm XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Bell Output Subtotal (terminals 5 & 6) 1.5 amp max 4. In Table 6, enter total calculated subtotals of all listed outputs, then add to get the combined current. Table 6: TOTAL PERIPHERALS CURRENT LOAD Total Current Standby Alarm SIM Loop Subtotal (see Table 1) RS-485 Bus Subtotal (see Table 3) Auxiliary Output Subtotal (see Table 4) Bell Output Subtotal (see Table 5) Add all subtotals (Refer to Table 6 for current limits) 5. Compare the values calculated previously with the values from the table in AC Transformer Alarm Current and Battery Size Limits and Table 7. If the 50VA transformer limits are exceeded, then use a 72VA transformer. If the 72VA transformer limits are exceeded, then use a supplementary power supply to carry some of the current load. 12-7

120 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Table 7: TOTAL STANDBY CURRENT LIMITS Standby Time/Alarm Time Residential BA: 4 hours standby + 4 minutes alarm Mercantile BA: 4 hours standby + 15 minutes alarm Residential FA: 24 hours standby + 4 minutes alarm Local or Central Station Commercial FA: 24 hours standby + 5 minutes alarm Remote Station FA: 60 hours standby + 5 minutes alarm Bank Safe and Vault BA: 72 hours standby + 15 minutes alarm Total Standby Current 50VA with 24AH Battery Total Standby Current 72VA with 34.4AH Battery 1.0A 1.0A 1.0A 1.0A 605mA 1.0A Not Applicable 1.0A Not Applicable Not Applicable 218mA 132mA 6. After deciding which devices will be carried by the supplementary power supply, if used, revise Tables 3 through 6 to reflect the total control unit peripheral standby and alarm currents. Determining the Size of the Standby Battery The standby battery must be capable of powering the various sensors and sounding devices, as well as the control unit and its internal accessories, for predetermined periods of time. Use the following worksheets to calculate the required size of the standby battery. Battery Current Calculation Worksheet The values in Table 8 are fixed. Use these values in Table 9 to calculate the total battery currents. Table 8: FOCUS CADET PCB CURRENT CIRCUIT BOARD CURRENT Total Current Standby Alarm Includes 2-wire smoke detector loading on points 1 & 2 300mA 440mA *472402A Backup Dialer Module 5mA (inactive) 15mA (active) *472402A actually draws 55mA when active. However, because FOCUS CADET PCB current includes the built-in main dialer, and because the main dialer is inactive when A is active, A imposes only 15mA added current on the FOCUS CADET power supply. 12-8

121 Section 12 Power Requirements In Table 9, enter the calculated combined current, then add to calculate total battery current. Table 9: TOTAL BATTERY CURRENT Total Battery Current Total Current Standby Alarm Combined RS-485 bus, aux. relay and bell totals (see Table 6) Total PCB current (see Table 8) Total battery current (add RS-485 bus/aux.relay/bell totals and PCB totals) Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet Using the total calculated in Table 9, calculate the battery capacity required for the installation. Capacity Standby Capacity Alarm Capacity Formula For 4-hour standby time: Total standby current X 4 hours X 1.4 contingency factor. For 24-, 60-, or 72-hour standby time: Total standby current X (24 hours) X 1.1 contingency factor. (60 hours) (72 hours) For 4-, 5-, or 15-minute alarm time Total alarm current X (4 minutes) hours (5 minutes) hours (15 minutes) Calculated Value Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities Battery Selection Table From the following table, select one of the standard-size batteries that has a capacity greater than or equal to the capacity calculated in the previous worksheet. All the batteries in this table will fit inside the FOCUS CADET enclosure. 7AH 12AH 14AH 17.2AH 24AH 28AH 34.4AH Yuasa NP12-7 Yuasa NP12-12 Yuasa NP7-12 (connect 2 in parallel) Yuasa NPG18-12 Yuasa NP12-12 (connect 2 in parallel) Yuasa NP7-12 (connect 4 in parallel) Yuasa NPG18-12 (connect 2 in parallel) 12-9

122 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Determining the AC Fail Setting The AC Fail setting is the delay time the system waits before transmitting the AC Fail message to the CCC. The setting is based on the total standby current load on the system and the size of the battery connected to the system. The AC Fail setting is required for Commercial Fire applications. To calculate the AC Fail setting, use the following formula: The size of the battery connected to the system (Ampere Hours) divided by the total standby current (in Amps from Table 9) X 0.65 contingency factor. Round the result to the nearest whole number. For example, if the size of the battery is 12AH and the total standby current is Amps, (12 / 0.615) X 0.65 = Rounded off to the nearest whole number is 13 hours. Program that value in AC Loss Xmit Delay via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Installing a Power Supply If you have determined that the control unit's power supply will not handle the current draw or that the voltage drops along the RS-485 bus are too large, then add Power Supply Module. The supplementary power supply can be added to any section of the RS-485 bus by connecting it directly to the bus or connecting it via a gateway. The power supply and standby batteries are housed in a Power Unit Housing along with a supervisory SIM. The power supply receives 16VAC from an input transformer. Leave the communication wires (yellow and blue) and the power common ground wire (black) connected to the bus terminals of the gateway and continue on to the next device on the cable run (if necessary). To install the power supply, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Cut the + 12V (red) wire of the incoming RS-485 bus, and insulate the end of this wire so it will not short to any other component in the system. 2 Connect the + 12V output of the power supply to Terminals 1 (common ground) and 2 (+ 12V) of the gateway and continue it on to the next device on the RS-485 bus (if necessary). Note: Terminal 1 will serve to connect the two incoming common ground wires (one from the incoming bus and one from the power supply) and will serve as an outgoing common ground wire. 3 Connect the supervisory contacts of the power supply to the monitoring terminals of a SIM to provide supervision of the + 12V power. Note: The power supply will provide power to the remaining section of the quad trunk and also float-charge its standby battery. 4 Assemble the power supply according to the instructions accompanying the power supply. Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the Control Unit Make sure POWER switch (on control unit circuit board) is in the OFF position before connecting AC power to terminals 1 and 2. Make sure the circuit breaker that controls the circuit providing power to the control unit is in the OFF position. The 120VAC circuit that the transformer is connected to should be dedicated to powering the control unit, should provide power continuously for 24 hours, and should not be controlled by a wall switch. Any inadvertent shorting of the secondary leads of the 50VA transformer will cause a fusible link in the secondary winding to open, and render the transformer useless

123 Connecting the Transformer Section 12 Power Requirements To connect the transformer to the control unit, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Make sure the power switch on the control unit is in the OFF position. 2 Identify the circuit breaker or fuse that controls the branch circuit, furnishing power to the control unit. Make sure it is in the OFF position. Use a (2667) AC Power Switch Shielding Kit to protect the circuit breaker switch from inadvertent operation. Where fuses are used, mark the fuse label to indicate that it must not be removed except for replacement purposes. 3 If you are using the wired-in transformer, mount its enclosure to the wall near the control unit, using the 4 mounting holes on the enclosure's rear surface. 4 Run 120VAC wire from the circuit breaker or fuse to the enclosure in conduit. Use wire having insulation rated for at least 90 C operation. Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to the transformer's white and black primary leads. 5 Run 16 AWG wire from the transformer's location to the control unit. Use wire that has insulation rated for at least 90 C operation and that is suitable for non-power-limited applications. 6 Route the wire through a knockout on the left-hand side of the control unit's enclosure. Tie wrap it to a tie-wrap loop near the knockout to separate it from other power-limited wiring. 7 Connect the wires to the transformer's blue secondary leads, using wire nuts. Connect the other end of the wire run to the control unit's AC terminals 1 and 2. 8 If you are using the plug-in transformer, run 16 AWG wire from the transformer's location to the control unit. 9 Connect the wire to the transformer and to the control unit's AC terminals 1 and 2. Connecting the Control Unit to Earth Ground To connect the system to earth ground, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 If you are using the wired-in transformer, connect the earth ground post inside the transformer enclosure to a good earth ground (use grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code). 2 Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire to the ground post. The earth ground wire should be the only wire under this nut. 3 Run 16AWG wire from this post to the control unit s earth ground terminal (3 or 4). Use a second green nut (supplied) to secure this wire to the ground post. This method of connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the Transformer and panel are connected to different earth ground systems. 4 If you are using the plug-in transformer, run 16AWG wire from the control unit s earth ground terminal (3 or 4) to a good earth ground (use grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code). The control unit requires the earth ground connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth ground supervision to function properly

124 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Programming for Earth Ground Fault For information about programming earth ground fault, refer to Programming the Point Data in the Programming section. Earth ground is point 245. If you desire to supervise the earth ground connection, program point 245 with the following values: Point Description Input Point Type Gateway # Hard ID 245 EARTH GND SPV Installing the Standby Battery The FOCUS CADET is shipped with a dual-battery harness that allows one or two batteries to be connected to the control unit. The control unit cabinet can house up to 34.4AH batteries. The optional ( ) Battery Enclosure may be used to house the batteries, if desired. Be sure to mark all batteries with the date of installation. When connecting batteries in parallel, observe the following guidelines: Use batteries from the same manufacturer and with the same voltage and capacity rating. Use batteries with approximately the same age and state of charge. Use the cables provided and observe polarity. Replace all batteries at the same time, even if only one battery has become weak. Installing the Batteries in the Control Unit Cabinet If you are installing one or two batteries, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Make sure that the power is off. 2 Mark batteries with the date of installation. 3 Make connections as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram. Installing the Batteries in the Battery Enclosure If you are installing the batteries in the Battery Enclosure, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Make sure that the power is off. 2 Connect the knockouts between the control unit and the battery enclosure using the furnished nipple. 3 Remove the 4A fuse from the in-line fuse holder in the battery enclosure. 4 Mark the batteries with the date of installation. 5 Install the batteries, connect to the battery enclosure, and make all wiring connections. 6 Replace the 4A fuse in the in-line holder. Battery Supervision The FOCUS CADET System provides three supervisory functions associated with the control unit battery: Process alarms with low battery option. Integral battery cutoff relay. Supervision of the battery leads. Process Alarms with Low Battery Option is a battery check made under load in each of three instances: Every 4 hours. When any BA group is turned off. Any time that an AC fail condition occurs

125 Section 12 Power Requirements The check consists of reducing the battery float charging voltage to cause the battery to power the load for 1 minute. If, during this time, the battery drops below approximately 12.0 volts: A low-battery signal is sent to the CCC and a low-battery message is shown at the operating panels. Ordinarily, system operation ceases at this time and there is no further signaling to the CCC. However, if this option is selected, it allows the control unit to continue processing and sending signals until the battery voltage drops to the point where the battery cut-off relay operates (next item), thereby extending normal operation for several hours, depending on the size of the battery. The low-battery condition is stored in control unit memory for subsequent printout along with the time and date. When AC power is restored (battery voltage rises above approximately 12.3 volts), a battery restore signal is transmitted to the CCC. NOTE: Normally the system cannot be turned on if a Low Battery condition is present. There is an option to enable turning on the system (arming) with a Low Battery condition present. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Also, be sure to enable the system to process alarms with a low battery present, if desired, via the downloader. There is a built-in battery cut-off relay that serves to protect the battery against deep discharge. If the voltage drops to approximately 9.8 volts, the relay disconnects the battery from its load to prevent deep discharge of the battery. At this point, all processing and transmission of signals cease. There is an automatic check for the connection of the battery leads, which is required by FM and with the latest revision of NFPA 72. The check involves momentarily turning off the battery charge voltage and measuring the voltage where the leads are connected to the circuit board. If the check shows that the battery is missing for 45 seconds, the operating panel will display: <? NOTE: System has battery trouble Continue > Also, a battery-lead-disconnect signal is transmitted to the CCC. A battery restore signal is transmitted when the leads are reconnected. Battery Charger Supervision The system checks the battery charger every 200 seconds (Battery Charger Fail Test). If the system detects a charger fault, a signal is sent the CCC and a trouble message is displayed at the operating panels. NOTE: The system can be programmed to disable the Battery Charger Fail Test. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. The Battery Charger Fail Test must be enabled for FM installations. Powering Up the Control Unit After all the wiring procedures have been completed, and you are ready to power up the control unit, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Turn the power switch on the control unit to the ON position. 2 Verify that the AC transformer is providing the correct voltage by measuring across terminals 1 and 2 ( VAC when power line is VAC). 3 Verify that the battery float charging voltage is correct by measuring across the battery terminals ( VDC with no battery or fully charged battery connected). 4 Verify that the operating panels are showing the correct display and can accept key entries

126 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 12-14

127 S E C T I O N 1 3 Input and Output Point Types In This Section About the Input and Output Point Types Output Point Types Input Point Types About the Input and Output Point Types Input Point Types A protection point can be assigned to either an input type or an output type (the eight built-in hardwired points can only be assigned an input type). This assignment defines how the control unit will process normal and off-normal conditions associated with a point. At the end of this section is a chart that lists the input and output point types and their associated options. The table below assumes the use of a sensor with transfer contacts. If you are using a sensor with normally-closed contacts, operation is essentially the same, except as explained later under the Input Point Options heading. Also, a tamper condition or communication failure at a BA point is always interpreted as a trouble during Day Set and as an alarm during Nite Set. The built-in hardwire points (1-8) may only be programmed with an input point type. The following table lists the program entry and explanation of the function of the input type points and the options associated with each type. At the end of this list you will find an explanation of each of the options. Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt. 3 1 (FI) Fixed (permanent) Assigned to points where alarms and troubles are to be monitored by the control unit at all times, regardless of the Day/Nite-Set status of the system. During Day Set, a cross or open is processed as a trouble condition. During Nite Set, any off-normal condition is processed as an alarm. The alarm or trouble condition is transmitted to the CCC and causes local annunciation. Examples of sensors used are glassbreak detectors, foil, and lacing. 24-Hour Alarm NC Contact Self Test 2 (MI) Movable Instant Assigned to points where alarms are processed only during the Nite-Set period, such as door contacts and infrared and photoelectric sensors. During Day Set, an open (if you are using transfer contacts) is processed as a trouble condition and is annunciated locally and transmitted to the CCC. During Nite Set, a cross or open will result in an alarm signal to the CCC. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test 13-1

128 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt. 3 3 (MD) Movable Delayed Assigned to points where sensors are installed in the entry/exit path to allow the customer time to enter or exit the premises without creating an alarm. A programmable entry/exit delay time is provided, during which the control unit does not acknowledge an alarm condition from a movable delayed sensor in the entry/exit path. The point does not produce an alarm if proper entry and exit procedures are followed; only the operating panel sounder does annunciate the delay. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test UL Entry delay must not exceed 45 seconds for all UL certified installations. Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt. 3 4 (FL) Fixed Local This point assignment locally annunciates an alarm in Day or Nite Set, but no CCC transmission of an alarm condition is sent at any time. However, a trouble condition initiates a trouble signal to the CCC during Day Set, and an alarm transmission during Nite Set. NOTE: With option 2 set, only alarm conditions are produced (no troubles). NOTE: Alarm messages are sent to the pager, if used. NC Contact Self-Test 5 (MID) Movable Instant Daytime Annunciation This point assignment causes local annunciation of an alarm in Day Set (no CCC transmission). During Nite Set, the instant daytime annunciation protection reacts the same as movable instant protection. Example of application: local annunciation of emergency exit door without initiation of a CCC transmission during Day Set. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test 6 (VVS) Vault Vibration Sensor Points assigned to the vault vibration sensor category operates as BA movable instant protection points, but follows the on/off status of BA1. When BA1 is off, the VVS points in BA2 through BA4 are bypassed and remain so until BA1 is closed. If manually bypassed from an operating panel (bypass option has been selected and Bypass, VVS has been entered at operating panel), all VVS sensors in all BA groups become bypassed. They remain in this condition until: 1 The VVS bypass condition is manually restored to normal at the operating panel. 2 Either the latest scheduled close time is reached or midnight is reached, whichever occurs sooner. Turning the protection On or Off for a given BA group will not remove the manual VVS bypass. The purpose of this point designation is to avoid the possibility of false alarms during the open period of a bank due to vibration and noise created by nearby construction, traffic conditions, etc. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test 13-2

129 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt. 3 6 (VVS) (continued) Vault Vibration Sensor The vault(s) involved are not completely unprotected because the vault door contacts and other vault protective devices are in-circuit as long as the associated BA group is turned on. Note: If this type of bypass control is unsatisfactory, then points with vault vibration sensors should be programmed as movable instant points, in which case they follow the status of the assigned BA group rather than the status of BA1. 7 (MIC) Movable Instant Chime This point type is the same as movable instant, except that during Day Set an open causes a trouble condition (the sounder on the operating panel annunciates continuously) and a short causes the sounder on all operating panels to activate for 1 second. Bypassing the point disables the annunciation. With option 2 set, an open or short causes the chime. A typical assignment is a premises front door that annunciates each time the front door is opened. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test 8 (MDC) Movable Delayed Chime This type is similar to the movable instant chime, but it is used for a point in the entrance/exit path. Janitor NC Contact Self-Test 9 (FA) Fire Alarm The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is annunciated locally and a signal is sent to the CCC. Note: Where a Style D (Class-A) loop is required use points 3 and 4. Smoke Detector Reset Self-Test The system can be programmed for fire with verification. An initial short on the point causes an 8-second smoke detector power reset. A subsequent short on the point within 30 seconds of the reset causes a fire alarm. When this option is enabled ALL fire points in the system will perform the verification. This option can only be enabled via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (HUS) Holdup Special The point type functions the same as a basic holdup, except that a trouble signal is generated instead of an alarm if a holdup device is operated while all BA groups, other than BA1, are in Nite Set. The status of BA1 has no effect on this point type. This type is used to inhibit an alarm caused by the accidental operation of a holdup device by personnel, such as a cleaning crew, during the closed period. Suspicion NC Contact Latch 11 (HU) Holdup The point type is monitored for cross at all times, permitting the use of devices with normally open contacts. If the option for normally closed contacts is selected, then break-only contacts may be used. Operation of the holdup device results in a Holdup Alarm, except upon the occurrence of an open when the holdup suspicion option is selected. Suspicion NC Contact Latch 12 (MED) Medical This point type is used for devices that trigger medical emergency situations. The point is monitored on a 24- hour basis for an alarm or trouble condition. NC Contact Self-Test 13-3

130 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (SPV) Supervisory This point type is used for critical condition monitoring (to supervise sprinkler system valve switches, air temperature in a laboratory-controlled environment, etc.). The point is monitored on a 24- hour basis for an alarm or trouble condition. NC Contact Self-Test 28 (JAN) Janitor Keyswitch This point type is used for controlling the bypassing of those BA points that have been optionally selected as janitor points, and requires the connection of a ( ) Janitor Keyswitch, via a Switch Interface Module. Operating the Janitor Keyswitch during the Nite Set period causes the bypassing action, thereby permitting cleaning personnel to move about and trip movable protection devices without creating an alarm. It also causes a Janitor On Premises signal to be sent to the CCC. Restoring the keyswitch removes the bypass and causes a Janitor Off Premises signal to be sent to the CCC. Note: This point must be assigned to the same BA group having the entry/exit path so the Janitor Keyswitch may be accessed. When the janitor turns the key, in addition to the bypass action, it aborts the entry delay for the assigned BA group. When the key is removed, it starts the exit delay as well as removes the shunting action. LED (Y/N) Buzzer (Y/N) 29 (KEY) BA Keyswitch This point type is used for turning a BA group to Day Set or Nite Set rather than using an operating panel. It requires the connection of a ( ) Remote Keyswitch via a Switch Interface Module SCN Operating the keyswitch causes an open or close signal along with the number of the BA group to be sent to the CCC. LED (Y/N) Buzzer (Y/N) 30 (RPS) Remote Power Supply This point type is used for monitoring a remote power supply (e.g., Power Unit). A loss of AC power to the power supply is annunciated locally at an operating panel. If the loss of AC extends beyond 4 hours, it causes an AC Fail signal to be transmitted to the CCC. However, a low-battery condition, operation of a tamper, or a point comm fail causes a local trouble annunciation and immediate transmission of a signal to the CCC. 32 (BLK) BA Blocklock This point type is intended for use in European applications and requires the use of a Switch Interface Module. A special door lock (Blockschloss) should be installed to prevent the locking of the exit door if the applicable BA group is not ready to be turned to Nite set. When the exit door is locked, the BA group is automatically changed to Nite Set. An open causes a trouble condition. When the loop is normal, the applicable BA group is in Nite Set. The Ready outputs of the Switch Interface Module are wired to the internal solenoid of the lock, which allows the door to be locked if the BA group is ready to be turned to Nite Set. The customer keyswitch requires a continuous closure for this application. 13-4

131 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (ABS) Ambush Start This point type is used in conjunction with an Ambush End point type (next item) to initiate an ambush alarm. Failure to operate the Ambush End point within 4 minutes after tripping the Ambush Start point causes an ambush alarm. An example of ambush point application is a bank that does not use perimeter or interior protection (except for the vault) because cleaning people come in at unpredictable times. Someone enters the bank early to perform pre-opening procedures, and wants protection against being held hostage by hide-ins until opening time for the vault. Upon arriving they trigger the Ambush Start point, look around, and then trigger the Ambush End point if everything is OK. Typically, the contact for this point is installed on the door used for entering the premises in the morning. If there are detectors that can be tripped when the customer checks for hide-ins, then the BA group with these detectors must be turned to Day Set before the entry delay expires to avoid creating an alarm. The Ambush Start and End points are not assigned to a BA group and are not associated with the permanent or temporary schedules. The Ambush Start and End points use an Ambush Schedule to determine the time frame that this feature is active. 36 (ABE) Ambush End This point type is used in conjunction with an Ambush Start point type (see the explanation in previous item) to prevent an ambush alarm. Failure to operate the Ambush End point within 4 minutes after tripping the Ambush Start point causes an ambush alarm. Typically, a key-operated switch is employed for this point, and is installed in the last room to be checked after entering the premises. 49 (WF) Waterflow The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is annunciated locally and a signal is sent to the CCC. An open is processed as a trouble condition. A short is processed as an alarm condition. If it present longer than the Waterflow Retard Time. NOTE: The Waterflow Retard Time range is 0 to 240 seconds. This delay must be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. NOTE: Assign Waterflow points to BA group 1 only NC Contact UL The maximum Waterflow Retard Time is 90 seconds for UL installations. 13-5

132 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (MAP) Manual Access Pushbutton 64 (EXP) Exit Pushbutton This point type is associated with access control. It is employed when a receptionist (or security guard) uses an RPX-264 Pushbutton to buzz someone through an access-controlled door. The buzz-in duration is determined by the unlock time that has been programmed for the door strike. The pushbutton can be installed in a remote location. If the buzz-in is done from a remote location, a telephone or intercom can be used for conversation with the person who wants to enter. Pressing the pushbutton causes the control unit to signal the ACIU to activate the door strike. Multiple MAP points can each be used for the buzz-in capability so that people in different areas can buzz someone through a common door. This point type is associated with access control. It uses an RPX-264 Pushbutton, installed inside of the access-controlled area, to establish a 1-minute exiting time window for the last person leaving. This allows the person time to open the door, exit, and use a coded key at a Keylok to lock the door, thereby automatically turning on the BA groups. The pushbutton is ordinarily connected to a SIM. However, for retrofits, the pushbutton can also be connected to a Switch Interface Module. When someone with a Janitor privilege uses the pushbutton for exiting, then closes the door and uses the coded key to lock the Keylok, the shunt is removed from all Janitor points that were alarm shunted. Also, a Janitor Off Premises signal is sent to the CCC. The LED annunciates the exit delay. See the following tables for the status indications when a person with or without Janitor privilege enters and exits. Log NC Contact NC Contact SIM SIM Person Without Janitor Privilege User Action Person leaving presses pushbutton. Person exits, closes the door, and uses the coded key/card. Person exits, closes the door, but forgets to use the coded key/card. BA Groups LED Status Result Status Off Off Indicates BA groups are Off. Normal Begins flashing (1-sec On/1-sec Off). 1-minute window starts. Not Ready Off 1-minute window does not start. Normal On Steady Indicates BA group(s) are On and door can now be locked. Not Ready Off BA group(s) will not turn On. (Where Keylok is involved, person will not be able to turn key to lock the door.) Normal Goes Off at the end of 1-minute window. Indicates BA groups are Off. 13-6

133 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Person With Janitor Privilege User Action BA Groups Status LED Status Result On On Indicates BA groups are On. Entry Janitor uses the coded key/card and unlocks the door. Normal Slow flashing (1-sec On/2-sec Off). Indicates Janitor points in all BA groups have become alarm shunted. Exit Janitor exits and presses the pushbutton. Normal Changes from slow to fast flashing (1-sec On/1-sec Off). 1-minute window starts. Janitor exits and presses the pushbutton, closes the door, uses the coded key/card (or Janitor Keyswitch). Not Ready Remains slow flashing. Indicates BA groups are not normal. Normal Changes to On steady. Indicates alarm shunt has been removed from each Janitor point in system and BA groups are On. Note: The door must be closed and locked before using the passcode/keycode. Janitor closes the door, but forgets to use the coded key/card (or Janitor Keyswitch). Normal At end of 1-minute window goes to a slow flashing condition. Indicates BA groups are On, but Janitor points in each group are still alarm shunted. Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (ARM) Arming This is a special-purpose point type, reserved for 5800 Series wireless transmitters, which turns on the BA group when the point is activated. 66 (DAR) Disarm This is a special-purpose point type, reserved for 5800 Series wireless transmitters, which turns off the BA group when the point is activated. 67 (NAR) No Alarm Response 69 (CO) Carbon Monoxide 70 (MIS) Movable Instant Stay This point type is used to trigger an output point (relay), but without triggering an alarm condition (e.g., for lobby access door). The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is annunciated locally and a signal is sent to the CCC. NOTE: Assign Carbon Monoxide points to BA group 1 only. Assigned to points where alarms are processed only during the Nite-Set period, such as door contacts and infrared and photoelectric sensors. During Day Set, an open (if you are using transfer contacts) is processed as a trouble condition and is annunciated locally and transmitted to the CCC. During Stay (Local) mode, a cross or open results in a local alarm that is annunciated locally, but there is no transmission to the CCC. During Nite Set, a cross or open will result in an alarm signal to the CCC. NOTE: During STAY mode, alarm messages are sent to the pager, if used. Janitor Janitor NC Contact NC Contact NC Contact NC Contact NC Contact SIM Self-Test Self-Test 13-7

134 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (MIP) Movable Instant PIR 72 (MDS) Movable Delayed Stay This point type is automatically bypassed when the system is armed in Stay (Local) mode and option 2 is set. If option 2 is not set and the system is armed in STAY mode, an open causes a trouble and a short is ignored (bypassed). During Nite Set, a cross or open will result in an alarm signal to the CCC. Assigned to points where sensors are installed in the entry/exit path to allow the customer time to enter or exit the premises without creating an alarm. During Stay (Local) mode, a cross or open will result in a local alarm that is annuciated locally, but there is no transmission to the CCC. During the programmable entry/exit delay time the control unit does not produce an alarm condition from a movable delayed stay sensor in the entry/exit path. The point does not produce an alarm if proper entry and exit procedures are followed; only the operating panel sounder does annunciate the delay. NOTE: During STAY mode, alarm messages are sent to the pager, if used. Janitor Janitor NC Contact NC Contact Self-Test Self-Test If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm, an operating panel addressed to 0 on Communication Group 0 allows access to the menu prompts whenever the button on the transmitter is pressed. Therefore, to ensure that unauthorized personnel will not have access to the operating panel, position it in a secure area. If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm, the point must be linked to a user. Otherwise, the system shows the arm/disarm prompts when the button is pressed, but the system will not change state. Input Point Options For burglar alarm applications, the input point type assigned to a point determines how the control unit will interpret normal and off-normal conditions during Day Set (system disarmed) and Nite Set (system armed). The following options apply for input point types: Options for All Function Types BA Group Assignment Bypass The number of the BA group that the point will be assigned to. Whether bypassing will be permitted by persons with an ID code having a bypassing privilege. Point Link Select which point, if any the point is linked to. Option 1 Janitor Smoke Power Reset Holdup Suspicion Function Select whether the point automatically becomes alarm shunted during Nite Set if a Janitor Keyswitch is operated. Enabling this option causes the system to remove power from the smoke detector for 6 seconds when a Reset Alarm command is entered at an operating panel. If you are using the holdup suspicion option, a separate device with normallyclosed contacts can be installed in the holdup loop to open the loop to trigger a Holdup Suspicion output point (SIM), thereby actuating a camera for a few seconds without initiating a holdup alarm. If the suspicious switch is held open for more than 1 minute, a trouble signal is initiated. A latch option (option 3) is available that permits the use of a device with momentary contacts to initiate the alarm. 13-8

135 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Option 1 Log 24-Hour Alarm Function Whether an access control occurrence will be logged in the system s history log. Selecting this option enables the point to cause an alarm even when the system is turned off (Day set). Option 2 Normally Closed Contact LED Function Whether a sensor with a normally-closed contact is being used. An open in the wiring of a hardwired point or the SIM loop will be ignored during Day Set, but interpreted as an alarm during Nite Set. NOTE: If a point type normally produces a trouble during the Day Set, that condition will not be ignored. For ALL BA RF points, this option must be set for YES. This is used exclusively for the Janitor or BA keyswitch. If the SIM device is connected to the LED, enable this option. Option 3 Self-Test Latch SIM Buzzer Function Whether self-testing will be used. This pertains to sensors with a built-in SIM with self-test capability. Selecting the bell and display test at the operating panel causes a 30-second + 12V signal to be sent to the sensor with this option. In response, the sensor performs a self-test. The results can be viewed on the operating panel screen (History). Selecting this option is a trade-off for the ability to load shed and also for resetting a latching sensor that requires the removal of power to reset. Whether a latching or momentary contact is used on the loop to initiate an alarm. Whether the pushbutton will be connected to a SIM. In that case, the LED goes on when the pushbutton is pressed and remains on for the duration of the unlock time. It also goes on whenever a card/key is used to gain access at this door. This is used exclusively for the Janitor or BA keyswitch. If the SIM device is connected to the buzzer, enable this option. Output Point Types An output point type is used when controlling an output device (e.g., bell). There are 18 different types of output points. Typically, a SIM (+ 12V output) can be assigned these point types, except where noted otherwise. SIM output points are supervised. The following table indicates the programming entry required along with an explanation of how the output point functions. Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (CSC) Central Station Output turns on or off upon a command signal from the CCC. Note: The command can only be issued using AC communication. Complement 15 (SMC) Service Output turns on the first time a valid service ID code is entered at an operating panel (ADT on-premises), and turns off when an ADT off- premises signal is initiated by selecting RESET~ ADT OFF at the operating panel. Complement Comm Fail 13-9

136 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (TFC) Telco Fault Output turns on if a telco fault condition occurs (low voltage or current, or loss of interrogation on AC telco line). The output turns off when the telco line becomes normal. 17 (SCC) BA Schedule Output turns on at the start of the scheduled open period for a designated BA group, and turns off when the close schedule starts. Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail 18 (LTC) BA Lights Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected BA group is turned off, or the entry/exit delay period is activated. The output turns off when the protection of a BA group is turned on. Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output turns on whenever any key is pressed on the operating panel. Complement Remain On Comm Fail 19 (FXC) BA Fixed Output turns on when any BA Fixed or Fixed Local type point goes into alarm or, during Day Set, an Instant Daytime Annunciation type point goes into alarm. Output turns off when a valid ID code is entered at any operating panel. 20 (OFC) BA Off Output turns on when the protection of a selected BA group is turned off, and turns off when the protection is turned on. 21 (FAC) Fire Output turns on and latches when any fire type point in the system goes into alarm. The output turns off when the alarm condition has been cleared and the fire alarm is reset. 22 (SPC) Supervisory Output turns on if any supervisory type point goes into alarm, and turns off when the point restores. 23 (HUC) Holdup Output turns on if: A holdup type point goes into alarm and turns off when the holdup device is manually reset. The ambush feature is activated and turns off when the operating panel times out. A duress signal is initiated at any operating panel and turns off when the operating panel times out. 24 (HSC) Holdup Suspicion Output turns on when a Holdup type point or a Holdup Special type point in which the Suspicion option has been selected goes into alarm. The output, which can be used to control a holdup and suspicion camera, turns off when the point restores. Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail Complement Silence Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail 13-10

137 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (RSC) BA Remote Sonalert 26 (TSC) BA Bell and Vault Sensor Test 33 (STC) System Trouble Output turns on to operate Sonalert(s) during any of the following periods: Output follows the steady keypad audible pattern during the pre-alarm entry delay of the selected BA group, and operates the 2-seconds-On, 2- seconds-off pattern during the exit delay. During the holdup test (regardless of the BA group involved), output operates the 2-seconds- On, 2-seconds-Off pattern while the point being tested is normal, and turns on steady when the point is in alarm. When the point is restored to normal, the output reverts to the 2-seconds-On, 2- seconds-off operation until the test is ended. Output turns on for 2 seconds, once each minute, during the programmed closing reminder time of the selected BA group, and turns on steady during the close warning period. Output turns on for 30 seconds when a test of the local bell and/or vault sensors is commanded from the operating panel. When used in conjunction with the testing of vault sensors, the output can be used to turn on the test signal transmitter of a vault vibration sensor system, and/or to turn on the test sounder of a vault audio system. Output turns on for any of the following conditions and remains on until the condition is cleared: A point has been installed, but the point has not been entered into the control unit database. A comm fail has occurred for a point, an operating panel, or a printer interface unit. A trouble condition has been detected at a Holdup point, a keyswitch interface, a Remote Bell point, an Ambush Start or End point, or a Remote Power Supply point. A trouble condition has occurred at a Janitor Keyswitch point. A trouble condition occurs on an FA point. 34 (PLC) Point Link Output follows the status of a designated input point, or the output of a designated Point Link output point. 37 (ACC) BA Access Output turns on for 10 seconds when: A valid ID code is entered at the operating panel during the Day Set condition of the associated BA group. The BA group is turned to Day Set. A typical application is having the output control a doorstrike release mechanism, permitting access to a controlled area. Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail Complement Complement Off Normal Output Link Comm Fail Active When Turned On Complement Comm Fail 13-11

138 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt (HST) Horn/Strobe (SIM Gateway only). For use with a horn/strobe that will operate for an FA alarm and, optionally, also for a BA alarm, as follows: For an FA alarm, strobe flashes continuously and horn operates for an ongoing series of five 1- second rings followed by a 5-second pause. Horn/strobe can be silenced only after all FA points become normal by entering any valid ID code (or 2,2,2,2,2,2); otherwise, turn-off occurs when 10-minute timeout expires. For a BA alarm, horn sounds continuously unless silenced by entry a valid ID code (or automatic turn-off occurs for the BA group that is involved). Strobe does not operate for a BA alarm. Note: Set option 3 for NFPA temporal pattern (Yes). If set for (NO) the output can continuously pulse on/off or produces a steady sound. Enabling of the steady output can be done only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. 40 (PRC) AC Fail This point type is normally on and turns off whenever an AC failure condition occurs on the system. 59 (ACD) Access Denied 68 (ABA) Alarm in any BA Group This output point can be used to trigger a camera or activate an annunciation device in the event that someone uses a card/key having a code that either: Is not in the system. Does not have Irregular Open, Open or Close access to all BA groups associated with that ACIU. Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option for any of the associated BA groups that may be On. Has a Close option and the person attempts to enter outside of the scheduled open period even though the associated protection is Off. When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10 seconds and then goes Off. This point type is normally off and turns on when an alarm occurs in any BA group that is armed. The output returns to the off condition when the BA group with the alarm condition is changed to Day Set. Inhibit BA Common BA Code 3 Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail Complement Comm Fail Output Point Options The following table describes the output point options: Options for Function All Types BA Group Assignment Bypass Point Link The number of the BA group that the point will be assigned to. Whether bypassing will be permitted by persons with an ID code having a bypassing privilege. Select which point, if any the point is linked to

139 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Option 1 Complement Strobe Inhibit BA Function Selecting this option causes the turn-on and turn-off conditions of the output point to be reversed. In other words, if the output is turned on upon detection of the condition being monitored, it will instead be normally on, and turn off when that condition is detected. Select if a strobe will be used for the point in place of a bell, in which case the strobe will flash continuously for an alarm. Selecting this option prevents the horn from annunciating a BA alarm. Option 2 Off Normal Condition Output Link Common BA Remain On Function Enabling this option causes the output to turn on for any off normal condition on the system. Select this option if the output will follow the status of a designated output point. Select this option if the bell is turned on by an alarm in only one BA group, or an alarm in any one of a series of BA groups. If a series of BA groups is selected, then the BA group that is selected is the starting point for the series. For example, if there are 4 BA groups and the number 3 is selected, then an alarm in any BA group from BA3 through BA4 will trigger the bell, but not an alarm in BA1 or BA2. Select this option to keep the output on during a group entry or exit delay period. Option 3 Silence Code 3 Comm Fail Activate When Turned On Function Ordinarily, the output does not unlatch unless the alarm-initiating sensor has cleared and the alarm has been reset. If the Silence option is selected, the output unlatches when a valid code (or Fire Marshall Code 2,2,2,2,2,2) is entered. The Horn/Strobe point is intended primarily to annunciate a fire alarm, but the horn can also be used to sound for a burglar alarm. If this option is selected, the horn sounds for an NFPA temporal pattern (¼second on, ¼-second off, for 3 seconds, followed by 1 second of silence). Because these transmissions occupy a segment of the overall time allocated for control unit interrogation and response messages, as well as other functions that are performed by the control unit, the number of horn/strobes is limited to 5 per SIM gateway and 20 per system. These numbers can be increased to 10 per SIM gateway and 40 per system by selecting Option 1 (inhibit BA) for each Horn/Strobe point, thereby preventing the horns from sounding for a BA alarm. If this is done, the control unit will no longer generate the temporal pattern. Instead, the DIP switches on each horn/strobe must be programmed to generate the temporal pattern in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if a Communication Failure on the dialer condition is present. Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if the system is turned on

140 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Types of Input and Output Points and Associated Options Input Point Type Mnc No. Link Group Bypass Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 BA Fixed FI 1 1 thru 4 Y/N 24-Hour Alarm NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Movable Instant MI 2 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Movable Delayed MD 3 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Fixed Local FL 4 1 thru 4 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Movable Instant Daytime Annunciation MID 5 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA VVS VVS 6 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Movable Instant Chime MIC 7 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) BA Movable Delayed Chime MDC 8 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Fire FA 9 1 Y/N Smoke Reset (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Holdup Special HUS 10 1 Y/N Suspicion (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Latch (Y/N) Holdup HU 11 1 Y/N Suspicion (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Latch (Y/N) Medical MED 12 1 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Supervisory SPV 13 1 Y/N NC contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Janitor Keyswitch JAN 28 1 thru 4 Y/N LED (Y/N) Buzzer (Y/N) BA Keyswitch KEY 29 1 thru 4 Y/N LED (Y/N) Buzzer (Y/N) Remote Power Supply RPS 30 1 thru 4 Y/N Ambush Start ABS 35 1 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) Ambush End ABE 36 1 Y/N Waterflow WF 49 1 Y/N Manual Access MAP 60 1 thru 4 Y/N Log (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N) Pushbutton Exit Pushbutton EXP 64 1 thru 4 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N) Arming ARM 65 1 thru 4 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) Disarm DAR 66 1 thru 4 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) No Alarm Response NAR 67 1 thru 4 Y/N NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N) Carbon Monoxide CO 69 1 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Movable Instant Stay MIS 70 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Movable Instant PIR MIP 71 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Movable Delayed Stay MDS 72 1 thru 4 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test (Y/N) Mnemonic If using point-link function, enter the number of point that this point will be linked to. Point type must be assigned to a BA group (BA1), otherwise point will cause an FA fault annunciation. For RF Fire Points, this option must be set for NO. For RF Burglary Points, this option must be set for YES

141 Section 13 Input and Output Point Types Output Point Type Mnc No. Link Group Bypass Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Central Station AC CSC 14 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Service Mode SMC 15 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Telco Fault TFC 16 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Schedule SCC 17 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Lights LTC 18 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) Remain On (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Fixed FXC 19 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Off OFC 20 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Fire FAC 21 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) Silence (Y/N) Supervisory SPC 22 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Holdup HUC 23 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Holdup Suspicion HSC 24 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Remote Sonalert RSC 25 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) BA Bell and Vault Sensor Test TSC 26 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) System Trouble STC 33 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) Off Normal (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Point Link PLC 34 1 Y/N Complement (Y/N) Output Link (Y/N) Activate When On BA Access ACC 37 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Horn/Strobe-SIM only HST 38 1 thru 4 Y/N Inhibit BA (Y/N) Common BA (Y/N) Code 3 (Y/N) AC Fail PRC 40 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Access Denied ACD 59 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Alarm in any BA Group ABA 68 1 thru 4 Y/N Complement (Y/N) COMM Fail (Y/N) Mnemonic If using point-link function, enter the number of point that this point will be linked to. Point type must be assigned to a BA group (BA1), otherwise point will cause an FA fault annunciation

142 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 13-16

143 S E C T I O N 1 4 Programming In This Section About Programming the System Mechanics of Programming Programming Names for the BA Groups Programming the BA Groups Turn-Off Data Programming the System Communication Options Programming Point Data About Programming the System The installation may require the FOCUS CADET System s data to be changed from the default settings. This customization may be done either locally via an operating panel or remotely via downline loading. The Hard ID number of each point, the various descriptors, and the user ID codes typically need to be programmed into the system. Because the Hard ID numbers for the various points are ordinarily not known until the sensors have been installed, this is typically done locally via an operating panel. The Compass downloading software telephone number and the subsystem group and instrument numbers should also be entered. Any data entered locally should be uploaded to the Compass downloading software for future editing, as required. Point Data Point data is the information associated with point of protection in the system. This data includes: The Hard ID Number The name of the point (descriptor) The point type The associated BA group Whether the point is linked to another point Whether the point can be bypassed The communication unit number Descriptors Descriptors are user-selected descriptive names. A user with a valid ID code and the appropriate privilege level may at any time change the descriptors. Descriptors may be programmed for: Each BA group Each point of protection Each person assigned an ID code Each holiday in the holiday schedule User ID Codes The ID codes are user-selected, and are used to operate the system. See the ID Codes section for the detailed programming procedure for entering the ID codes into the system. 14-1

144 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Mechanics of Programming The operating panel provides an interactive display that operates in a manner similar to an automatic teller machine (ATM). It employs a 19-character, four-line LCD display that shows menu selections, message prompts, and help screens to guide you through the various operating procedures. Menu items and other selectable choices are shown on the screen with an arrow (>) that lines up with one of the four "Selector" buttons on each side of the screen. You make a choice by pressing the button alongside the item shown on the screen. Programming of the system is done by selecting a course of action from menu items that appear on a series of screens known as Action Menus. Entering the valid Service Code will cause the first of four Action Menus to be displayed. The Action Menus are the starting point for performing all programming operations. In order to access the Action Menus, the protection for the BA group associated with the operating panel where the Service Code is entered must be Off. Programming Names for the BA Groups Enter the program mode by entering the Service Code at the operating panel. <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > <? GROUP #1 Group 1 < Prev Change > < Quit Next > <? GROUP #1 Group 1 Done > < Back CHR Forward > < Left POS Right > Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More three times. Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select Name pnt/gps. Group Info Screen is displayed. The default display shows the info for Group #1. The top line shows the current name. The second line shows the group to which this info pertains. Select Next to display the info screen for Group #2. Select Next again to display the info screen for Group #3, etc. Select Prev to display the previous group s info. Select Change to move to the Character Entry Screen for the group displayed. The cursor is under the first letter of the current name for the group. Use the third key down on each side to move either Back or Forward through the alphabet. Use the bottom key on each side to move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name. Select Done to save the current name displayed. The system displays the Group Info Screen. Program all group names by selecting either Next or Prev to move to another group. Select Quit twice to exit the program mode. 14-2

145 Section 14 Programming Programming Point Data Enter the program mode by entering the Service Code at the operating panel. <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > <? GROUP #1 Group 1 < Prev Change > < Quit Next > <? POINT 20 Pnt 020 Type 1N/Z < Prev Change > < Quit Next > <? POINT 20 Pnt 020 Continue > < Back CHR Forward > < Left POS Right > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Type N / Z Continue > Type 0 0 < Quit Delete > Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More three times. Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select Name pnt/gps to move to the next screen. Group Info Screen is displayed. Enter the point number (e.g., for point 1, enter 1; for point 64, enter 64). Point Info Screen. is displayed. The first line shows the current name and the second line shows the point and the type. Note: Type 1N/Z (No Zone) indicates the point is not yet defined. Select Next to display the info for the next point. Select Change to edit the info for this point. Character Entry Screen is displayed. The cursor is at the first letter of the current name for the point. Use the third key down on each side to move either Back or Forward through the alphabet. Use the bottom key on each side to move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name. Select Continue to save the current name displayed and advance to the Point Type Screen. Enter the number of the point type. Input Point Types: 01. BA Fixed (FI) 30. Remote Power Supply (RPS) 02. BA Movable Instant (MI) 35. Ambush Start (ABS) 03. BA Movable Delayed (MD) 36. Ambush End (ABE) 04. BA Fixed Local (FL) 49. Waterflow (WF) 05. BA Movable Instant Daytime 60. Manual Access Pushbutton (MAP) Annunciation (MID) 64. Exit Pushbutton (EXP) 06. BA VVS (VVS) 65. RF Arm (ARM) 07. BA Movable Instant Chime (MIC) 66. RF Disarm (DAR) 08. BA Movable Delayed Chime (MDC) 67. RF No Alarm Response (NAR) 09. Fire (FA) 69. Carbon Monoxide (CO) 10. Holdup Special (HUS) 70. Movable Instant Stay (MIS) 11. Holdup (HU) 71. Movable Instant PIR (MIP) 12. Medical (MED) 72. Movable Delayed Stay (MDS) 13. Supervisory (SPV) Output Point Types: 14. Central Station AC (CSC) 24. Holdup Suspicion (HSC) 15. Service Mode (SMC) 25. BA Remote Sonalert (RSC) 16. Telco Fault TFC) 26. BA Bell/Vault Sensor Test (TSC) 17. BA Schedule (SCC) 33. System Trouble (STC) 18. BA Lights (LTC) 34. Point Link (PLC) 19. BA Fixed (FXC) 37. BA Access (ACC) 20. BA Off (OFC) 38. Horn/Strobe (SIM Only) (HST) 21. Fire (FAC) 40. AC Fail (PRC) 22. Supervisory (SPC) 59. Access Denied (ACD) 23. Holdup (HUC) 68. Alarm in any BA Group (ABA) Select Delete to erase all the info for this point. 14-3

146 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? FRONT DOOR 20 Type MD Continue > Type 0 3 < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Group 1 Continue > PERIMETER < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Link _ Continue > < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 IS Continue > BYPASSABLE < Previous Change > <? FRONT DOOR 20 IS Continue > OPTION 1 < Previous Change > Select Enter to save this info and then select Continue to move to the next screen. Group Assignment Screen is displayed. The default group assignment is Group 1. Enter the number of the group to which this point should be assigned. Select Enter to save this info and then select Continue to move to the next screen. Point Link Screen is displayed. If this point is not to be linked to another point, select Continue. If this point is to be linked with another point, enter the point number. If that point has been fully programmed, the name will appear on the third line. Select Enter and then Continue to save this info and move to the next screen. Bypass Screen is displayed. Selecting Change will toggle the bypass option between IS NOT BYPASSABLE and IS BYPASSABLE. Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen. This is Option 1 Screen. The function of Option 1 changes depending on the type of point being used. For Input Point Type 1 = 24-Hour Alarm Point: Selecting this option enables the point to cause an alarm even when the system is turned off (Day set). For Input Point Types 2, 3, 5 to 8, 69 to 72 = Janitor Point: This point is automatically bypassed during the Nite Set if a Janitor Keyswitch is used. For Input Point Type 9 = Smoke Detector Reset Point: Enabling this option causes the system to remove power from the smoke detector for 6 seconds when a Reset Alarm command is entered at an operating panel. For Input Point Types 10, 11 = Suspicion Point: A separate normally closed device causing an open triggers a Holdup Suspicion output. If the open is held for more than 1 minute, a trouble occurs. For Input Point Type 60 = Log Event: Select whether an occurrence will be logged in the system s history. For Output Point Types 14 to 26, 33, 34, 37, 40, 59, 68 = Complement Point: Select this option to reverse the function of the output. An output that normally is turned on when the system detects a condition will be turned off. For Output Point Type 27 = Strobe: Select whether a strobe is used instead of a bell. The strobe will flash continuously for an alarm. For Output Point Type 38 = Inhibit BA: Select whether the output is inhibited for BAs. Selecting Change will toggle the option. Select Continue to save the selection and move to the next option screen. 14-4

147 Section 14 Programming <? FRONT DOOR 20 IS Continue > OPTION 2 < Previous Change > <? FRONT DOOR 20 IS Continue > OPTION 3 < Previous Change > This is Option 2 Screen. The function of Option 2 changes depending on the type of point being used. For Input Point Types 1 to 8, 10, 11, 13, 35, 60, 64, 69 to 72 = N/C Contact: Select whether a normally closed contact is used. If so, an open in the loop wiring will be ignored during the Day Set, but will initiate an alarm during the Nite Set. For Output Point Types 33 = Off Normal: Enabling this option causes the output to turn on for any off normal condition on the system. For Output Point Type 34 = Output Link: Select whether this output will follow the status of a designated output point. For Output Point Types 27, 38 = Common BA: Select whether the output will be turned on by an alarm in only one BA group or by an alarm in any one of a series of BA groups. For All BA RF transmitter option 2 must be enabled (IS). Select Change to toggle the option. Select Continue to save the selection and move to the next option screen. This is Option 3 Screen. The function of Option 3 changes depending on the type of point being used. For Input Point Types 1 to 9, 13, 69 to 72 = Self-Test: Select whether the device will perform a self-test. This is for devices with a built-in SIM that have self-test capability. For Input Point Types 10, 11 = Latch Contact: Select whether a momentary contact is used on the loop to initiate an alarm. For Input Point Types 60, 64 =SIM: Select whether the pushbutton will be connected to a SIM Gateway. For Output Point Types 14 to 20, 22 to 26, 33, 37, 40, = Communication Failure: Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if a Communication Failure on the dialer condition is present. For Output Point Type 21 = Silence: Ordinarily, the output does not unlatch unless the alarm-initiating sensor has cleared and the alarm has been reset. If the Silence option is selected, the output unlatches when a valid code (or Fire Marshall Code 2,2,2,2,2,2) is entered. For Output Point Type 34 = Activate When Turned On: Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if the system is turned on. For Output Point Type 38 = Code 3: If this option is selected, the horn sounds for an NFPA temporal pattern (¼-second on, ¼-second off, for 3 seconds, followed by 1 second of silence). Select Change to toggle the option. Select Continue to save the selection and move to the next screen. 14-5

148 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? RF Point? Continue > No > Yes > This is the RF Programming Screen. Select Continue if you do not desire to change the RF information for this point. Select No if the point is not an RF point. Select Yes if the point is RF or if there is any information concerning this point that needs to be changed. This will move you to the RF Information Screen. <? RF information < Type RF Continue > < Loop 1 < Previous <? Enter User # Continue > BR User # _ 0 < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Gate? Continue > POINT GATEWAY < Previous Delete > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Gate 1 Continue > POINT GATEWAY < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 < Replace (N) Done > Hard ID: < Previous Enter > <? FRONT DOOR 20 Pnt 20 Type 3MD < Prev Change > < Quit Next > RF Information Screen is displayed. Select Type to scroll through the choices (RF, UR, BR) for the type of RF point. Select Loop to scroll through the loops (1-4) for this point Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen. BR User # Screen is displayed. If the type selected was BR, this screen is displayed. Enter the User # associated with this RF transmitter. Select Enter to save the user #. The Enter key changes to Delete. Select Delete to erase the user # displayed. Select Continue to move to the Gateway Screen. This is the Gateway Screen. Enter the Gateway unit number (0-9) that this point is associated with (7 for RF devices; 8 for built-in HW input and output points; 9 for SIM Loop devices). Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen. Select Enter and then Continue to save this info and move to the next screen. This is the Hard ID Screen. Enter the Hard ID number of the device for the point. If this is an RF point, enter the serial number located on the bar code label on the transmitter. If you are using a 4208U, 4209U, or 4208SNFyou must enter an A for the first digit. Press the [ ] key on the operating panel then enter the Hard ID. Select Enter and then Done to save this info and move back to the Point Info Screen. Note: The Replace (Y/N) has no function at this time. This is the Point Info Screen. This screen now displays the summary information for the point. The first line shows the current name and the second line shows the point and the type. Select Next to display the info for the next point. Select Previous to move back to the previous screen. Select Change to edit the info for this point. Select Quit and move to Action Menu #4 when all points have been programmed. NOTE: If appears after the point type, the gateway unit number or the Hard ID number is missing. 14-6

149 Section 14 Programming Programming the BA Groups Turn-Off Data Enter the program mode by entering the Service Code at the operating panel. <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > <? BA GROUP #1 Group 1 < Previous Change > < Quit Next > <? Grp0 Ut0 Keypad < BA- < Previous Change > < Quit Next > <? Grp4 Ut0 Cardrdr < BA- Lg (N) > < Previous Change > < Quit Next > Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More three times. Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select Name pnt/gps. Group Info Screen. The system defaults to display the info for Group #1. The top line shows the current name. The second line shows the group to which this info pertains. Select Next repeatedly until the info screen for Group #4 is shown. Select Next once more to advance to the next screen. NOTE: Valid BA groups are 1-4. This screen shows which BA Groups will be automatically opened (turned off) when a valid ID Code is entered at the operating panel indicated. Select Change to edit the selections. Enter the number of each BA Group that will turn off. Entering the number again will erase the selection. Select Next to move to the operating panel at the next address on the RS-485 bus. Continue until all operating panels have been programmed. Selecting Next at the last operating panel will bring you to this screen. This screen is same as the one for the operating panels, except this is for BA Groups linked to card/key readers. Select Change to edit the selections. Select Next to move to the card/key reader at the next address on the RS-485 bus. Selecting Lg will toggle between Yes (Y) and No (N) to log successful attempts, unsuccessful attempts, openings, and closings at this card/key reader in the history log. Selecting Next at the screen showing the last card/key reader will bring you to the Point Data Info Screen. Select Quit to return to Action Menu #4. Programming the System Communication Options Enter the program mode by entering the Service Code at the operating panel. <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More three times. 14-7

150 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > <? SS-GG-IIII > < ST P# Remote DLL > < DTM/Lst Local DLL > < Quit More > <? Pri Num/Hex Edi < Pri Phone Num < Pls/Lst > < Quit Hex Data > <? Enter Pri Num > < Pause Dial Tone > < Quit Enter > Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select Load to continue. The Communication Screen is displayed. Select More to program the CCC phone number. The CCC Options Screen is displayed. Select the Pls/Lst key to scroll through the dialing methods. The choices are: Pls/Lst = Pulse dialing and loop start Dtm/Lst = TouchTone dialing and loop start Pls/Gndst = Pulse and ground start Dtm/Gndst = TouchTone and ground start Select Pri Phone Num to program the primary CCC phone number. Select Hex Data to program the hex data information. The Primary Phone Number Screen is displayed. Enter the primary phone number for the communication of alarms, troubles, etc. to the central monitoring center. Select Pause and select (wait for) Dial Tone as needed. Each Pause entry is three seconds. Up to 32 digits may be entered. Note: The display can only show 16 digits at a time. If you need to enter more than 16 digits, when the 17 th digit is entered the display automatically advances to display digits 17 through 32. The arrow (>) at the right-hand side indicates you are entering digits 1 through 16. The arrow at the left-hand side indicates digits 17 through 32. Select Enter when you are finished entering the phone number. Any digits after the cursor will be erased. The Enter key will then change to Delete. Select Delete to erase the displayed phone number. Select Quit to save the displayed phone number and return to the Communication Screen. Select Quit again to return to Action Menu #

151 S E C T I O N 1 5 Scheduling In This Section About Scheduling Permanent Schedules Temporary Schedules Holiday Schedule Ambush Schedules Schedule Options About Scheduling Scheduling is used to: Automate openings and closings. Limit access to the system. Set the time limit for the Ambush Points. Automate the associated scheduling reports to the Customer Care Center (CCC). The FOCUS CADET system utilizes permanent, temporary, and holiday schedules. Time windows (time periods) are used to define the schedules. Each BA group can be assigned its own schedules. UL Automatic openings and closings may not be used on UL Burglary alarm systems. Opening/Closing Schedules The opening and closing schedules define the time windows that a BA group will automatically turn on and off, and when users may access the BA group. There are two permanent and two temporary schedules that can be assigned to each BA group. The temporary schedule will override an existing permanent schedule. Additionally, a holiday schedule can be assigned to the BA group and it will override the permanent schedule, but not the temporary schedule. Only users with the appropriate privilege levels can establish or change the permanent and temporary schedules. The holiday schedule is typically established at the time of installation. The ability to use any form of automatic opening or closing is controlled by a separate Automatic Open/Close Enable option that may only be set via the downloader. User Access Limitations Users are assigned privilege levels, which either allow or deny access to a BA group when it is normally closed. The privilege of entering a BA group outside of the schedule can be assigned to any ID code. Anyone who does not have this privilege and uses their ID code to access a BA group prior to the scheduled open time will cause an Irregular Opening. The signal will be received at the CCC and the owner or manager will be notified. 15-1

152 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Close Time Timer Permanent Schedules The Close Time Timer counts down from the opening of a BA group until closing. The system transmits to the CCC a No-Close signal if the group is not closed when the countdown is completed. The permanent schedule has two open and close times that can be programmed for each day in the week. The times can be changed only by someone who has an ID code with the privilege to change a permanent schedule. This privilege also permits a person to make changes in real time. Permanent Schedule Programming Options Permanent schedule programming options are for establishing the daily opening and closing schedules and for determining if changes will be permitted. The permanent schedule programming options are as follows: Schedule Option Permanent Open Time Permanent Close Time Description 00:00 to 23:59 The time range for selecting a permanent opening time in hours and minutes. UUUU NNNN There will not be a permanent opening schedule for the BA group, although a temporary opening schedule can be used. No permanent open time is assigned, nor can a temporary schedule be entered via keypad. 00:01 to 23:44 The time range for selecting the scheduled closing time in hours and minutes. A closing time between 11:45 PM and 11:59 PM is not permitted. UUUU NNNN No permanent closing schedule is assigned, but a temporary closing schedule can be used when necessary. No permanent close time has been assigned, nor can one be entered via the keypad. Example of a Permanent Schedule A facility is closed on Sunday, and is scheduled to open at 9:00 PM on Monday and close at 1 AM on Tuesday. The table below shows the programming to establish this schedule for an entire week: Day of Schedule Monday First Opening Time Monday First Closing Time Tuesday First Opening Time Tuesday First Closing Time Tuesday Second Opening Time Tuesday Second Closing Time Wednesday First Opening Time Programming Entry Result 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for Monday. UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from occurring because the premises will not close on Monday. 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was started on Monday and allows any closing time to be entered for Tuesday. 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on Monday. 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for Tuesday. UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from occurring because the premises will not close a second time on Tuesday. 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was started on Tuesday and allows any closing time to be entered for Wednesday. 15-2

153 Section 15 Scheduling Day of Schedule Wednesday First Closing Time Wednesday Second Opening Time Wednesday Second Closing Time Sunday First Opening Time Sunday First Closing Time Sunday Second Opening Time Sunday Second Closing Time Programming Entry Result 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on Tuesday. 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for Wednesday. UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from occurring because the premises will not close a second time on Wednesday. Repeat the same four entries for each day of the rest of the week, up to and including Saturday. 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was started on Saturday and allows any closing time to be entered for Sunday. 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on Saturday. UUUU UUUU There will not be an open time window because the premises will not open on Sunday. This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from occurring because the premises will not close on Sunday. (This completes the schedule for the entire week). Temporary Schedules The temporary schedule is not ordinarily set up for a new installation. Instead, when needed, it is usually entered at an operating panel or downline loaded upon customer request. A temporary schedule: Has open and close times that can be assigned up to 6 days in advance. Will override any permanent schedule in effect at the time. Can be used for a BA group even if the group does not have a permanent schedule. Includes entry options that are the same as the Permanent Schedule, except for NNNN, which cannot be used. Will be voided at midnight, at which time the permanent schedule will become active again. For example, a temporary schedule is programmed for Thursday that has an opening time of 7:00 AM and a closing time of 10:30 PM. This schedule will be canceled on Thursday at midnight. The automatic cancellation is a precaution against someone forgetting to cancel a temporary schedule. Can be downline loaded from the central station, or can be entered locally at any operating panel. Guidelines for Programming Permanent and Temporary Schedules If there isn't any opening or closing, program UUUU for both the opening and the closing. If UUUU is programmed for the opening, then it must also be programmed for the closing. If there is no opening time, but there is a closing time, the opening must be entered as 12 midnight (12:00 AM). This will allow entering any closing time that is desired. No permanent or temporary opening time can be assigned if it is before the earliest open time that has been programmed for the BA group. Changes can be made to the permanent and temporary schedules by someone with the appropriate privilege levels. Any permanent or temporary schedule can be downline loaded, regardless of the earliest-open or latestclose time that has been programmed in the control unit. 15-3

154 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Holiday Schedule Ambush Schedule Scheduling Options The holiday schedule: Specifies each day during the year that the premises will be closed for the observance of a holiday. Overrides the permanent schedule for that day. Accommodates l4 days that are designated as holidays. Requires programming of the month, day of the month, and name of the holiday for each holiday. Can be overridden by a temporary schedule, if a BA group needs to be opened during the holiday. If you are using a permanent schedule to perform Auto On/Off, then completing this schedule is important, otherwise a false alarm may be generated. If an Auto Off function has been selected for any BA group and the holiday falls on what would otherwise be a normal workday, the protection will not be automatically turned off during the holiday at the normal opening time. When someone arrives at the facility and enters, expecting the system to be off, a false alarm will be generated. An ambush schedule: Is used for an Ambush-Start point and an Ambush-End point as protection against hide-ins. Provides for two permanent schedule openings and closings per day. Provides for two temporary schedule openings and closings per day. Is programmed in the same way as the permanent and temporary schedules for each BA group. Operates independently of other schedules. Open and close times for a given day should form a time window spanning the permanent schedule open time to permit the customer to enter in order to prepare for the opening of the bank without creating an alarm. See the Ambush Start and End Input Point Types in the Input and Output Point Types section for an explanation of how an ambush schedule works. The options associated with scheduling are outlined in the following table: Option Auto On/Off Early Open/ Late Close Schedule Lockout Function Auto On/Off may be convenient to use for an area where people come and go as they please, and no one is responsible for turning the protection on or off. The burglar alarm protection associated with each schedule can be: Turned on and off manually. Turned on and off automatically. Turned on automatically and turned off manually. Turned on manually and turned off automatically. Example: If auto-on/auto-off is selected for a given BA group, it automatically goes to Nite Set at the scheduled closing time, and automatically goes to Day Set at the scheduled opening time without anyone having to go to an operating panel. The closing time reminder and warning sounder will operate as a reminder to exit. However, there is no warning sound during the entry delay because the opening is being done automatically. Notes: The system performs the auto-on at the end of the warning time. Auto-On/Off may not be used in UL burglary alarm systems. The auto-on will not occur if there are faults on any sensors in the group unless Force Auto-arm is enabled.. This establishes the earliest opening and latest closing times that can be used each day for the permanent and temporary schedules for a given BA group. This is intended for use with areas involving safes, vaults, or other high-security areas where the operating panel is located outside of the protected area. It is used to prevent a BA group from being turned Off when the present time is outside the scheduled open period. 15-4

155 Early Open/Late Close Options Section 15 Scheduling The following table describes the options for establishing the limits for the earliest opening and latest closing time for a BA group. The limits apply to both the permanent and temporary schedules: Option Time Function Earliest Open Time 00 to 23 This sets the time limit, in 1-hour increments, from 12 midnight (00) to 11 PM (23). A schedule can be programmed at or after the earliest open time. For example, selecting 5 AM as the earliest open time means a schedule can be programmed at or after 5 AM by a user. 24 (Lock) This locks the opening time for the permanent schedule so that no temporary schedule changes can be made (from the operating panel). Latest Close Time 00 (Lock) This locks the permanent schedule closing times so that no temporary schedule closing times can be programmed from the operating panel. 01 to 23 This choice sets the time limit, in 1-hour increments, from 1 AM (01) to 11 PM (23), for the latest permissible closing time. A permanent or temporary closing schedule cannot be extended beyond the latest closing time. 24 Allows any close time up to 11:44 PM, but the closing time cannot be deleted. 25 Deletes all restrictions on closing schedules. Allows for the spanning of midnight and deleting schedules. Close Time Reminder and Warning The Close Time Reminder and Close Time Warning periods occur at the end of the Close Time Timer countdown. During the Close Time Reminder, the operating panel beeps once a minute. This serves to alert the user to get ready to close because the closing time is about to end. At the end of the Close Time Reminder, the Close Time Warning begins. During this time, the operating panel sounds a continuous tone. This serves to alert the user that the close time has ended and a No Close signal is about to be transmitted to the CCC unless the BA group is turned on before the warning time ends. The duration of the Close Time Reminder and Close Time Warning is programmed in the No Close option. The choices are: 15 minutes for the Close Time Reminder and 15 minutes for the Close Time Warning. 30 minutes for the Close Time Reminder and 5 minutes for the Close Time Warning. NOTE: The system can be programmed to disable the Close Time Reminder. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. 15-5

156 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 15-6

157 S E C T I O N 1 6 Downline Loading In This Section About Downline Loading Programming the Control Unit for Downline Loading Downline Loading the Customized Data Verifying the Downline Loaded Data About Downline Loading Downline loading is a process of transmitting from a remote location all the programmable data into the control unit. Data that has been programmed locally through an operating panel may also be loaded to the remote location. The ADEMCO Compass downloading software is located at the remote location, and the transmission takes place over the dialing network by means of a standard telco line. Downline loading requires the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. Downline loading can be initiated from the Compass downloading software or by the ADT installer at the customer's premises. The sequence of events that are involved in the downline loading are determined by whether the operation is being done for the first time during installation or is being done for a subsequent change to an existing customer database. The system supports Arm/Disarm by Group, Off Normal Status request and Reset Alarm Memory via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Downline Loading Security As a security measure, in order to prevent the downline loading of data from a source other than ADT, the control unit will not accept any data without first calling back the Compass downloading software. This callback requirement is controlled by an activation byte. On a new installation, when the control unit is preset to the factory defaults, the activation byte is cleared in the control unit's memory. This permits the control unit to accept data from the Compass downloading software without first calling the CCC and the Compass downloading software. When the initial data has been downloaded, the control unit communicator verifies the telephone number of the CCC and the Compass downloading software by making a callback to each. If the telephone numbers are correct, the Compass downloading software sets the activation byte in the control unit memory to prevent attempts to download unauthorized data. Programming the Control Unit for Downline Loading In order for the control to call back the Compass downloading software for a downline load, a Compass downloading software phone number must be programmed into the control unit. Follow the steps below to program the number. Enter the Service Code at an operating panel. <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More three times. 16-1

158 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > <? SS-GG-IIII > < ST P# Remote DLL > < DTM/Lst Local DLL > < Quit More > <? Ser Term Phn # > < Pause Dial Tone > < Quit Enter > <? System Number SS00 GG000 II0000 < Quit Enter > Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select Load to continue. The Communication Screen is displayed. Select between DTM (Tone) and Pls (Pulse) for the dialing method and Lst (Loop Start) and Gndst (Ground Start) for the dial tone method to reach the Compass downloading software. Select SS-GG-IIII to advance to the System Number Screen. Select Remote DLL to initiate the downline loading from the control unit. Select ST P# to advance to the Service Terminal Phone Number Screen. The Service Terminal Phone Number Screen is displayed. Enter the phone number where the ADEMCO Compass downloading software is located. Select Pause and select (wait for) Dial Tone as needed. Each Pause entry is three seconds. Up to 32 digits may be entered. Note: The display can only show 16 digits at a time. If you need to enter more than 16 digits, when the 17 th digit is entered the display automatically advances to display digits 17 through 32. The arrow (>) at the right-hand side indicates you are entering digits 1 through 16. The arrow at the left-hand side indicates digits 17 through 32. Select Enter when you are finished entering the phone number. Any digits after the cursor will be erased. The Enter key then changes to Delete. Select Delete to erase the displayed phone number. Select Quit to save the displayed phone number and return to the Communication Screen. The System Number Screen is displayed. Call the CCC to get the System Number. Enter 2 digits for System Number (SS) and select Enter. Enter 3 digits for Group Number (GG) and select Enter. Enter 4 digits for Instrument Number (II) and select Enter. Select Quit to save the displayed system number and return to the Communication Screen. NOTE: The System Number is provided by the data group doing the downline loading. Downline Loading the Customized Data The following downline loading procedure applies regardless of whether the point data has been loaded locally or will be included in the data to be downline loaded. Until the downline loading has been completed and the "activation byte" has been received, the system will be locked in a local mode, during which time no signals will be sent to the CCC. As a reminder to the installer that the system is in the local mode, all operating panels will display: System in Local Mode Activation Byte not set 16-2

159 Section 16 Downline Loading To downline load the system, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Call the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. This is to ensure that there is a "Read customer unit into the database" job waiting in the queue for system being installed. Note: If there isn't a job waiting in the queue for the system being installed, the system will perform an Unsolicited Upload. 2 Inform the ADEMCO Compass downloading software of the area code and telephone number of the telephone line connected to Main Line of the control unit. This is the telephone number that the ADEMCO Compass downloading software will use whenever it contacts the control unit. 3 At any operating panel, enter the Service Code, More, More, More, Load, Remote DLL. The control unit will call the ADEMCO Compass downloading software, and the control unit database will be uploaded to the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. During the upload, the operating panel will display the following message: Calling ADT to initiate changes. The following message will be displayed if there is no job in the queue: DLL aborted. Except where the DLL has been aborted, no further action is required by the installer. The control unit's data will be uploaded and any additional data required for the installation will be downloaded back to the control unit, as indicated in the following table. Stage What Happens 1 The operator at the ADEMCO Compass downloading software examines the uploaded data and modifies it, as is applicable. The finalized set of customer data is then used to create (or verify) the customer's database for MAXimation SM. 2 Using the control unit telephone number provided by the Installer in Step 2, the operator at the ADEMCO Compass downloading software downloads the finalized database to the control unit. During the download, as during all forms of communication, the main dialer red LED on the control unit goes on. 3 After completion of the download, the control unit waits 5 seconds, dials the CCC (via the receiver), and sends a "Start DLL" transmission to verify that the control unit can communicate with the CCC over the alarm channel. 4 When the control unit has received an acknowledgement that the CCC has received the "Start DLL" message, the communicator hangs up and dials the ADEMCO Compass downloading software, which, in turn, sets an "activation byte" at the control unit. Note: With the setting of the activation byte, any off-normal events that occur from this point on are transmitted to the CCC. 5 After a successful DLL (activation byte set), the control unit automatically checks the various points in the system, including the hard IDs and the point number. If there are any discrepancies, a trouble is annunciated at the operating panel(s) and the point is identified. Note: From this point on, during normal operation (system out of service mode) any sensor that is removed or added will generate a trouble until the sensor and hard ID have been properly entered into the database via the operating panel, or via downline loading. 16-3

160 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Verifying the Downline Loaded Data Verify the data that were downline loaded into the control unit. This process may be as extensive as the customer deems necessary. It may not be necessary or convenient to check every entry. View the operating panel screens when making the checks listed below: Step Action 1 Check the descriptors for the BA groups. 2 Check the descriptors for each point. Also check the Hard ID for any point that was entered manually at the control unit. 3 Check the user names. 4 Check the user privilege levels. 5 Check the times of all schedules. 6 Check the contrast level at each panel with the customer, readjusting if necessary. 16-4

161 S E C T I O N 1 7 Real-Time Clock In This Section About the Real-Time Clock Setting Daylight Saving Time Setting the Time and Date About the Real-Time Clock All schedules (permanent, temporary, holiday, and ambush) are based on the time and date from an internal real-time clock. Also, the history log uses the time and date when events are logged. During system installation, the clock should be initially set to the time (hour and minute) and date (month, day, and year). If the system loses all power or is powered down for any reason, the clock must be reset. The clock does not advance during the time the system does not have power connected. Setting the Time and Date To set the time and date, enter the Service Code and perform the following steps: <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Bypass History > < Status Time > < Previous More > <? TIME < Holiday Daylight > < Open/close Hstg > < Quit Current > <? Time & date 11:15:28 AM < Quit Change > <? Change < Change Time < Change Date < Quit Action Menu #1 is displayed. Select More twice. Action Menu #3 is displayed. Select Time. The Time Screen is displayed. Select Current to display the current time and date set in the system. The Current Time and Date Screen is displayed. Select Change to change the current settings. Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen without making any changes. The Change Menu Screen is displayed. Select Change Time to move to the Enter New Time Screen. Select Change Date to move to the Enter New Date Screen. Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen without making any changes. 17-1

162 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? Enter new time: Curr: 11:15 AM New: : AM > < Quit PM > <? Enter new date: Curr: New: - - < Quit Enter > This is the Enter New Time Screen. Enter the new time for the system. Be sure to make the correct AM/PM selection. Select Quit to return to the Current Time and Date Screen. This is the Enter New Date Screen. Enter the new date for the system. Select Enter to save the date displayed and return to the Current Time and Date Screen. Select Quit to return to the Current Time and Date Screen without saving the new date. Setting Daylight Saving Time The clock will automatically adjust for leap year and for Daylight Saving Time (if used). To adjust the Daylight Saving Time settings, perform the first two steps stated earlier under the Setting the Time and Date heading to advance to the Time Screen. Then proceed as follows: <? TIME < Holiday Daylight > < Open/close Hstg > < Quit Current > <? SPRING DAYLIGHT Date: < Previous Change > < Quit Next > <? SPRING DAYLIGHT < Back CHR Forward > < Left POS Right > < Quit Continue > <? Delete > Curr: New: - < Quit Enter > At the Time Screen, select Daylight. The Current Daylight Saving Screen is displayed. Select Change to change the current name and date set in the system. Select Previous or Next to toggle between the Spring and Fall settings. Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen. This is the Character Entry Screen. The cursor is at the first letter of the current name. Use the second key down on each side to move either Back or Forward through the alphabet. Use the third key down on each side to move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name. Select Continue to save the current name displayed and advance to the next screen. Select Quit to move back to the Current Daylight Saving Screen. This is the Enter New Daylight Saving Screen. Enter the new date. Select Delete to erase any incorrect entries and return to the Current Daylight Saving Screen. Select Enter to save the date displayed and return to the Current Daylight Saving Screen. Select Quit to return to the Current Daylight Saving Screen without saving the new date. 17-2

163 S E C T I O N 1 8 ID Codes In This Section About the ID Codes Service Code Fire Marshall Code Duress Signal ID Code Programming Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges About the ID Codes The FOCUS CADET System supports up to 99 separate 6-digit ID codes, including service codes. Each ID code is limited to the BA group(s) it is assigned, and is capable of: Turning the protection on. Turning the protection off. Performing tests of the BA sensors. Performing the operating panel tests. Performing the local bell tests. Code Makeup ID codes are made up of six digits. All six digits of an ID code are needed to access the system. The first two digits of the ID code: Serve as the user number, and are numbered 01, 02, 03, etc., up to 99. Are used as passcodes by the CCC when identifying the person performing a function. The last four digits of the ID code: Serve as a PIN (Person Identification Number). Uniquely identify the user and his assigned privileges to the system. Serve to identify the level of access. Programmable ID Code Privileges The following privileges are optional for each ID code. They are assigned to the ID code when it is entered into the system, but may be changed at any time by a user with the appropriate privilege. Privileges are limited to the BA group(s) to which the ID code is assigned. Each ID code may be assigned the ability to: Assign ID code privileges. Open BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without initiating an irregular opening. Bypass and unbypass any points in the BA group(s). Bypass VVS sensors. Establish or change temporary schedules. Establish or change closing times in the BA group(s). Change the real-time clock +/- 5 minutes maximum. Establish or change permanent schedules and make unlimited changes to real time. Bypass fire alarm, holdup alarm, and supervisory points. 18-1

164 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Service Code Establish or change descriptors for ID codes, points, and BA groups. Establish or change ID codes' accessibility to BA groups. The Service Mode privilege is assigned to all service codes, and is not made available to the customer. The Service Code is an ID code for use by ADT personnel when installing or working on a system, and must be assigned by the local office. As a minimum, the Service Code must be assigned the "Can enter service mode" privilege. Any additional privileges may be assigned to that ADT service person, as required. Entry of this code at an operating panel will: Place the FOCUS CADET system in the Service Mode. Bypass the cabinet tamper when "Service On". Cause an ADT-on-premises signal to be transmitted to the Customer Care Center (CCC). Lock out all other ID codes so that the system can be worked on without any customer interference. The Cabinet tamper is automatically bypassed when the system is placed in Service Mode and automatically unbypassed when the system is taken out of Service Mode. The Service Code(s) must be downline loaded from the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. In order to allow the service person to get into the system to initiate a downline load on a new installation, a Temporary Service Code (8,8,8,8,8,8) becomes active for the first minute after power-up. After this first minute, the Temporary Code becomes disabled, and the downline loaded Service Code must be used. Temporary Service Code is active for 1 minute each time that the control unit is powered up. During that first 1 minute after power-up, entering Reset, Memory, Yes causes the Temporary Service Code (8,8,8,8,8,8) to remain active until the system is downline loaded. Fire Marshall Code Duress Signal The code (2,2,2,2,2,2) is embedded in the control unit's memory and is reserved for use by the local fire marshal. This allows the local fire marshal to silence a fire alarm without affecting the status of any BA groups. Entering this code will cause fire alarm sounders to silence, but strobes will continue to flash until the alarming point(s) have been reset. The (2,2,2,2,2,2) code should not be assigned to any ordinary users of the system. However, the first two digits (22) can be used in conjunction with any four last digits other than A duress signal is a silent alarm transmitted in the form of a holdup alarm signal to the CCC. The control unit duress option must be enabled for a duress signal to be activated. To activate a duress signal, the user enters the first 5 digits of the ID code as usual, but adds a value of two to the normal number of the last digit. For example, if the ID code is , enter to activate a duress signal. If the last digit of the PIN is 8, enter 0; if the last digit is 9, enter 1; if the last digit is 0, enter 2. The duress signal works with any valid ID code regardless of the privilege level. 18-2

165 Section 18 ID Codes Programming ID Codes The deletion, addition, or alteration of the PIN (last four digits) of an ID code and associated user name can be performed at any operating panel by a user with an ID code having this privilege, or the change can be downline loaded from the central station. Where PCS (Passcode Schedule Supervision) service is involved (see the System Communication section), instruct the customer that ID code changes must be controlled from the CCC because the CCC monitors those who perform B group openings. With this type of service, the CCC can prevent the customer from changing an ID code. ID Code Programming Options Programming options associated with each ID code are as follows: Option Function Code These are the last four digits of the ID code. They are entered alongside the two digits that serve as the user number in order to make up the 6-digit ID code. Group The choice of BA groups that the ID code will have access to. The selection can include any combination of groups, including all groups. Cancellation Date A cancellation date can be assigned to any ID code up to 365 days in advance. Note: The privilege "Can enter service mode" is reserved for ADT personnel and must not be assigned to any ID code being used by the customer. If an RF button is linked to a user code, when the user code cancel date expires the link is severed. Entering a new cancel date does not re-establish the link to the RF button. Adding or Changing an ID Code To add or change an ID code, enter a user ID code with the privilege to change ID codes or enter the Service code at an operating panel and perform the following: <? Enter choice: Action Menu #1 is displayed. < Lesson Turn on > Select More three times. < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > < PERSON #1 USER 001 Delete > < Previous Change > < Quit Next > < PERSON #1 < Back CHR Forward > < Left POS Right > < Quit Continue > Action Menu #4 is displayed. Select ID codes. Person Data Entry Screen is displayed. The system defaults to user #001. If this is not the user you desire to change the data for, enter the correct user number. Select Next to advance to the next user number. Select Previous to back up to the previous user number. Select Delete to erase the data for the user displayed. Select Quit to go back to Action Menu #4. Select Change to edit the data for the user displayed. If you selected Change, the Person s Name Screen is displayed. The cursor is at the first letter of the current name for the user. Use the second key down on each side to move either Back or Forward through the alphabet. Use the third key down on each side to move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name or to insert a space. Select Continue to save the current name displayed and move to the next screen. 18-3

166 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide <? PERSON #1 Access irr & open < ** BA Group 1 < Change Continue > <? PERSON #1 Can not open irregular < BA Group 4 < Change Continue > < Type New User ID code: 01 < Quit Enter > This brings you to the first in a series of nine Person Access Screens. Select Change to scroll through the following four choices of access: 1. Can access & open 2. Can not access 3. Can access 4. Access irr (irregular) & open Select Continue to save the displayed access capability, and advance to the first access screen for BA groups 2-4. ** Pressing the BA Group button at any of the Person Access Screens brings you to the previous screen. Selecting Continue at BA Group 4 brings you to the next in the series of access screens. The series of access screens progress as follows: Can (not) open irregular Can (not) bypass BA Can (not) change temp sched Can (not) change perm sched Can (not) change names Can (not) bypass FA/HU/SPV Can (not) enter service mode Can (not) be changed Note: The Janitor privileges may be set up only via downline loading. Select Change to toggle a privilege between Can and Can not. If the last access screen displays Can not be changed, selecting Continue advances you to the Enrolling Key or Card Screen. See the Access Control section for the procedure for enrolling cards and/or keys. If you are adding a new ID Code or changing an existing ID code, make sure the last access screen displays Can be changed. Select Continue and the system advances to ID Code May Be Changed screen. Select Change at this access screen for BA group 4 to advance to the Type New User Screen. Type New User Screen is displayed. Enter the last 4 digits of the ID code for the user number displayed. The first 2 digits of the ID code are the user number. The screen at the right shows user # 01. Select Enter to save the ID code displayed. Select Quit to go back to Action Menu #4. Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges 18-4 The following operations can be performed by a user, provided: 1. The Operating Panel has been activated by a valid code. 2. The user has the appropriate privilege level. Protection On/Off Turn the protection On for one or any combination of BA groups. Turn the protection Off for one or any combination of BA groups (turnoff is automatic upon entry of a valid code if the BA group is in entry delay or alarm). Establish automatic On and/or automatic Off schedule (if system option has been enabled).

167 Alarms/Point Status Section 18 ID Codes View the points of protection that are off-normal. Reset sensors at the various points of protection (provided sensors have restored to normal). Silence BA/FA sounding devices and operating panel sounder (by entering valid code). View contents of alarm memories. Restore alarm memories. Initiate printout or view contents of alarm memory log. Schedules/Time Close late by temporarily changing the close time schedule for any BA group (for up to 6 consecutive days from the current day). Establish or change permanent opening and closing schedules for each BA group. Establish or change earliest time for opening and latest time for closing each BA group. Establish temporary opening and closing schedules for each BA group for a maximum of six consecutive days. Establish automatic On and/or automatic Off schedule (if system option has been enabled). Establish or change the holiday schedules (holiday name and date). Establish or change a hostage schedule. Set and adjust time and date. Note: There are two different privileges for changing time: 1. Allowed to change time by plus or minus 5 minutes in any day, but allowed to make a full change when the system is first powered up. 2. Always allowed unlimited time changes. Entered values of digits for hours must not be 00 and must not be greater than 12. Bypassing Bypass any point(s) in the system. View points that are bypassed. Any BA point that has been bypassed will automatically become unbypassed when the system is turned from On to Off at the operating panel. Special bypass of vault vibration sensor points will automatically become unbypassed at BA1 Latest Close Time, or at midnight if Latest Close Time is not set. Resetting Reset alarms. Reset results of walk tests and other sensor tests. Reset Memory (SRAM). ID Codes Establish or change ID codes. Establish or change privilege levels for ID codes. Establish or change BA group(s) assigned to an ID code. View ID code privilege levels and name of person associated with each code. 18-5

168 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Testing Test the operating panel display and sounder and local bell. Walk-test the areas protected by motion detectors, and test door and window contacts. Test security groups before closing, and see any points that may be abnormal. View points that have been bypassed for test purposes. Test holdup alarm, fire alarm, supervisory (CCM), and burglar alarm devices (and bell) without initiating an alarm signal to the central station. Printout Printout can be commanded for up to 60 of the most recent alarm messages that have been stored, or up to 500 of the most recent messages. Naming Establish or change a name assigned to each BA group. Establish or change a name to each point. Establish or change a person s name to each user code number. Viewing Point status. User name and privilege level. Time of day. Open and close schedules, both permanent and temporary. Contents of alarm memory. Contents of history log. Downline Loading Reset Memory (SRAM). Start downline load. Enter, via operating panel, all basic data to get system installed and tested. Note: All remaining data can be downline loaded or entered in hex via an operating panel. 18-6

169 S E C T I O N 1 9 System Operation In This Section About Operating the System Action Menus Operating Panel Modes Control Unit and BA Group Options Recycling Exit Delay Alarm/Trouble Memory ID Codes About Operating the System The Operating Panel provides the users complete control of the FOCUS CADET System. The operating panel uses an interactive display that operates in a manner similar to an automatic teller machine (ATM). It guides the user through the operating procedures by means of menu and help screens. The menu screens are called Action Menus. Each menu item is shown on the screen next to an arrow (>) that lines up with one of the four selector buttons on each side of the screen. To make a choice, press the selector button alongside the item. The top left-hand selector button is reserved for calling up help messages that are associated with the information being displayed. The availability of help information is indicated by a "?" symbol. The help button can be used at any time without interfering with the operation that is taking place. 1 2 ABC 3 DEF GHI JKL PRS TUV 0 MNO WXY Figure 19-1: Operating Panel Activating the Operating Panel If the system is in a normal, non-alarm state, pressing any digit key activates the operating panel to display the off/on status of the burglar alarm protective group(s). Entering a valid 6-digit ID code causes the operating panel to activate, bringing up the Action Menus. Then selections and entries can be made as required. 19-1

170 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Screen Duration of the Operating Panel If, while you are in the process of performing an operation, a predetermined period elapses without making a selection, the display will revert to the screen showing the status of the system, provided that all parts of the system are normal. The various screen durations are as follows: Screen Duration Normal no-alarm 7 seconds Action Menu #1 screen Approximately 10 seconds After a selection at Action Menu #1 60 seconds After an ADT Service Code is entered 4 minutes Test In Progress Continuously until reset Operating Panel User Code Lockout 60 seconds Operating Panel Sounder The operating panel sounder will annunciate to signal specific conditions as follows: Condition Sounder Pattern Each depression of a selector button or digit key A short beep Acceptance of a valid code or a function A longer beep Fire Alarm Pulsating 1-second-on, 1-second-off with a 5- second pause every 10 seconds BA Alarm Steady tone Trouble or Supervisory Intermittent pulsating (2 beeps, 1 second off) Action Menus Entry Delay reminder to turn off Exit Delay reminder to exit End of Exit Delay Auto On Reminder reminder to close (beeps start 15 or 30 minutes before closing, as programmed) Auto On Warning warning to either exit or extend closing time (beeps start either 5 or 15 minutes after closing, as programmed) Audible-on-Schedule Enable (if optioned) Test Mode in Progress During Audible Walk Test When a sensor is activated during the walk test Steady tone 1-second beep every minute 4-second beep 1-second beep every minute Steady tone 1-second beep every minute 1-second beep every minute Pulsating 1-second-on, 1-second-off Steady tone Operation of the system is based on selecting a course of action from menu items that appear on a series of screens known as Action Menus. Provided the associated BA protection is off, entering a valid ID code causes the first of four Action Menus to be displayed. The Action Menus are the starting point for performing all operations other than turning the system off. Selection of a menu item results in the display of another screen. Continue making selections until the appropriate screen is displayed and the desired course of action has been completed. You will find the four Action Menus and the explanation for each of the keys at each menu on the next page. 19-2

171 Section 19 - System Operation Action Menu #1 <? Enter choice: < Lesson Turn on > < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > Action Menu #2 <? Enter choice: < See points Test > Change close time > < Previous More > Action Menu #3 <? Enter choice: < Bypass History > < Status Time > < Previous More > Action Menu #4 <? Enter choice: < Sys info ID codes > < Name pnt/gps Load > < Previous First > ?: Help a brief explanation of the items on that Action Menu screen. 2. Lesson: An introduction into the use of operating panels and the availability of help information. 3. See alarms: A description of alarms. a) Type of alarm. b) Point number. c) Description of point. 4. Quit: For exiting the Action Menus (operating panel deactivates). 5. Turn on: For turning on one or more of the burglar alarm (BA) groups. The group(s) can be turned on in either AWAY or STAY mode. Warnings may be shown of abnormal conditions, which may prevent the system turn-on. a) AC power is off. b) Battery power is low. c) Telco line trouble. d) Point(s) (are) abnormal. e) One or more points are bypassed. f) Interlock On (if used) selected BA group cannot be turned on unless predetermined groups are on. g) ATM Off (if used) selected BA group cannot be turned on unless predetermined groups are on. 6. Reset: For resetting the following functions: a) Alarms for resetting alarms and comm failure conditions. b) Tests for resetting test alarms. c) Service Mode for ADT personnel only. 7. More: For selecting the next Action Menu. 8. See points: For viewing the status of each point controlled by this operating panel to determine whether any points are in an abnormal condition, in which case the point will be tagged with an identifier code to pinpoint the abnormality: A Cross alarm. C Comm Fail SIM or RF gateway is not communicating because it is defective or hard ID is incorrect. Also because there is a problem with the wiring of the SIM loop or the RS-485 bus. D Cross and open sensor is swinging between alarm and trouble. M Multiple response. N Normal displayed only in conjunction with a bypassed point. O Open trouble. T Tamper. X Cross and tamper alarm and tamper. Y Open and tamper trouble and tamper. Z Cross, open, and tamper alarm, trouble, and tamper. 9. Previous: Return to the previous Action Menu. 10. Test: For performing the following tests of BA group(s), sensors, and other devices controlled by this operating panel: a) Burglar Groups For verifying the system can be turned on. Also for determining the reasons the system cannot be turned on. Refer to item 5 (Turn on). b) Sensor Points For testing all system sensors without creating an alarm. The results are recorded in the history log and can be viewed at the operating panel or printed out on a printer. c) Bell and Display For a 30-second test of all systemsounding devices and for triggering a test pattern on the display of the operating panel. During the bell test, the operating panel sounder operates for 4 seconds, the Test output activates for 30 seconds, and the local bell relay activates for the final 4 seconds. Note: The test pattern shows each line as a series of 17 rectangles, each formed by dots, with an arrow at the beginning and end. d) Holdup Devices For testing holdup devices without creating an alarm. 11. Change close time: For quickly changing the temporary closing time of the BA group(s). 19-3

172 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 12. Bypass: For performing the following bypass functions in accordance with the user s privilege: a) Bypass Points for bypassing point(s). b) See Limits for determining the number of points that can be bypassed in BA groups. c) VVS for bypassing vault vibration sensor points. 13. Status: For checking that AC power, the standby battery, and the telephone lines are OK. 14. History: For viewing and/or printing up to 500 of the most recent events (alarms, troubles, openings, closings, bypassings, walk test results, etc.), including the date and time of the event. 15. Time: For entering, checking, or changing the following time-related functions for any BA group: a) Current present time and date. b) Daylight date of Daylight Saving Time. c) Holiday for sequencing through name and date of each holiday in the schedule. d) Open and Close for entering, checking, or changing the following various schedules associated with each BA group: Daily Schedules choice of permanent or temporary. Permanent schedules allow for selection of automatic on/off control. Schedule Limits choice of earliest opening and latest closing times. Note: Only users with an appropriate privilege level can control scheduling functions. 16. Sysinfo: For identifying the firmware level of the control unit. 17. Name pnt/gps: For viewing, naming, or changing the name of a protection group or a point. Also for entering complete point data. 18. ID codes: For entering, viewing, or changing user data: a) Name of user. b) Assignment of user code ID. c) Assignment of user control of BA group(s). d) Assignment of user privilege level. 19. Load: For ADT personnel only. 20. First: For returning to Action Menu #1. Overcoming Operating Panel Program Mode Lockout The default keycode 1,2,3 should be used unless the customer requests a special 3-digit code. In the event the customer is locked out of the menu screen because of an unknown code, the original code 1,2,3 can be restored as follows: Step Action 1 Power down the system. 2 Hold the [#] key depressed while powering up the system. 3 Wait 2 seconds and then let go of the [#] key (the existing parameters for the operating panel will be replaced by the factory default values, and the access code will be restored). If the contrast level is too high or low, and you can't read the screen, simultaneously press [0] and [#]. Use the middle two keys to the right of the display, pressing the appropriate key several times until the screen becomes readable and the contrast level is correct. 4 Select QUIT. 5 Simultaneously press [1] and [8] and then enter 1, 2, 3. This will bring up the parameter screen. 6 Re-program the operating panel baud rate, group number, and unit number to the proper values, and if required, change the access code. 7 Select QUIT to exit the parameter menu. When the control unit power switch is turned Off, the time of day and the date remain at the same settings as when power was removed. Present time and date must be entered anew at the operating panel; these values cannot be downline loaded. 19-4

173 Correcting COMM FAIL Condition Due to Change of Panel Group Number Section 19 System Operation If the operating panel group number is changed, the control unit will detect a communications failure on the old panel group number and a COMM FAIL message will occur. To clear the condition, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Power down the system and then power it back up. The control unit will interrogate for the new address and store it in memory. 2 Reset the COMM FAIL condition by using Reset, Alarms at the operating panel. Using the or # to Trigger a Panic Operating Panel Modes The FOCUS CADET provides the capability to trigger an audible or silent panic using either the or # key. The key must be pressed and held for 4 seconds to trigger the panic. Additionally, there is an option for selecting whether the panic is transmitted to the CCC. All programming for this feature is done only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software. The operating panel can be placed into three other modes besides the normal operating mode. These include: Service Mode This mode is used when installing or working on the system, and is initiated by entering a Service Code. Training Mode This mode allows the operating panel to be used to train customers and ADT personnel on the operation of the system. Annunciator Mode This mode is used when a facility is not ready to be occupied or the system is not totally functional. Service Mode The Service mode is used when installing or working on the FOCUS CADET system and is initiated by entering a Service Code. Operation in the Service mode is characterized by the following occurrences: The operating panel becomes activated and remains activated for 4 minutes. All other operating panels display ADT SERVICE PERSONNEL WORKING ON SYSTEM. (While in the Service mode, pressing any operating panel key causes another 4-minute activation period.) An ADT-On-Premises signal is transmitted to the central station. Customer ID codes are locked out. The tampers on the control unit are automatically bypassed. Any of the BA groups can be turned on with the cabinet tamper bypassed. The bell function is disabled except for BA alarms or test functions. Any point that is programmed as a Remote Bell Point will not operate for a BA alarm or during testing. Any output point that has been programmed as a Service mode output point activates and will remain activated for the duration of the Service mode. The Sonalert is disabled at all operating panels. A bypass signal is not transmitted to the CCC if a point is bypassed. The Recycling Exit Delay is disabled. Notes: The Service Code has all of the basic user privileges plus those additional privileges that have been allocated to the service code. Terminate the Service Mode by selecting Reset, ADT Off at the operating panel. An ADT Off Premises signal will be transmitted to the Customer Care Center, the cabinet tampers are automatically unbypassed, and the system will be restored to normal operation. 19-5

174 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide ID Codes 19-6 Training Mode For training purposes, the selector buttons and keypad of one or more operating panels can be temporarily deactivated for a trainee, while those on the instructor's panel remain active. The trainee screens reflect the messages on the instructor s operating panel, allowing the instructor to demonstrate the usage of the operating panel to the person being trained, without the lessons being interrupted by someone touching the selector buttons or the keypad. The instructor's operating panel must have a valid communication address (group 0 or 1, and unit 0-7). The trainee panels must have the same group number as the instructor's panel and a unit number of "." To activate the Training mode, perform the following steps at the trainee operating panel: Step Action 1 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. 2 Enter 1, 2, 3. The parameter screen will be displayed. 3 Press the change button and select the Unit/Mode option. 4 Enter as the new number in place of the existing unit number. To exit the Training mode, select a valid unit number in place of the "." The operating panel will revert to normal operation. Annunciator Mode The Annunciator mode is used when a facility is not ready to be occupied or the system is not totally functional. This mode deactivates the selector buttons, and the screen displays only alarm and trouble messages accompanied by the sounder. The keypad, however, will remain active locally without having any interaction with the control unit. To activate the Annunciator mode, perform the following steps: Step Action 1 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. 2 Enter 1, 2, 3. The parameter screen is displayed. 3 Press the change button and select the Unit/Mode option. 4 Enter 8 as the new number in place of a unit number. 5 Power down and then power up the system again. The operating panel may be programmed for normal operation at a future date by entering the Programming mode and entering a valid unit number. ID codes are needed to turn the BA groups on and off and to perform most other functions. On a new installation, the ID codes are entered into the control unit database along with the user name, the privilege level, and the BA groups that the code can access. This can be done by downline loading the data or by entering it via an operating panel with the system in the Service mode. Thereafter, any additions or deletions can be made at any operating panel by someone having an ID code with the privilege to do so. There are 99 six-digit ID codes that can be assigned to any system, including Service codes. The first two digits serve as a user number, and are numbered 01, 02, etc., up to 99. The last four digits (PIN) identify the access capabilities of the user. If you are entering a new ID code, the last four digits must be entered alongside the first two digits of the user number. In the event that someone leaves the company, the last four digits should be erased to invalidate the ID code. A new ID code can be assigned in either of two ways: By entering a new four-digit number alongside the two digits of the deleted code. By entering a four-digit number alongside any unused two-digit user number. In addition, the following data must be entered for the new ID code: The BA group(s) to which the user will have access. Each of the eight possible privileges that the user will have.

175 Bypassing Section 19 System Operation Bypassing is a means of directing the control unit to ignore any point(s) in the system, and therefore inhibit any output commands that would ordinarily be activated. Consequently, a bypassed input point that goes into an alarm, trouble, tamper, or comm fail condition will not cause a signal to be sent to the CCC, nor will it cause the local bell to ring or cause any output to activate. One or more points can be bypassed by entering appropriate commands at the operating panel provided that: The bypassing option has been activated for those points. The person(s) doing the bypass have been assigned an ID code with the privilege of bypassing that particular type of point (BA, FA, SPV, HUA or special). Control Unit and BA Group Options There are several programmable options associated with the control unit and the BA groups. Many of the control unit options affect all BA groups. A BA group is defined as an enclosed area that is protected by burglar alarm sensors, whose protection on/off status is controlled from an operating panel. The BA points in the system can be divided among as many as four BA groups. A separate operating panel can be used to control each BA group; or multiple groups can be controlled from the same operating panel. Each BA group is given a name by the owner, and this information is downline loaded into the control unit at the time of installation, along with the BA group options and other data. An opening and closing schedule can be assigned to a BA group, if the customer wants to he alerted in the event of: An irregular opening (certain persons entering the BA group before a specified opening time). A failure to close (BA group has not been closed by a specified closing time). Other than these instances, there is no reason for assigning opening/closing schedules, nor is there any UL requirement for assigning them. An opening and/or closing time is required for certain types of CCC service. The following is a list of the options: Option Function Code 3 Temporal Son/Bell Disable Recycle Delay CS Off Command Enable Auto Bell Test Telco Audible Turn On STAY Mode This provides for the sounding of the Code 3 temporal signal in the event of a fire alarm (1/2-sec on, 1/2-sec off for 3 seconds followed by 1 second of silence). If selected, the Code 3 signal will sound at each operating panel. This disables the recycling delay for all groups. For an explanation of how the delay works, see Recycling Exit Delay later in this section. This permits a BA group to be turned off via command from CentraScan. This causes the external bell (connected via the bell output) to "bing" at the end of any BA Group exit delay period, to verify that the bell is working. It is intended to satisfy compliance with UL 609 requirements for Local systems. If the system is transmitting closings to the CCC, then the bell will "bing" at the end of the BA exit delay if the closing has been acknowledged by the CCC (known as "ringback"), or when the acknowledgement is received after the exit delay has expired. A Telco Fail/AC Fail condition is displayed and the sounder will go on, on all operating panels whenever a phone line failure occurs. The system provides an option to turn on the group(s) in the STAY mode. When the group is turned on in STAY mode: All Movable Instant PIR (MIP) points are bypassed. All Movable Instant Stay (MIS) and Movable Delay Stay (MDS) points will not transmit messages to the central station. NOTE: STAY mode is enabled via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. 19-7

176 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Option Bypass Point Reporting Close Condition Force Auto-Arm w/ba Off-normal Condition No Close (15/15, 30/5) Closing Trouble Bell Audible on Exit Function Ordinarily, if there is a closing of a BA group with one or more BA points bypassed, a BA Group Bypass Closing message (BA1, BA2, BA3, etc.) is transmitted to the CCC as part of the closing message (not for SANS). Selecting this option activates a unique point bypass/unbypass reporting scheme: For BA Points Each BA point that has been bypassed is reported to the CCC when the associated BA group is closed. When the BA group is turned to Day Set, all of the points automatically become unbypassed, and an unbypass message is transmitted for each point. (This automatic unbypassing will not occur if a keyswitch is used or if Auto- Off control is being used for the BA group; however, an unbypass signal will be transmitted anyway.) For non-ba Points (FA, HUA, SUPV, output points, etc.) A separate bypass message is transmitted for each point at the time that the bypass is made. The points remain bypassed until they are manually unbypassed, and an unbypass message is transmitted to the CCC. Note: These points will not automatically become unbypassed when any BA group is opened. There are four choices for this option that determine whether the BA groups can be closed when there is a Telco Fail or AC Fail condition: Telco Fail and AC Fail Condition AC Fail Telco Fail AC or Telco Fail BA Group Closing The BA groups can be turned to Nite Set during AC Fail, but not during Telco Fail. The BA groups can be turned to Nite Set during Telco Fail, but not during AC Fail. Use this only if backup signaling (e.g., bell, backup dialer, etc.) is available in case a burglary occurs. The BA groups can be closed during AC Fail or Telco Fail conditions. AC or Telco Fail The BA groups cannot be closed during AC Fail or Telco Fail conditions. This permits the system to perform an auto-arm of a BA Group when an offnormal condition is present on the system. NOTE: This feature can only programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software. As the scheduled closing time nears, the operating panel sounder beeps at a rate of once per minute. This is the Close Time Reminder, and reminds the user to get ready to close. If the BA group is not closed, the sounder changes to a continuous tone and starts the Close Time Warning period. This alerts the user that the closing time has passed and a No Close signal will be sent to the CCC unless the BA group is closed before this time period ends. Two choices are available for the reminder and warning periods: 15 minutes for the reminder and 15 minutes for the warning. 30 minutes for the reminder and 5 minutes for the warning. This causes the bell to ring for 5 minutes if the customer turns the system on and exits, but fails to close the exit door before the exit delay expires. It is used to remind customer to re-enter the premises, turn the protection off, then turn it on again, leave, and close the exit door. Failure to do so will result in an entry alarm. This causes the operating panel sounder to beep once per second during the exit delay period. This is helpful in reducing the number of false alarms caused by someone exiting after the exit delay has expired. 19-8

177 Section 19 System Operation Option Bypass Privilege BA Bypass Privilege, FA/SPV/HU/Special Points Bypass FA/SPV/HU/ Special (2-Man Rule) Bypass BA (2-Man Rule) Bypass Limit Change Descriptor (2-Man Rule) Permanent Schedule (2-Man Rule) Temporary Schedule (2-Man Rule) Service (2-Man Rule) Latch Telco Fail Sonalert on Open Passcode Verification Failure from Control Auto On/Off Level Command Enable Function This permits a user to bypass any BA points that are bypassable. Similar to the option above, except that this pertains to the capability for bypassing any non-ba point in the system. Note: Special points are comprised of output points plus those input points that do not fall into any of the following categories: BA, FA, HUA, or SPV. This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-man rule option; however, it applies to the bypassing of non-ba points. Note: Both ID codes must be privileged to bypass these types of points. This activates a requirement for the entry of two valid ID codes at the same operating panel within 45 seconds in order to bypass. Upon entry of the second ID code, the bypass capability is enabled and the points can be bypassed, provided that: Both ID codes are capable of bypassing the points. The points have been programmed as being bypassable. Once exiting the bypass screen, both ID codes must be entered again. If only one ID code is entered, a message appears that a second ID code be entered. This defines the number of BA points that may be bypassed within a BA group. Any number of points can be specified. The BA group cannot be armed if the number of programmed bypasses is exceeded. This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule; however, it applies to changing the name of any BA group, a point of protection, or a person's name. Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change descriptors. This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule option; however, it applies to changing the permanent schedule of any BA group. Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change permanent schedules. This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule option; however, it applies to changing the temporary schedule of any BA group. Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change temporary schedules. To activate the Service mode, the entry of a Service Code must be followed by a valid customer ID code, at the same operating panel, within 45 seconds. This causes the Telco Fail display and the ongoing audible beeps (two beeps followed by a 1-second pause) at all operating panels to latch until manually reset. Otherwise, the display and audible will clear automatically when the fault condition restores. This causes the operating panel sounder to activate for 1 second of every minute when any BA group is in a scheduled open period, and is used to remind the user to turn the BA group off. This is used in conjunction with access control, whereby the customer maintains the permanent open/close schedules. If an attempt is made to turn a BA group off prior to the scheduled open period by someone who does not have an irregular opening privilege, the control unit will send an Irregular Opening signal to the CCC along with the user number. This signal will cause a PVF alarm. This is used to determine if any form of automatic on/off will be permitted for the BA groups. If selected, the automatic on/off can be programmed, as required, for each BA group as part of the permanent schedule. 19-9

178 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Option Telco Fail Message Inhibit AC Loss Delay Delayed Open/Close Reporting Sensor Walk LED Disable Diagnostic Xmit Enable Group 0 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit Group 1 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit BA Group Off Disable Function This permits suppressing the Telco Fail signal. It is intended to avoid having Telco Fail signals from multiple control units sent in the event that AC communications are interrupted. This permits delaying the CCC transmission of an AC Fail condition. The choices are from hours in 1-hour increments. This is intended to minimize the customer's security-related telephone bills and minimize nonessential CCC signaling. It delays the reporting of nonalarm signals, such as openings and closings that occur within scheduled time periods, until another transmission is made, at which time all openings and closings occurring that day are included. If there is no other transmission, the opening and closing information is sent between midnight and 4:15 AM, with the time of transmission tied to the customer's instrument number. For example, an instrument number of 62 corresponds to 62 minutes (1 hour and 2 minutes) past midnight. The opening and closing data would be transmitted at 1:02 AM of the next day. The delayed transmission replaces a daily test signal as a means of ensuring that the telco line is intact. This is intended to prevent someone from learning the coverage pattern of a SIM sensor. The LED will only light when walk testing or when in the Service mode. This is intended for use with a sensor that has a self-diagnostic capability. If the sensor has a decrease in false alarm immunity, a transmission is made to the CCC to signal this condition. Ordinarily, an operating panel displays the on/off status of the BA 1 group. Anyone can walk over to any operating panel and keep pressing More to view the on/off status of each of the remaining BA groups, without having to enter a valid ID code. Where, for purposes of security, the customer does not want the on/off status of one or more BA groups to be displayed, this option allows the selected BA group to be skipped and the display to show the status of the next BA group not having a Display Inhibit. This option applies to all panels that have been programmed for communication group 0 on the RS- 485 bus. The status of each inhibited BA group can still be viewed at any operating panel that has been programmed for communication group 1. This option does not affect operation once a valid code has been entered. This differs from the previous option only in that it pertains to inhibiting the display of BA group on/off status at operating panels programmed for communication group 1. This option prevents the selected BA group from being turned off by a person with a coded card/key, and can only be set from an operating panel. The operating panel can be used either in the normal manner for system control or in conjunction with an ACIU or with a BA Access output point. The primary purpose of this option is to prevent someone who finds a coded card/key outside of an access-controlled area from using it to gain access and thereby turn off this BA group. The operating panel used for turn-off should be installed inside of the protected area. This can also be used to isolate BA group(s) from those being used with access control, such as when a second BA group is within the BA group being accessed via a card/key reader

179 Section 19 System Operation Option Entry Delay Function This applies to installations where the operating panel for the BA group is located inside of the protected area. The delay permits someone opening the premises enough time to walk to the operating panel and turn the protection to Day Set without creating an alarm. The delay starts when the entrance door is opened and ends when the protection is turned off. The sounder in the operating panel emits a steady tone during the delay period. The delay time is selectable from 0 to 255 seconds, in 1-second increments. UL The entry delay, which is selectable in 1-second increments in the range of 1 to 255 seconds, must not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. Option Exit Delay Exit Fail One Exit One Open Off (2-Man Rule) Irregular Off (2- Man Rule) Function This applies to installations where the operating panel for the BA group is located inside of the protected area. The delay permits someone leaving the premises at closing enough time to turn the protection to Nite Set and walk to the exit door and close it, without creating an alarm. The delay time is selectable from 0 to 255 seconds, in 1-second increments. This is used to make sure that someone exits the BA group after turning the protection to Nite Set, and can only be used if the operating panel is located inside of the protected area. An Exit Fail signal is transmitted to the CCC if the customer turns the protection to Nite Set, but fails to trip a movable delayed sensor in the exit path within the exit delay period. This causes the exit delay period for the respective BA group to end when a movable delayed sensor is restored or the exit door is closed, after the BA group is changed to Nite Set. This option can only be used where: There is only one movable delayed sensor in the exit path, and the customer will pass through that protection only once when exiting. The customer has specifically requested it, and fully understands the operation and false alarm potential that exists if someone wants to go back for something they forgot after exiting. Ordinarily, the BA group may be repeatedly turned on and off as long as it is within the scheduled opening and closing time. This option permits only one BA group on-to-off transition per schedule (maximum of 2 per day if two schedules are used). This prevents someone from opening a BA group after it has been closed until the next scheduled opening time is reached. This prevents the BA protection for the selected BA group from being turned off unless two valid ID codes are entered on the same operating panel within 45 seconds. Once the BA group is off, the entry of any valid ID code for the group will activate the operating panel. This prevents the turning off of the selected BA group outside the scheduled open window (e.g., re-opening the same day after the scheduled closing, opening earlier than the scheduled opening, or opening on a day that the BA group is not scheduled to be opened) unless two valid ID codes are entered at the same operating panel within 45 seconds. Only one ID code is needed to open inside of a schedule window. BA Shed This allows the control unit to shed BA protection for the BA group after 4 hours of AC power failure. This permits reserving the standby batteries for FA devices to ensure 24 hours of FA standby time. The selective shedding also allows preserving the BA protection for BA group with a vault or safe by electing not to shed the protection for a power outage beyond 4 hours

180 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Option Bell Delay Bell Cutoff Function This is used to delay local annunciation of alarms for a BA group during Nite Set for up to 20 minutes. It applies to both the operating panel sounder and the local bell. Messages to the CCC, however, are sent without the delay. The delay is automatically cancelled if a telco failure occurs. This determines the length of time the local BA bell and operating panels will annunciate. The cutoff time can be any number of whole minutes from 0 to 255. UL In UL installations, the BA bell ring time should be at least 15 minutes. The Bell Delay may not be used in UL Burglary alarm systems. Option SANS Interlock On Schedule Lock ATM Off Function This represents the type of CCC monitoring that will be provided for the BA group. Refer to the System Communication section for an explanation of the types of services that are available. This prevents the protection for a BA group being from being turned on unless a specific combination of BA groups has been turned on. As an example, it can be used to ensure that the vault protection has been turned on before the bank perimeter protection can be turned on. This prevents the BA group from being turned off outside the scheduled open time period. Use this option only on safes, vaults, or other high security areas where the operating panel is located outside the protected area. This is primarily an Automatic Teller Machine (ATM) option. It prevents the protection for a BA group from being turned off unless the protection is on for specified BA group(s). Typically, it is used to prevent more than one ATM from being turned off at any given time. Recycling Exit Delay UL Recycling Exit Delay may not be used on UL Burglary alarm systems. A Recycling Exit Delay has been incorporated into FOCUS CADET to minimize the possibility of creating a false alarm when someone turns the protection On, exits, and then returns to get something that was left behind. The Recycling Exit Delay operates as follows: The BA group is turned on to start the programmed exit delay, and a 10-minute time window is started. During this time window, an alarm from a movable instant or delayed point from any group in exit delay automatically recycles all groups in exit delay back to their full exit delay time. This means that the full exit delay is usually in effect when the person exits, and the delay is recycled to start anew when that person returns and opens the door again. The exit delay also recycles for each movable point that is tripped by the person returning. The recycling of the exit delay can occur any number of times during the 10-minute time window. At the end of the 10-minute time window, the exit delay will unconditionally start timing down one last time. If the door is not closed by the end of this last exit delay, a trouble-closing signal will be sent to the CCC

181 Section 19 System Operation If the "audible on exit" option was selected for the BA group being turned on, the operating panel (and Remote Sonalert output point) beeps once per second to annunciate the exit delay period. This exit delay annunciation is interrupted during the time that a movable delayed point in that BA group is in alarm, and the sounder goes on steady during the time that a movable instant point of that BA group is in alarm. In each case, the annunciation resumes when the point restores. The Recycling Exit Delay is automatically disabled whenever the system is in Service Mode. Alarm/Trouble Memory There are 80 memories that serve to store off-normal conditions for each input point in the system, as well as store system trouble conditions. Once stored in memory, the contents remain stored until the off-normal condition has been restored to normal and a RESET command has been entered at the operating panel. The following is a listing of the memories and an explanation of the function: Memory Type Function BA Group Memories Holdup Memory Fire Alarm Memory Supervisory Memory There are 64 separate burglar alarm memories, eight for each BA group. Four memories of each BA group store the first four off-normal conditions that are detected during Day Set, and the other four memories store the first four off-normal conditions that occur during Nite Set. The off-normal conditions include point in alarm as well as the occurrence of a trouble, tamper, or comm-fail condition. Stores the first four holdup points for which an alarm is detected. Stores the first four fire points for which an alarm is detected. Stores the first four supervisory points for which an alarm is detected. Trouble Memory Stores the first four of the following events that occur: Holdup Point - comm fail, tamper, or open lasting more than 1 minute if using holdup suspicion option. Fire Alarm Point - open, tamper, or comm fail condition. Supervisory Point - open, comm fail, or tamper. Operating Panel - comm fail. Janitor Keyswitch Point - open, tamper, or comm fail. BA Keyswitch Point - comm fail. Remote Bell Point - cross, open, or comm fail. Cross indicates AC fail for 4 hours; open indicates low battery. Remote Power Supply Point - cross, open, or comm fail. Cross indicates AC fail; open indicates low battery. If a given type of memory becomes filled, it will not store a new alarm unless one of the alarms being stored is reset

182 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Input Point Assignment Control Unit Interpretation of Input Point Status & SIM Output Point Status Point NC Option = NO (1) Point NC Option = YES (2) Cross Open Cross or Open Point Comm. Failure Point Tamper (3) Point Bypass (4) NS DS NS DS NS DS NS DS NS DS Bypass Unbypass Diagnostic Test Fire FA FA FT FT FT FT FT FT FB (5) FU (5) FW Supervisory SS SS ST ST SS SS ST ST ST ST SB (5) SU (5) Holdup HA HA HT (6) HT (6) HA HA HT HT HT HT HB (5) HU (5) Holdup Special HT (7) HA (8) HT (6) HT (6) HT (7) HA (8) HT HT HT HT HB (5) HU (5) Ambush Start HA (9) HA (9) HT HT HA (9) HA (9) HT HT HT HT UB (5) UU (5) Ambush End HT HT HT HT HT HT UB (5) UU (5) BA Fixed BA BT BA BT BA BT BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BA Fixed Local (18) (18) BA BT (18) (18) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BA Movable Instant BA (11) BA BT BA (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW BA Movable Instant Day Annunciation BA (12) BA BT BA (12) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW BA Movable Delayed BA (13) (11) BA BT BA (13) (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW BA Movable Instant Chime BA Movable Delayed Chime BA Vault Vibration Sensor BA (11) BA BT BA (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW BA (13) (11) BA BT BA (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW BA (14) BT (11) BA BT BA (14) (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) BU (10) BW BA Keyswitch OP CL UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) BA Janitor Keyswitch J1 (15) J1 (15) UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) BA End Delay UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) BA Blocklock OP UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) Remote Bell UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) Remote Power Supply UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5) SIM Loop Output Point UA UT UT UT UB (5) UU (5) BA Burglar Alarm FA Fire Alarm HU Holdup Alarm Unbypass SU Supervisory Unbypass BB Burglar Alarm Bypass FB Fire Alarm Bypass JI Janitor In (key inserted) SW Supervisory Diagnostic BT Burglar Alarm Trouble FT Fire Alarm Trouble JO Janitor Out (key removed) UA Untyped Alarm BU Burglar Alarm Unbypass FU Fire Alarm Unbypass NS Nite Set UB Untyped Bypass BW Burglar Alarm Diagnostic FW Fire Alarm Diagnostic OP Opening UT Untyped Trouble, CL Closing HA Holdup Alarm SB Supervisory Bypass Tamper, or Comm Fail DS Day Set HB Holdup Alarm Bypass SS Supervisory Alarm UU Untyped Unbypass EA Entry Alarm HT Holdup Alarm Trouble ST Supervisory Trouble Note: Each transmission to central station includes a tag that specifies cause of alarm or trouble (e.g., cause of trouble as identified open, tamper, or comm fail). NOTES: 1. Typically used for sensor with transfer contacts. 2. Typically used for sensor with break-only contacts. 3. Any SIM point with a tamper. 4. Only with bypass point reporting option. 5. Bypass and unbypass signals transmitted as event occurs. 6. Open must be more than 1 minute if using suspicion option. 7. All BA groups (except BA1) are Nite Set, otherwise no transmission. 8. Any BA group (except BA1) is Day Set, otherwise no transmission. 9. Alarm only after 4-1/4 minutes; inside of ambush schedule and ambush end not activated. 10. Transmitted automatically at opening if using bypass point reporting. 11. Condition is disregarded by control unit. 12. Causes local audible only. 13. After entry delay. 14. Alarm only if BA1 is Nite Set. 15. Becomes JO (Janitor Off} when key removed. 16. Cross = AC fail. Open = low battery. 17. Transmitted automatically at closing if using bypass point reporting. 18. Local annunciation only; no CS transmission

183 S E C T I O N 2 0 Testing the System In This Section About Testing the System Operating Panel Tests Local Tests Testing the Printer Finishing the Installation Instructing the Customer Transmission Tests About Testing the System Operating Panel Tests To ensure proper operation of the FOCUS CADET system, we recommend that you test periodically all devices within the system. The test results can be printed, displayed, or audibly annunciated. Prior to testing protection groups and/or points, turn off the BA groups containing those points to be tested. Also, be sure the customer is aware of the need to perform the tests periodically. The tests are divided into three separate areas: Operating Panel Test: Tests the operating panel's keys, displays and sounder. Local Test: Tests the devices without transmitting signals to the Customer Care Center (CCC). Transmission Tests: Test the devices in normal operating mode whereby the system annunciates locally and transmits the signals to the CCC. Use the Sensor points test to verify the location of each RF transmitter for proper transmissions. These tests are for testing the keypad and the screen for proper operation. They are intended primarily for factory use, but can be done at any time in the field. To test the keypad: Step Action 1 Enter the operating panel test mode by pressing the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. 2 Once "WAIT" is displayed, enter the operating panel code (1, 2, 3). The system displays the operating panel and system information. 3 Press the firmware level (top right-hand) selector button. 4 Press the keypad keys. The number or character of each key pressed will appear in the center of the display screen, one at a time. 5 Press Quit to return to the operating panel and system information screen. 6 Press Quit again to return the normal operation screen. 20-1

184 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Local Tests To test the LCD display: Step Action 1 Enter the operating panel test mode by pressing the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. 2 Once "WAIT" is displayed, enter the operating panel code (1, 2, 3). The system displays the operating panel and system information. 3 Press the Test LCD selector button. All the pixels on the display screen light up. 4 Press any key. The screen goes blank. 5 Press any key. All alphabetic characters and numbers are displayed. 6 Press any key. The keypad test screen is displayed. 7 Press Quit to return to the operating panel and system information screen. 8 Press Quit again to return the normal operation screen. The local tests are typical of a local-only system because they do not involve the CCC. Perform a system test by activating each sensor, in turn, and verifying that the alarm condition is properly displayed on the operating panel(s), and that the panel sounder functions properly. Indicate the results on the appropriate ADT form. Inspect the system performing the various tests and battery check. If problems are encountered, troubleshoot and repair as needed. Before performing the Burg pts audibly test (described in Additional Test Options shown later in this section), all points to be tested in this mode must be bypassed. Enter the Service Code and then proceed as follows: <? Enter choice: Action Menu #1 is displayed. < Lesson Turn on > Select More. < See alarms Reset > < Quit More > <? Enter choice: < See points Test > < Change close time > < Previous More > <? Test: Burglary groups > Sensor points > < Quit More > Action Menu #2 is displayed. Select Test. The Test Screen is displayed. Select Burglary groups to test a particular BA Group. Select Sensor points to test particular types of points within a BA Group. Select More to display additional test options (Bell & Display and Burg points audibly). Select Quit to return to Action Menu #2. When any of the Local Tests are selected, the sensitivity of the RF receiver is reduced by approximately 50% if RF points are programmed in the system,. 20-2

185 Section 20 Testing the System Burglary Groups <? Test which grp: BA Group 1 > < Previous Next > < Quit > Sensor Points Transmission Tests <? Sensor Type? Burglar > Fire > < Quit > Additional Test Options <? Test: Bell & display > Burg pts audibly > < Quit Previous > If test Burglary groups was selected, this screen is displayed. Select the second key down on the right-hand side to initiate the test for the BA group displayed and to show the test results. Select Previous to select the previous BA group. Select Next to select the next BA group. Select Quit to return to the Test Screen. If test Sensor points was selected, this screen is displayed. Select Burglar to test burglar points in a particular BA group. Select Fire to test fire points in the system. Select Holdup to test holdup points in the system. At the next prompt, select the BA group, if applicable. At the next series of prompts, select More, More, More, Start Test. Then activate all sensors that require testing (open/close doors and windows, walk in front of motion detectors, etc). To see the results, view the history log. NOTE: The operating panel beeps once every minute until the test is reset. Select Quit to return to the Test Screen. If More was selected at the first Test Screen this screen is displayed. Note: For the Burg pts audibly test to operate correctly, all points being tested must be bypassed before performing the test. Select Bell & display to test output points programmed as Bell and to test the operating panel s display. During the 30-second bell test, the operating panel sounder operates for 4 seconds, the Bell output point (if used) activates for 30 seconds, and the local bell relay activates for the final 4 seconds. Select Burg pts audibly and then activate all sensors that require testing (open/close doors and windows, walk in front of motion detectors, etc). The activation of each sensor should cause the operating panel sounder to annunciate. Select Quit to return to Action Menu #2. These tests are performed with the system in a normal mode of operation. The system produces alarm and trouble indications locally and also transmits the appropriate signal to the CCC. Be sure the customer and the CCC are aware that these tests are being conducted so that the police or fire department is not dispatched. To perform the transmission tests, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Notify the CCC before starting the transmission tests. 2 Plug the modular telco line plugs into the respective RJ31X Jacks. 3 Cause an alarm condition from each point designated burglar, fire, supervisory, and holdup, and restore each point. 4 Cause a trouble condition from each of the above points, and restore the trouble. 5 During the course of transmission, while performing either Step 3 or 4, lift the receiver of any telephones connected on the same phone line to determine by the absence of a dial tone that they have been disconnected from the line. 20-3

186 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Step Testing the Printer Action 6 If you are using the backup dialer, temporarily disconnect the primary line and verify signaling over the secondary line. 7 Verify that all signals have been received at the CCC. 8 Notify the CCC that the tests have been completed. To test the printer, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Enter the Service Code to display Action Menu 1. 2 Select More twice to display Action Menu 3. 3 Select History to display the History Screen. 4 Select On printer. 5 Select Last 60 events. 6 Select Start Print. Finishing the Installation 7 Verify that the printer is printing the last 60 events. 8 Select Continue and Previous twice to exit. To finish the installation, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Exit the Service mode, and select Reset ADT off. 2 Put all forms, which must be stored with the control unit, inside the front cover of the cabinet. 3 Close and lock control unit cabinet. 4 Check that an instruction label is included on the back of each operating panel installed. Instructing the Customer Instruct the customer in the use of the operating panel, including the availability of the help screens. Give the customer the FOCUS CADET User Guide. 20-4

187 S E C T I O N 2 1 Specifications In This Section Electrical/Mechanical Specifications Approvals Installation Criteria Electrical/Mechanical Specifications AC Transformer For Secondary Wire Runs Up to 10 in Length Battery (standby) Type 50VA Transformer 72VA Transformer Charge Voltage to Battery Float Charging Voltage Fuse (FS) Low-Battery Signal Low-Battery Cutoff Control Unit Power Output to RS-485 Bus Nominal with AC Connected Max. Current Fuses Fl (RS485 #1) 120V, 60 Hz (Primary) 18V, 60 Hz, 50VA or 72VA (Secondary) 12VDC Sealed lead-acid battery 7AH min. - 24AH max. 7AH min AH max VDC (nominal) PTC Resetable Fuse (nonreplaceable) 12.0VDC (nominal) 9.8VDC 13.65VDC 1.0A (Actual allowed is conditioned on Standby Battery capacity provided; see below PTC Resetable Fuse (nonreplaceable) Maximum RS-485 Bus Load Current (Standby Condition) 4-Hr. (7AH Battery) 1.0A 24-Hr. (34.4AH Battery) 1.0A 72-Hr. (34.4AH Battery) 132mA 21-1

188 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Installation Criteria Control Unit Current Draw Standby Alarm Temperature Range Dimensions 300mA 440mA 32 F (0 C) to 120 F (49 C) 18" H x 14-1/2" W x 4.3" D Maximum Cable Runs RS-485 Bus 4000 Feet SIM Loop Trunk 2000 Feet Branch Cable for SIM Sensors 100 Feet Note: RS-485 bus and gateway trunk cable lengths may be less, depending on current loading and voltage drop considerations. RF Gateway Dimensions Temperature Range Gateway Circuit Power Requirement Worst Case Gateway (End of Standby Period) Tamper Approvals Control Unit Operating Panel Printer Interface Unit 4.25 H x 6.44 W x 1.25 D 32 F (0 C) to 120 F (49 C) 50mA 12.1VDC 8.4VDC Cover included (pry-off kit available for UL listing) Cover and pry-off Cover and pry-off The FOCUS CADET System is approved by the following approval agencies for listing: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Factory Mutual (FM) California State Fire Marshall The FOCUS CADET System complies with UL609, UL611, UL864, UL985, UL1023, UL1610, UL1635, NFPA71, and NFPA72, and will be submitted for approval to various European agencies. 21-2

189 Section 21 Specifications Access Control Interface Unit Electrical/Mechanical Specifications The Access Control Interface Unit is designed to meet the following specifications: Size 7-1/4" x 4-1/4" (18.4cm x 10.8cm) Housing Housing Unit Operating temperature range 32 F (0 C) to 120 F (49 C). Power required 60mA (includes float charge for standby battery) Nominal operating voltage 12VDC (End of Standby Period) 8.5VDC Standby battery 12VDC, 0.8AH Max. cable distance to reader/strike 150 feet Max. current to strike 550mA Approvals for the ACIU The Access Control Interface Unit is approved by the following approval agencies for listing: Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL) Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Factory Mutual (FM) California State Fire Marshall The FOCUS CADET System complies with UL294 (Access), UL864 (Fire), UL1635 (DACT), UL1076 (Proprietary), UL1610 (CCC), and NFPA72, and will be submitted to various European agencies. 21-3

190 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide 21-4

191 S E C T I O N 2 2 Equipment In This Section Basic System Equipment SIM Sensors Basic System Equipment The ordering information presented below is for basic items such as the control unit, gateways, operating panels, etc., as well as replacement parts. For ordering information for all other system equipment such as, sensors, etc., see the equipment's installation instructions. Where applicable, each item states its current draw in alarm and standby (normal) as follows: AI = Alarm current and SI = Standby current. Control Unit (472511/472514) This is the main control and primary power supply for the FOCUS CADET System. Consists of a steel cabinet, finished in beige, with a key-locked front cover that is hinged. Cabinet houses a control board/power supply and has space for two separately ordered 12-volt sealed lead-acid batteries (up to two 17.2AH max.). Control board has facilities for connecting the following separately ordered items: A. Up to eight Operating Panels. B. One ( ) Printer Interface Unit (supervised). C. One RF Gateway. D. Up to four Access Control Interface Units (ACIU) with card/key readers. The combined total number of operating panels, printers, ACIUs, and gateways must not exceed 31. Control unit nominal output voltage on quad trunk is 12VDC. See the Power Requirements section to determine the need for auxiliary power. AI=440mA, SI=300mA 5422-W Assault Sensor Assault Sensor is required if control unit is mounted outside of protected area. Sensor is installed inside of control unit housing and serves same function as a lining. Must be wired to tamper terminals of control unit Operating Panel Controls all operations of the FOCUS CADET System; can be used to control all or any combination of the four BA groups. Panel is interactive and features a four-line LCD screen and an alphanumeric keypad. Panel measures 8"w x 4-1/2" H x 1-1/2" D and is normally surface mounted. The keypad can optionally be mounted on a desk, with a Desk Stand; or angle wall-mounted, using a Angle Bracket. The unit may be protected from damage using an STI Model 6550 Widebody Keypad Protector. Up to 8 keypads may be used with the FOCUS CADET system. AI=65mA, SI=32mA 22-1

192 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Sensor Interface Module (SIM) For interfacing any sensor (that is not already equipped with a SIM) to the SIM Loop. Also used for controlling an output function (via + 12V output). Comes with 6" flying leads for marking connections and a End-of-Line Resistor (33K ohm, 5%, 1/2W). If SIM cannot be installed in associated device, it must be installed in a separately ordered (7032) Junction Box. AI=SI=1mA For information on sensors with built-in SIM, see SIM Sensors later in this section Battery, 12-Volt, 7.0AH Sealed Lead-Acid A 12V, 7.0AH rechargeable battery with male tab terminals. Connects to control or power supply via a separately ordered Battery Wire Lead. Two to four batteries may be connected in parallel to make up a 12V, 14, 21, or 28AH battery. Battery weighs 6.17 pounds (28kg). One Battery Wire Lead is required to connect each battery. Refer to the installation section of control unit bulletin for instruction in calculating battery standby requirements Battery Wire Leads Consists of a set of two wire leads, one red and one black. Used for connection to a FOCUS CADET control board or Remote Power Supply. Two sets of the battery wire leads are needed for installing two batteries in parallel to provide a 12V, 14AH battery configuration. Each wire lead is 13-1/2" long; wire size is 18 AWG Printer Interface Unit Used to interface a FOCUS Type printer into the system. Consists of a printed wiring board that is housed in a separately ordered Housing Unit. Board has screw terminals for making connections to the RS-485 bus and for connecting 12VAC power, and a header for making connections to a ( ) Printer Kit or a Secure Printer Kit. A jumper plug serves to connect a user bus-terminating resistor where required. A Transformer must be ordered separately. A separately ordered Tamper Kit is available. AI=SI=0mA Power Unit and Battery Housing A cabinet for housing the components needed to provide additional power for the FOCUS CADET System. Cabinet comes with a key lock and two keys. Power can be introduced directly to the RS-485 Bus (via the red and black wires). Cabinet comes with hardware for mounting internal components, assembly instructions, and basic battery leads. Facilities are provided for housing the following items, all of which must be ordered separately, as needed: Power Supply Module (for providing 12VDC power). Module comes with terminals for connecting an input transformer, making battery connections, connecting the 12V output power, and for connecting a SIM to supervise the application of AC power. Power supply output rating is 1.5A if using a 50VA input transformer, and 2.5A if using an 82VA input transformer. One required Transformer (72VA), or or N8167 Transformer (50VA), or Transformer (50VA), or Transformer (82VA), or Transformer (50VA, hardwire), as required. One required Battery (up to 4), as required. One set of Battery Leads with slip-on terminals are provided. Order another set of leads for each additional battery SIM (for supervision of AC power). One required Power Unit This power unit comes with a built-in supervisory circuit that monitors the loss of AC and low battery V, 72VA Transformer 18VAC/72VA wired-in transformer, which may be required for some commercial fire installation. VISTA-ULAP Attack-Proof Kit Hardware kit required for UL-certified burglary service. 22-2

193 RF Gateway Section 22 Equipment Consists of a 5800ADT RF Gateway Module and one 5881H RF Receiver. One additional 5881H may be added for redundancy or to improve reception. AI=SI=50mA 7800ADT LRR Gateway For allowing the interfacing with the 7845C Long Range Radio to the RS-485 bus A Backup Dialer AI=SI=50mA The backup dialer module can provide an alternate means of communication that may be required for some commercial fire alarm installations. AI=15mA, SI=5mA Loop Interface Module (LIM) The LIM connects to the trunk of a SIM loop and it functions like a SIM, but it employs a 2-wire protection loop that is supervised for grounds. Consequently, it can be used for retrofit applications involving sensors connected to a 2-wire loop, fire alarm applications that require a ground-supervised loop, and other applications in which a SIM cannot be used for one reason or another RS-485 Repeater The repeater serves as a signal regenerator that can extend the reach of a FOCUS control unit RS-485 bus up to 4000 feet for a single run. Additionally, it can be used for T-tapping the RS-485 bus Transformer A 120/12V, 20VA, Class II transformer for supplying primary power to the Printer Interface Unit Housing Unit The Housing Unit is used to house one relay module. Consists of a white plastic box with hinged cover (3-1/2" L x 3-l/2" W x 1-5/8" D) Housing Unit The Housing Unit is used to house two keyswitch interfaces or a printer interface unit. Consists of a white plastic box with hinged cover (9-1/4" L x 5" W x 1-5/8" D) (23.5cm x 12.78cm x 4.1cm) SIM Relay Module Kit Quad Trunk Cable (B6465) Four-conductor trunk cable (off white/sheathed, formerly blue) that is used for the RS-485 bus to connect gateways, operating panels, and printer interface. It is also used for the gateway trunk. Suitable for BA and FA applications. Consists of two #19 AWG and two #16 AWG solid conductors; colors are black, red, yellow, and blue. Length of cable run is limited by a maximum allowable voltage drop, as explained in the Installation section of the applicable technical bulletin. Cable is resistant to spread of fire. Supplied in 500-ft. (152m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLR Plenum Quad Trunk Cable (B6467) Four-conductor trunk cable similar to Cable, but with Teflon (or equivalent) insulation for use in plenums. Jacket color is red. Cable has fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics. Supplied in 1000-ft. (304m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLP /2 FPL White Cable Cable consists of a white jacket over two #18 AWG solid conductors (yellow and blue). Used for making branch connections to SIM sensors. Wire is resistant to spread of fire. Supplied in 1000 ft. spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPL. Splice to quad trunk cable using Scotchlok #558 connectors. 22-3

194 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Plenum FPFP 18/2 Red Cable Wire Two-conductor #18 AWG solid wire with yellow and blue insulation, similar to cable, but with Teflon (or equivalent) insulation for use in plenums. Jacket color is red. Cable has fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics. Supplied in 1000 ft. spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLP. Splice to Quad Trunk Cable using Scotchlok #558 connectors. Single conductor (#16 AWG solid) wire, in a green jacket, used for making ground connections to the control unit. Wire is resistant to spread of fire. Supplied in 100 ft. (30.4m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is CL Cable (B6476-2) Cable consists of two #18 AWG solid conductors (black and red) for connecting transformer power to control or remote power supply. Cable comes with white sheath, is fire resistant and is supplied in 500- ft. (152m) spools Cable (6481) Cable is used for wiring the operating panels to the RS-485 User Bus. Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuit Riser Cable (FPLR), Class 3 Inside BA Riser Cable (CL3R). Cable consists of two twisted pair #22 AWG wires and comes in a 500-foot spool. Jacket is beige and wire colors are black, red, yellow, and blue. Note: For other wire, refer to T Common Equipment Technical Data Sheet Trunk Junction Box A small white plastic junction box for dressing up the trunk-to-branch cable splices. Snaps over wire and Scotchlok connectors. Made of a flame-retardant polypropylene and designed to be used in a plenum Junction Box (7032) A small gray plastic junction box for housing the stand-alone SIM module when making connections to a sensor, and for general wire splices Connector Scotchlok #558 electrical connector (T-tap type). Used for solid and stranded wires of 16 to 22 AWO. UL approved. Supplied in a box of Ground Clamp (B466) A clamp that is attached to a 3/4" to 1-1/2" cold-water pipe for CWG connection Ground Clamp Tag SIM Sensors A clamp that is attached to a 1/2" to 1" cold-water pipe for CWG connection. A tag for attaching to a ground clamp warning subscriber not to remove clamp FA Pull Station (w/sim) Manual FA Pull Box similar to a (5060-S) except has a built-in SIM. It is a dual-action, singlestage device with keyed reset. Semi-flush mounts in single-gang switchbox (purchased locally) or surface mounts in Backbox. May also require Backplate or Break Rod, each of which is listed in T FOCUS System Common Equipment Technical Data sheet. Communicates with a SIM Loop via two-wire connection. AI= SI=1mA 22-4

195 Holdup Alarm Switch (W/SIM) Section 22 Equipment A finger-operated holdup device similar to a ( ) Holdup Alarm Switch, except it has a built-in SIM. It is a dual-action latching device that requires user to insert a finger and then pull to activate a holdup alarm. Includes Reset Tool, which must be used to restore switch to normal condition. Also includes mounting hardware and a 11 (3.4m) captive cable. Communicates with a SIM loop via two-wire connection. AI= SI=1mA Supervised Horn/Strobe SIM A stand-alone SIM for interfacing various types of horn/strobes (that are not already equipped with a SIM) to the SIM Loop. Current of horn or strobe must be less than 300mA each. Also used for controlling an output function where the +12V output must be supervised. Comes with 6" flying leads for making horn/strobe connections. Horn/Strobe SIM can be installed in the horn backbox or in a separately ordered (7032) Junction Box. AI=SI=3mA 450SIM PIR (w/sim') A Sentrol model AP450 Passive Infrared Detector that includes a built-in SIM. It provides 9 curtains of detection of motion in two jumper selectable ranges, 33 ft. and 50 ft. Recommended mounting height is 6 to 10 ft. Communicates with the SIM Loop via a two-wire connection. Refer to the manufacturer s installation instructions for further details. AI=5mA, SI=1.78mA 663SIM PIR (w/472366sim) A Sentrol model AP633 Passive infrared Detector that includes a standalone SIM (472366) housed in the same enclosure. When using this device Option 3 MUST be set to NO. It provides the detection of motion in selectable ranges extending 40 ft.; 80 ft. (wide); and 200 ft. (long range) in 12 selectable patterns. Features Step Focus Curtain technology. Communicates with the SIM Loop via a twowire connection. Refer to the manufacturer s installation instructions for further details. AI=25mA, SI=13mA 669SIM Dual Optic Technology Ceiling Mount PIR (w/sim) A Sentrol model AP669 Passive Infrared Detector that includes a built-in SIM. The unit provides two independent 180 fields of view, enabling the detector to cover a single 180 area or two 180 areas (360 ). Features 60 ft. diameter 360 coverage, 18 full curtains and can be mounted from a height of 8 to 16 ft. without changing lenses. Communicates with the SIM Loop via a two-wire connection. Refer to the manufacturer s installation instructions for further details. AI=11mA, SI=6mA 429CTAD Smoke Detector (w/sim) An ESL Model 429CTAD Smoke Detector that includes a built-in SIM. Includes a pulse/alarm LED indicator and a self-test feature that is under program control. Utilizes self-diagnostics that provide complete verification, and CCC annunciation of drifts beyond its sensitivity range. When detector needs servicing, replace optical block cover (ESL Model 211). Communicates with a SIM Loop via twowire connection. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for further details. AI=3mA, SI=1mA Door Contact (w/slm) An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount white magnetic door contact with built-in SIM. Unit measures 2-1/2" L x 1/2" W x 1/2" H and is furnished with an 11-foot (3.4m) cable. Communicates with a SIM Loop via two-wire connection. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for further details. AI=, SI=1mA Door Contact Spacer An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount white magnetic door contact spacer. (2-1/2" L x 1/2" W x 1/8" H) S Overhead Door Contact (w/sim) An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount waterproof overhead door magnetic contact with built-in SIM. Unit measures 4-5/16" L x 1-11/16" W x 3/8" H and is furnished with a 24" armored metal cable. Communicates with a SIM Loop via two-wire connection. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for further details. AI=, SI=1mA 22-5

196 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Fuse Holder Kit For preventing the "pulling down" of power from a SIM loop due to a short circuit on one of the power wires of a branch cable. One required for each sensor where branch cable from SIM loop drops to within 6 feet of the floor (e.g., overhead door contact) or where branch cable may be subject to a short circuit due to jarring or other mechanical stress. Consists of an in-line fuse holder with 6" leads and an /10 Amp fuse. DV1201 FOCUS-VVS Vault and Safe Vibration Sensor ( , Lot 2) Used in reverberant or nonreverberant vaults, each sensor has a protection radius of 13 (4m) on poured concrete or steel, 6-1/2' (2m) on concrete block, or 3-1/4' (1m) on brick. It can be mounted on wall, floor, or ceiling. A minimum of three per vault are required to detect structurally borne vibration associated with penetration attempts by thermic lance, mechanical tools, or explosives. Sensor is enclosed in beige aluminum cover, and includes cover/pry-off tamper, sensitivity/ambient-noise test point, sensitivity adjust screw, and terminal strip. Supplied with aluminum mounting plate, all mounting hardware, and an Cosmotron VVT-305 Remote Test Oscillator. The remote test oscillator can be powered from the same SIM used to supervise the alarm contacts. Use Protection Box to protect the detector in severe environments. Use a Cosmotron VVM-302 Recess Mounting Box (FB) when the detector is mounted in a concrete wall. A minimum of two per safe are required (minimum of three if safe has two doors) to detect structurally borne vibration associated with penetration attempts. Each sensor has maximum protection radius of 12' (3.6m) when used on an all-steel safe at least 1 (24.4mm) thick or on a concrete-clad safe at least 6" (152.4mm) thick and free of cracks or seals. May be mounted outside or inside safe. Refer to technical bulletin T for additional details. AI=, SI=25mA Power Supply Module The module comes with terminals for connecting an input transformer, for connecting a battery, for 12VDC output power connections, and for connecting a SIM to supervise the application of AC power. The power supply output rating is 1.5A when using the 50VA input transformer and is 2.5A when using the 82VA input transformer. 22-6

197 Index? Hour Alarm Wire Smoke Detectors TR SNF U U Loop Extender Module Polling Loop Extender Wire Smoke Detector Reset Wire Smoke Detectors Series Transmitters , MN MC , 6-9, ENHC , 6-9, H P P Programming Tool ADT R C C Long Range Radio C PRO Mode SE About Access Control About Operating the System About the Bell Output and Auxiliary Relay About the Control Unit About the FOCUS CADET System About the Gateways About the Hardwired Points About the History Log About the J5 Output Triggers About the Operating Panels About the Real-Time Clock About the System Communication AC Fail , 19-8 AC Fail Setting AC Loss Delay AC Power to the Control Unit AC Transformer AC Transformer Alarm Current Access Capability Access Control , 10-1 Access Control Card/Key Readers Access Control Interface Unit Access Control Interface Units (ACIU) Access Control Options Access Control Using Operating Panel Access Denied , 10-14, Access Level Access/Passcode Schedule Supervision (ACS) ACIU ACIU in the CCC Transmission Action Menu # Action Menu # Action Menu # Action Menu # Action Menus Activate When Turned On Activating the Operating Panel Adding or Changing an ID Code Addressing and Programming the RF Receiver Addressing the Operating Panels Addressing the Printer Interface Unit Ademco AB ADEMCO Contact ID Format Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock Adjusting the Contrast Level ADT EOL Relay Module ADT SERVICE PERSONNEL WORKING ON SYSTEM Alarm Events Only (SANS) Alarm Housing Alarm in a Selected BA Group Alarm in any BA Group , 9-4, Alarm/Trouble Memory Alarms/Point Status Ambush End Ambush Schedule Ambush Start Annunciator Mode Approvals Arming Assault Sensor Assigning Access and Privileges for ACIU ATM Off Audible on Exit Auto Bell Test Auto On/Off Auto On/Off Level Command Enable Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Current Load Auxiliary Relay Features B BA Access , BA Bell and Vault Sensor Test , BA Blocklock BA Fixed , BA Group Assignment , BA Group Memories BA Group Off Disable BA Keyswitch BA Lights , BA Off , BA Remote Sonalert , BA Schedule , BA Shed Backup Dialer Backup Telephone Line Supervision Index-1

198 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Basic Hardwired Points Basic System Equipment Battery (standby) Battery Capacity Worksheet Battery Charger Fail Test Battery Charger Supervision Battery Current Worksheet Battery Lead Supervision Battery Selection Table Battery Size Limits Battery Supervision Battery Wire Leads Bell Bell & Display Test Bell Box Tamper , 4-5 Bell Cutoff Bell Delay Bell Output BELL OUTPUT CURRENT LOAD Bell Output Features Bell Output Supervision BR User # Screen Burg pts audibly Test Button RF Buzzer Bypass , Bypass BA (2-Man Rule) Bypass FA/SPV/HU/ Special (2-Man Rule) Bypass Limit Bypass Point Reporting Bypass Privilege, BA Bypass Privilege, FA/SPV/HU/Special Points Bypass Screen Bypass: Bypassing , 19-7 C Cabinet Lock Cabinet tamper , 18-2 Calling ADT to initiate changes CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS...A-2 Cancel Date Carbon Monoxide Card Readers Card/Key Reader Operation CCC Options Screen CCC Signaling CDR SCH Central Station , 13-9 Change close time Change Descriptor (2-Man Rule), Character Entry Screen , 14-3 Charge Voltage to Battery Class A Fire Loop Close Condition Close Time Reminder Close Time Timer Close Time Warning Closing Trouble Bell Code 3 Temporal Son/Bell Code Enforcement...vi Code Makeup Comm Fail COMM FAIL Common BA Communication Group Number and Unit Number Communication Screen , 16-2 Compass downloading software Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices Compatible Detectors for 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter Compatible SIM Loop Devices Complement Connecting the Telephone Lines Connecting the Transformer Construction Mode Contact ID Event Codes Control Unit , 22-1 Control Unit and BA Group Options Control Unit Power Supply Load Conventions Used in This Manual... xi CS Off Command Enable Current Daylight Saving Screen Current Loads for the SIM Loop and Each Gateway Current Time and Date Screen Customer Care Center D Daylight Saving Time Delayed Open/Close Reporting Descriptors Diagnostic Xmit Enable Disable Recycle Delay Disarm Displaying the History Log DLL aborted Dorado Downline Loading , 18-6 Downline Loading Signals Duress Signal Dynamic Signaling Delay Dynamic Signaling Priority E Early Open Early Open/ Late Close Earth Ground Connections Earth Ground to the Control Unit Entry Delay Event Code Exit Delay Exit Fail Exit Pushbutton , 13-6 F FCC Part 15 STATEMENT... A-1 FCC PART 68 NOTICE... A-1 Features Features of the ACIU Fire , Fire Alarm , 13-3 Fire Alarm Application Note... vi Index-2

199 Index Fire Alarm Codes...vi Fire Alarm Memory Fire Door Application Fire Marshall Code Fire with Verification First Fixed Fixed Local Force Auto-Arm G Gateway Off Normal Conditions Gateway Screen Gateways General Description Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Group 0 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit Group 1 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit Group Assignment Screen Group Info Screen Group Number Guidelines for Programming Schedules H Handshake Hard ID Screen History History Log History Log Alpha and Event Codes History Log Entries Holdup , 13-3, Holdup Alarm Holdup Memory Holdup Special Holdup Suspicion , 13-8, Holiday Schedules Horn/Strobe , Horn/Strobe (Code 3) I ID Code Privileges ID codes ID Codes , 18-1, 19-6 Independently powered sensor Inhibit BA Input and Output Point Types Input Point Options Input Point Status Input Point Types Installing a Power Supply Installing SIM and SIM Sensors Installing the Access Control Interface Unit Installing the Control Unit Installing the Control's Circuit Board Installing the External Sounders Installing the Operating Panels Installing the Standby Battery Interlock On Irregular Off (2-Man Rule) J J5 Output Triggers Janitor Keyswitch , 13-4 Janitor Point Janitor Privilege , 13-6 K Key Readers Keyloks , 10-7 Keyswitch Kissoff L Latch Latch Telco Fail Late Close LED Lesson Light LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM... A-3 List of Figures...x Load Load Diagram for the RS-485 Bus Local Closing Supervision (LCS) Local Tests Lockout of Operating Panel , 19-5 Log Log Event Long Range Radio Gateway Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions Long Range Radios Loop Interface Module (LIM) , 22-3 LRR Gateway , 22-3 M Main Telephone Line Supervision Maintenance of the Access Control Interface Unit Manual Access Pushbutton , 13-6 Marlok Keylok Maximum Cable Runs Medical Mnemonic , More Motorola Mounting and Wiring the Operating Panel Mounting and Wiring the Printer Interface Unit Mounting and Wiring the RF Receiver Mounting the Access Control Interface Unit Mounting the Cabinet Mounting the RF Gateway Movable Delayed Movable Delayed Chime Movable Delayed Stay Movable Instant Movable Instant Chime Movable Instant Daytime Annunciation Movable Instant PIR Movable Instant Stay Index-3

200 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide N Name pnt/gps Naming BA Groups National Electric Code National Fire Alarm Protection Association...vi National Life Safety Code...vi New User Screen No Alarm Response No Close Normally Closed Contact O Off (2-Man Rule) Off Normal Condition One Exit One Open Opening/Closing Schedules Operating Panel , 22-1 Operating Panel Features Operating Panel Modes Operating Panel Program Mode Operating Panel Sounder Operating Panel Tests Operating Panels Option , 13-9, Option 1 Screen Option , Option 2 Screen Option , Option 3 Screen Output Functions Output Link (Option 2) Output Point Options Output Point Status Output Point Types , 13-9 P pager message Paging Service Passcode No Schedule Supervision (PCNS) Passcode Schedule Supervision (PCS) Passcode Verification Failure Passcode Verification Failure from Control PCB CURRENT Permanent Schedule (2-Man Rule) Permanent Schedules Person Access Screens Person Data Entry Screen Person s Name Screen Physical Description of ACIU Physical Description of the Printer Interface Unit Point Data Point Info Screen Point Link...9-3, 13-8, 13-11, Point Link Screen Point Number Point Type Screen Point Types Associated with Access Control Points 3 and 4 Style "D" (Class A Fire Loop) Power Requirements , 12-1 Power Unit Housing Powering the FOCUS CADET Powering Up the Control Unit Previous Primary Phone Number Screen Printer Interface Unit , 22-2 Printing the History Log Printout Printout of FOCUS CADET History Log Programming Programming for Downline Loading Programming for Style D Configuration Programming ID Codes Programming Mechanics Programming Point Data Programming the BA Groups Turn-Off Data Programming the Bell Output Programming the Output Triggers Programming the System Communication Options , 14-7 Protection On/Off Q Quit R Readers Real-Time Clock Recycling Exit Delay Remain On Remote Bell Remote Power Supply Reporting Formats Reset Resetting Resetting Glassbreak Detectors RF Gateway , 21-2, 22-3 RF Gateway & RF Receiver Standby and Alarm Loads RF Information Screen RF Programming Screen RF Receiver RPX-264 Pushbutton RS-485 Bus RS-485 BUS CURRENT LOAD RS-485 Bus Load Current RS-485 Cable Types RS-485 Repeater S SANS Schedule Lock Schedule Lockout Schedules/Time Scheduling Scheduling Options Screen Duration See alarms See points Self-Test Index-4

201 Index Sensor Interface Module Sensor Interface Module (SIM) Sensor Walk LED Disable Service , 13-9 Service (2-Man Rule) Service Code Service Mode Service Telephone Jack Service Terminal Phone Number Screen Setting the Address of the Operating Panel Setting the Time and Date Silence SIM SIM Loop SIM Loop Applications SIM Loop Log Form SIM Loop Standby and Alarm Loads SIM Loop Supervision SIM Sensors , 22-4 Smoke Power Reset Sonalert on Open Specifications Standby Battery Size Standby Current Limits Status STAY mode Strobe Style D Configuration Successful Transmission Super-Degraded Mode Supervised RF Supervision of ACIU Supervision of the Printer Interface Units Supervisory , 13-4, Supervisory Alarm Supervisory Memory Sysinfo System Communication System Layout Diagram System Number Screen System Operation System Self-Supervisory Signals System Sensor System Sensor EOL Relay Module System Trouble , System-powered sensor T Table of Privileges Tamper Telco Audible Telco Backup Telco Fail Telco Fail Message Inhibit Telco Fault , TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS...A-1 Temporary Schedule (2-Man Rule) Temporary Schedules Test Test Screen Testing Testing Burglary Groups Testing the Printer Testing the System Testing the Transmitters Time Time Screen TOTAL PERIPHERALS CURRENT LOAD Training Mode Transformer Transmission Tests Transmitter Battery Life Transmitter Input Types Transmitter Supervision Trouble Memory Troubleshooting ACIU Turn on Turn On STAY Mode Types of Customer Care Center Service U Unlock Time Unsupervised RF User Access Limitations User Number V Vault Vibration Sensor , 13-3 Verifying the Downline Loaded Data Viewing VISTA-ULAP Attack-Proof Kit Voltage Drops along the RS-485 Bus Voltage for the SIM Loop, Each Gateway and Operating Panel W Warnings and Limitations... A-1 Waterflow Wiegand Wiegand Output Weatherized Keypad Wiring Bell Output Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Points Wiring the Access Control Interface Unit Wiring the Auxiliary Relay Wiring the Electric Door Strike Wiring the Hardwired Points Wiring the RF Gateway Worksheets to calculate the total current X XMIT Denied XMIT Invalid Y Yuasa Index-5

202 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide Index-6

203 A P P E N D I X A Warnings and Limitations FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) Part 15 STATEMENT NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/tv technician for help. IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X (CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs. FCC PART 68 NOTICE This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment uses the following jacks: An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved. There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. This equipment is hearing-aid compatible. When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening. A-1

204 FOCUS CADET Installation and Setup Guide CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 NOTICE The Industry Canada Label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications company to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. AVIS L étiquette d Industrie Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le matériel est conforme aux normes de protection, d exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les documents concernant les exigences techniques relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère n assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l utilisateur. Avant d installer ce matériel, l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L abonné ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées cidessus n empêche pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situations. Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par le fournisseur. L entreprise de télécommunications peut demander à l utilisateur da débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la source d energie électrique, de lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations d eau métalliques, s il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les régions rurales. Avertissement : L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir racours à un service d inspection des installations électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas. AVIS : L indice d équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d une interface téléphonique peut consister en une combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d indices d équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n excède pas 5. A-2

205 Appendix A Warnings and Limitations WARNING! THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons. For example: Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device. Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly. Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path. A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough. While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death. Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows. Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90 to 105 F (32 to 40 C), the detection performance can decrease. Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic. Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders. Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately. This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time. The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad (and remote keypad) should be tested as well. Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions. Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system. Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments. A-3

206 A-4 Appendix A - Warnings and Limitations

207 Appendix A Warnings and Limitations. NOTES NOTE 1: The combined standby current drawn from aux pwr and SIM loop can not exceed 1.0A. The combined alarm current drawn from aux pwr, SIM loop and bell 1 cannot exceed 1.5A when , or N8167 transformer is used. NOTE 2: Use k EOLR for listed fire installations. (supplied) NOTE 3: See instructions for max. # of keypads and wire run length restrictions or N8167 plug-in transformer (optional) INPUT: 120VAC, 0.59A, 60 Hz connect to unswitched outlet OUTPUT: 18VAC, 50VA wired-in transformer with enclosure INPUT: 120VAC, 1.0A, 60Hz connect to a dedicated circuit OUTPUT: 18VAC, 72VA OUTPUT BL WH BL INPUT BK WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS K3822 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Connect to 12V, 7AH min/34.4ah max lead acid batteries using cables supplied. See instructions for required capacity. Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery normally need not be replaced for at least 3 yrs. Battery connection is supervised. 2-WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR LOOP + - Blue Yel Red Blk + - SMOKE N.C. N.O. 2k (note 2) + N.C. N.O. 2k J5 ( or ) - Data Data BELL HORN 2k (note 2) ALARM POLARITY SHOWN + - SMOKE N.C. N.O. 2k + - N.C. N.O. + N.C. N.O. + - N.C. N.O. 2k 2k 2k + N.C. N.O. + - N.C. N.O. 2k 2k - - AC WIRING IS SUPERVISED 2-WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR LOOP GROUND N.O. WET / DRY N.C. NOTE: or N8167 may not be used for listed commercial fire installations. Total alarm current is limited to 1.5A may be used for all listed commercial (burg,fire, burg/fire) installations. Total alarm current is limited to 1.5A, see note 1. BATTERY TABS + RED - BLK POWER SWITCH ON OFF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARD 72, CHAPTER 3 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA ). PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION, TESTING, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT. BELL AUX RELAY (FORM C) programmable response (not supervised) WHEN WET: 12V terminal 10, 1.5A max., see note 1. WHEN DRY: No voltage on terminal 10, Contact Rating: 28V, 2A max., resistive loads. FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR. Use polarized sounding devices. BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd. EOLRs not req'd. May use non polarized devices. Ratings: 12VDC, 1.5A max. See note 1. See instructions to enable/disable supervision and for compatible devices. CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD- QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER. GND BELL OUT AUX. RELAY RS-485 #1 POINT 2 POINT 1 POINT 3 POINT 4 TRNSFMR POINT 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 POINT AC LED POINT 1-8 NOTES All points provide Style B supervision Point resistance (excluding EOLR): - Points 1, 2: 100 ohms max - Other zones: 300 ohms max Point response: mS (all points) Ratings for points 1, 2: VDC - 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors of the type specified in the instructions can be used) UL compatibility ID: A Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop. N.C. contacts for burg. usage only. TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE: Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded). UL Listed central station, proprietary and Remote Station protected premises unit when used with back-up dialer module. Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority. BACK-UP LINE SEIZE LED (GREEN) Connect to main PCB header J6 using ribbon cable (supplied) BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE) INTACT: 25V CUT: 13V terminal 3 or 4) OPTIONAL BACK-UP DIALER MODULE TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY The A Dialer Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 FCC Reg. No.: AC398U MO-N Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B BACK-UP PHONE JACK SEE TELCO JACK SHOCK WARNING BELOW RJ31X (connect using supplied cable) Supervision is programmable BACK-UP DIALER EARTH GROUND SCREW (wire to main PCB, The Focus Built-in Dialer Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 FCC Reg. No.: AC398R AL-E Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Bell Box Tamper SERVICE JACK MAIN RJ31X J6 PHONE JACK Make connections using cable MAIN DIALER LED Backup Dial Header A Jack Connect RJ31X using cable supplied. Supervision is programmable. WARNING: TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT TELCO JACK BEFORE SERVICING THIS PANEL. ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT THE OUTPUT OF THE TRANSFORMER (SPARE) NO CONNECTION P JUMPER P3 Aux Relay Setting Pins 1 & 2 shorted = wet Pins 2 & 3 shorted = dry EARTH GROUND EARTH GROUND AUXILIARY POWER (Not Supervised) Rating: 12VDC, 1.0A max. See note 1. Attach A module to main PCB using 3 standoffs Points 3 & 4 may be set for a Style "D" configuration. J5 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (not supervised) See instructions for trigger use and programming. 1. GROUND (BLACK) 2. OUT 1 (BLUE) 3. OUT 2 (BROWN) 4. OUT 3 (GREEN) 5. OUT 4 (RED) 6. OUT 5 (WHITE) 7. OUT 6 (YELLOW) 8. OUT 7 (GRAY) 9. OUT 8 (VIOLET) Ratings: Low Output: 0.7V thru 100 ohm can sink 33mA with 4V drop High Output: 12V thru 4k ohm + - SIM Loop Cabinet Tamper Input FM APPROVED FOCUS CADET SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS FOCUS-SOC-001-V0

Control/Communicator 5110XM. Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions N8026 4/96

Control/Communicator 5110XM. Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions N8026 4/96 Control/Communicator 5110XM Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions N8026 4/96 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 6 Basic Hardwired...6 Remote Keypads...6

More information

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA 250BP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA 250BP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION 13850 VISTA 250BP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM ADEMCO Group 165 Eileen Way Syosset, New York 11791 1-800-645-7568 SECTION 13850 DETECTION

More information

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA-128FB ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA-128FB ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION 13850 VISTA-128FB ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM ADEMCO Group 165 Eileen Way Syosset, New York 11791 1-800-645-7568 SECTION 13850 DETECTION

More information

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA 250FBP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM

SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION VISTA 250FBP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION 13850 VISTA 250FBP ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION FOR SECURITY SYSTEM ADEMCO Group 165 Eileen Way Syosset, New York 11791 1-800-645-7568 SECTION 13850 DETECTION

More information

EVO192 v3.0 Fire and Burglary What s New

EVO192 v3.0 Fire and Burglary What s New EVO192 v3.0 Fire and Burglary What s New Compatibility: EVO192 v3.0 TM50 v1.31 K641 v2.41 Overview: CP-01 Compliancy Wiring Diagram The following sections/options have been added to the EVO192 panel. They

More information

All-In-One Wireless Security System V3.2 Programming Guide. Model # MG6130 / MG6160

All-In-One Wireless Security System V3.2 Programming Guide. Model # MG6130 / MG6160 All-In-One Wireless Security System V3.2 Programming Guide Model # MG6130 / MG6160 We hope this product performs to your complete satisfaction. Should you have any questions or comments, please visit www.paradox.com

More information

V2 1/13 Rev C

V2 1/13 Rev C VISTA-128BPT/VISTA-250BPT/ VISTA-128BPTSIA Commercial Burglary Partitioned Security System With Scheduling Installation and Setup Guide 800-06903V2 1/13 Rev C Table of Contents VISTA-128BPT/VISTA-250BPT/...

More information

Digiplex System V2.14 / V2.2ACC. Control Panel Programming Guide

Digiplex System V2.14 / V2.2ACC. Control Panel Programming Guide Digiplex System V2.14 / V2.2ACC Control Panel Programming Guide Table of Contents Getting Started...2 What Do I Do First?...2 How Do I Program the Control Panel?...2 Single Digit Entry Method...2 Multiple

More information

Contact ID as of 2/2/2015

Contact ID as of 2/2/2015 Contact ID as of 2/2/2015 100 Medical Zone A non-specific medical exists 101 Personal Emergency Zone Emergency Assistance request 102 Fail to report in Zone A user has failed to activate a monitoring device

More information

Contents. Glossary

Contents. Glossary Contents Glossary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6 1. Introduction to the IDS 1632 -------------------------------------------------------------

More information

&RPPHU LDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\

&RPPHU LDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 9,67$)% &RPPHU LDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 3DUWLWLRQHG6H XULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6 KHGXOLQJ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH FIRE FIRE * PULL N8988V2 8/00 ii Table of Contents List of Figures... viii Conventions Used in This Manual...ix

More information

Commercial Burglary Partitioned Security System With Scheduling. Installation and Setup Guide. N5944-6V2 5/04 Rev B

Commercial Burglary Partitioned Security System With Scheduling. Installation and Setup Guide. N5944-6V2 5/04 Rev B VISTA SERIES VISTA-50P/VISTA-50PUL Commercial Burglary Partitioned Security System With Scheduling Installation and Setup Guide N5944-6V2 5/04 Rev B ii Table of Contents List of Figures... v Conventions

More information

VISTA-100. COMMERCIAL FIRE AND BURGLARY PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM with SCHEDULING. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and PROGRAMMING GUIDE N6019-2V1 1/98

VISTA-100. COMMERCIAL FIRE AND BURGLARY PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM with SCHEDULING. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and PROGRAMMING GUIDE N6019-2V1 1/98 VISTA-100 COMMERCIAL FIRE AND BURGLARY PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM with SCHEDULING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and PROGRAMMING GUIDE N6019-2V1 1/98 Recommendations for Proper Protection The Following Recommendations

More information

Independent Zone Control (I.Z.C.)

Independent Zone Control (I.Z.C.) Operation and Installation Guide Independent Zone Control (I.Z.C.) DELAYED INSTANT ARMED 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 8 9 * * fi Radionics R D279A Operation & Installation Guide 46456B Page 2 Copyright 2000 Radionics

More information

&RPPHUFLDO%XUJODU\ ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH 3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ 3 STAY 1 OFF 6BYPASS 5 TEST 4 MAX 9 CHIME 7 INSTANT OFF 2 AWAY

&RPPHUFLDO%XUJODU\ ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH 3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ 3 STAY 1 OFF 6BYPASS 5 TEST 4 MAX 9 CHIME 7 INSTANT OFF 2 AWAY ARMED 7 INSTANT 8 CODE 9,67$%3 9,67$%3 &RPPHUFLDO%XUJODU\ 3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH ARMED READY 1 OFF 4 MAX 7 INSTANT READY 0 2 AWAY 5 TEST 8 CODE # 3 STAY 6 BYPASS

More information

Contact ID as of 11/28/2018

Contact ID as of 11/28/2018 Contact ID as of 11/28/2018 100 Medical Zone A non-specific medical exists 101 Personal Emergency Zone Emergency Assistance request 102 Fail to report in Zone A user has failed to activate a monitoring

More information

Testing the System. Battery Test. Dialer Test. Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69) One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)

Testing the System. Battery Test. Dialer Test. Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69) One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68) F A 1 7 0 0 c Testing the System Battery Test When AC power is present, the FA1700C runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to determine if there is a battery connected, and runs an extended battery

More information

Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling

Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling ARMED A D S SPACE READY B E T R C F X ENTER MAX INSTANT READY R BYPASS FA1670C/FA1700C Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling BS/ESC N/Y SHIFT 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 FA560 2

More information

RANGER 8600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL

RANGER 8600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL RANGER 8600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 2 STANDARD AND OPTIONAL PARTS LIST... 2 PARTS DIAGRAM... 3 TERMINAL DRAWING AND SPECIAL NOTES...

More information

VISTA-128FB. Installation and Setup Guide. Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling

VISTA-128FB. Installation and Setup Guide. Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling Features Q.E.D. programming for quick enrollment of devices. VISTA-128FB Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling Installation and Setup Guide N8988 5/98 ii Recommendations

More information

6HFXULW\6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HW8S*XLGH N7227AUV2 12/99

6HFXULW\6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HW8S*XLGH N7227AUV2 12/99 9,67$6(D 6HFXULW\6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HW8S*XLGH * N7227AUV2 12/99 Table of Contents Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION...1-1 About the VISTA-10SEa...1-1 Basic Wired Zones...1-1 Optional Expansion Zones...1-1

More information

Model 17A00 Expansion Enclosure

Model 17A00 Expansion Enclosure HOME AUTOMATION, INC. Model 17A00 Expansion Enclosure Installation Manual Document Number 17I00-1 Rev A March, 2002 Home Automation, Inc. Model 17A00 Expansion Enclosure Installation Manual Document Number

More information

VISTA-128B. Installation and Setup Guide. Commercial Burglary. Partitioned Security System. with Scheduling K3271 7/98

VISTA-128B. Installation and Setup Guide. Commercial Burglary. Partitioned Security System. with Scheduling K3271 7/98 VISTA-128B Commercial Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling Installation and Setup Guide K3271 7/98 ADDENDUM TO: VISTA-128B INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This Installation Instruction Addendum

More information

Fire Burglary Instruments Inc. XL-2G Gold Control/Communicator Installation Training Seminar Rev. 5/96

Fire Burglary Instruments Inc. XL-2G Gold Control/Communicator Installation Training Seminar Rev. 5/96 Fire Burglary Instruments Inc. XL-2G Gold Control/Communicator Installation Training Seminar Rev. 5/96 XL-2G Gold Product Overview 7 Zones (6 programmable + panic or keyswitch zone) Fast Loop Response

More information

All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0. Model #: MG Reference and Installation Manual

All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0. Model #: MG Reference and Installation Manual All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0 Model #: MG-6060 Reference and Installation Manual Table of Contents Introduction... 3 About Magellan and this Manual... 3 Conventions... 3 Specifications... 3

More information

9,67$&1 6HFXULW\6\VWHP ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH K3892V1 4/00

9,67$&1 6HFXULW\6\VWHP ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH K3892V1 4/00 9,67$ 9,67$&1 6HFXULW\6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH * K3892V1 4/00 VISTA-15/VISTA-15CN Installation & Setup Guide ii RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION The Following Recommendations for the location

More information

All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0. Model #: MG-6060

All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0. Model #: MG-6060 All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.0 Model #: MG-6060 Reference and Installation Manual DRAFT Table of Contents Introduction... 5 About Magellan and this Manual... 5 Conventions... 5 Specifications...

More information

&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\

&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ ARMED 7 INSTANT 8 CODE 9,67$)%3 9,67$)%3 &RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\ 3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH ARMED READY 1 OFF 4 MAX 7 INSTANT READY 0 2 AWAY 5 TEST 8 CODE # 3 STAY

More information

VISTA-20SE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM.

VISTA-20SE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM. VISTA-20SE 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Principal changes between the VISTA-20SE and the former VISTA-20 are indicated by margin lines. N7526V4 8/97 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER

More information

PROGRAMMING GUIDE SPECTRA CONTROL PANELS V , 1725EX, 1728 AND 1728EX 1755, 1755EX, 1758, AND 1758EX

PROGRAMMING GUIDE SPECTRA CONTROL PANELS V , 1725EX, 1728 AND 1728EX 1755, 1755EX, 1758, AND 1758EX PROGRAMMING GUIDE SPECTRA CONTROL PANELS V1.2 1725, 1725EX, 1728 AND 1728EX 1755, 1755EX, 1758, AND 1758EX TABLE OF CONTENTS HOW DO I PROGRAM THE SYSTEM?... 4 Single Digit Data Entry Method (Hexadecimal

More information

Control Panel. 1.0 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK Introduction... 2

Control Panel. 1.0 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK Introduction... 2 Architectural & Engineering Specifications Control Panel 1.0 GENERAL... 2 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK... 2 1.1.1 Introduction... 2 1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS... 2 1.2.1 After-Sales Support... 2 1.2.2 Quality assurance...

More information

Watchguard WGAP864 User Manual

Watchguard WGAP864 User Manual Watchguard WGAP864 User Manual v1.0 Issued September 2016 1 2 Table of Contents Glossary... 5 1. Introduction to your Watchguard WGAP864... 6 2. Before Operating your Alarm System... 6 3. Understanding

More information

RANGER 7600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL

RANGER 7600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL RANGER 7600 DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. TABLE OF CONTENTS... P.1 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION... P.2... 3. STANDARD AND OPTIONAL PARTS LIST... P.2... 4. FEATURE

More information

IDS816 User Manual H Issued January 2009

IDS816 User Manual H Issued January 2009 1 Contents Glossary-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6 1. Introduction to the IDS 816---------------------------------------------------------------------------7

More information

First page of this international document resides under separate cover: 20SEaCOV.ps

First page of this international document resides under separate cover: 20SEaCOV.ps First page of this international document resides under separate cover: 20SEaCOV.ps TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 6 Section 2. INSTALLING THE CONTROL... 9 Mounting the Cabinet...

More information

VISTA-40. Installation and Setup Guide. 2-Partition Security System N7001V4 7/98

VISTA-40. Installation and Setup Guide. 2-Partition Security System N7001V4 7/98 VISTA-40 2-Partition Security System Installation and Setup Guide N7001V4 7/98 ADDENDUM TO: VISTA-40, VISTA-50P, VISTA-50PUL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This Installation Instruction Addendum covers changes

More information

Honeywell Control Panels FOR RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL INSTALLATIONS. Feature Charts

Honeywell Control Panels FOR RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL INSTALLATIONS. Feature Charts Honeywell Control Panels FOR RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL INSTALLATIONS Feature Charts Control Panels FEATURE CHART LYNX Plus (L3000) (Supported Feature) (Not Supported) N/A (Not Applicable) LYNX Touch (L5210)

More information

System Introduction. 1.1 Specifications

System Introduction. 1.1 Specifications System Introduction S E C T I O N 1 1.1 Specifications Downloading Software Support PC585 uses DLS-1 v6.5 and up. Flexible Zone Configuration Four fully programmable zones; system expandable to eight zones

More information

NetworX Series. NX-8 Commercial Fire Panel Installation and Startup

NetworX Series. NX-8 Commercial Fire Panel Installation and Startup NetworX Series NX-8 Commercial Fire Panel Installation and Startup 2004 GE Security All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. These instructions do not purport to cover all details

More information

2000 Series. Program Entry Guide. Control Panels

2000 Series. Program Entry Guide. Control Panels 2000 Series EN Program Entry Guide Control Panels 2000 Series Program Entry Guide About This Manual EN 2 About This Manual This guide describes the programming parameters available to the 2000 Series Control

More information

RANGER 8980E DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL

RANGER 8980E DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL RANGER 8980E DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL DESCRIPTION...2 STANDARD AND OPTIONAL PARTS LIST...2 FEATURE DEFINITIONS...3 TERMINAL DRAWING AND SPECIAL NOTES...4

More information

Control/Communicator Installation Manual

Control/Communicator Installation Manual DAS NETWORX NX-12 Control/Communicator Installation Manual General Description...2 Ordering Information...2 Option Definitions...3 Programming the LED Code Pads...5 Programming the NX-12...9 Types of Programming

More information

System Introduction. 1.1 PC5015 Specifications S E C T I O N 1

System Introduction. 1.1 PC5015 Specifications S E C T I O N 1 1.1 PC5015 Specifications System Introduction S E C T I O N 1 Flexible Zone Configuration: 8 Fully Programmable Zones 38 Access Codes: 32 User, 1 System Master, 2 Partition Master, 2 Duress and 1 maintenance

More information

TABLE OF CONTENTS. General Description Standard and Optional Parts List Feature Definitions Comments about the 8600E...

TABLE OF CONTENTS. General Description Standard and Optional Parts List Feature Definitions Comments about the 8600E... 5$1*(5( DOWNLOADABLE CONTROL COMMUNICATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS General Description... 2 Standard and Optional Parts List... 2 Feature Definitions... 3 Comments about the 8600E... 4 Terminal

More information

DS7400Xi Addressable Control/ Communicator

DS7400Xi Addressable Control/ Communicator DS7400Xi Addressable Control/ Communicator DS7400Xi DS7400Xi-EXP 110VAC operation 220VAC operation Remotely Programmable WDSRP (Windows Detection Systems Remote Programming Software), allows the systems

More information

Control/Communicator

Control/Communicator Architectural & Engineering Specifications Control/Communicator 1.0 GENERAL... 2 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK... 2 1.1.1 Introduction... 2 1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS... 2 1.2.1 After-Sales Support... 2 1.2.2 Quality

More information

X64 Wireless Training

X64 Wireless Training X64 Wireless Training IDS Contents 1 Contents Features 3 Wireless Hardware 4 IDS & Duevi integration PCB 5 LED operation 5 Wireless Device Hardware setup 6 Location 260 7 LED Keypad Instructions 7 Adding

More information

Digiplex LED Keypads User s Manual

Digiplex LED Keypads User s Manual KLEDEU03.fm Page -1 Friday, May 4, 2001 11:25 AM Digiplex LED Keypads User s Manual KLEDEU03.fm Page 0 Friday, May 4, 2001 11:25 AM KLEDEU03.fm Page 1 Friday, May 4, 2001 11:25 AM TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0

More information

CONTACT ID REPORT CODES

CONTACT ID REPORT CODES CONTACT ID REPORT CODES PREFIX - E - ACTIVATION PREFIX - R - RESTORAL 100 Medical Zone 101 Personal Emergency Zone 102 Fail to report in Zone Fire Alarms 110 110 Fire Zone 111 Smoke Zone 112 Combustion

More information

Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel

Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel PRODUCT SPECIFICATION XR2400F Addressable FACP Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Description The DMP XR2400F Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel is an expandable Fire Alarm Control with built-in DACT

More information

MG5000 V2.4 MG5050 V2.4 SP5500 V2.4 SP6000 V2.4 SP7000 V2.4. Programming Guide

MG5000 V2.4 MG5050 V2.4 SP5500 V2.4 SP6000 V2.4 SP7000 V2.4. Programming Guide MG5000 V2.4 MG5050 V2.4 SP5500 V2.4 SP6000 V2.4 SP7000 V2.4 Programming Guide We hope this product performs to your complete satisfaction. Should you have any questions or comments, please visit www.paradox.com

More information

First Alert 1200C Installer Notes M. Leuck

First Alert 1200C Installer Notes M. Leuck First Alert 2C Installer Notes M. Leuck. Programming can done by standard keypads 2. Enter programming with Installer Code + 8 + + 3. Another method of entering programming: Power system down, then back

More information

FMR Installation Instructions. Addressable Fire System Controller

FMR Installation Instructions. Addressable Fire System Controller FMR-7033 EN Installation Instructions Addressable Fire System Controller EN 2 FMR-7033 Installation Instructions Contents Contents Contents...2 1.0 Introduction...3 2.0 Description...3 3.0 Device Mounting...3

More information

Series. NX-4-EUR Control Panel. Installation manual

Series. NX-4-EUR Control Panel. Installation manual g GE Security NetworX TM Series NX-4-EUR Control Panel Installation manual CONTENTS CONTENTS...2 GENERAL INFORMATION...4 ORDERING INFORMATION...4 FEATURE DEFINITIONS...5 PROGRAMMING THE NX-4 KEYPADS...12

More information

D8024, D9024, D10024 Analog Fire Alarm Control Panels Programming Guide

D8024, D9024, D10024 Analog Fire Alarm Control Panels Programming Guide System Reset Trou ble Silence Ala rm Silence Manual Ala rm ENTER NO YES Letters Numb ers Keyword Radionics System Reset Trouble Silence Alarm Silence Manual Alarm ENTER NO YES Le ters Numbers Keyw ord

More information

Security System. User Guide for the LED Command Center

Security System. User Guide for the LED Command Center Security System User Guide for the LED Command Center National Security Systems Inc (800)457-1999 MY SECURITY COMPANY IS: CALL BEFORE TEST: THIS SECURITY SYSTEM IS CONNECTED TO TELEPHONE NUMBER: THE SECURITY

More information

Control Panels. Control Panels for Commercial Applications. Control panels provide the central processing

Control Panels. Control Panels for Commercial Applications. Control panels provide the central processing Control Panels Control Panels for Commercial Applications Control panels provide the central processing and logic for an integrated system. In a typical system, there are four major functions: inputs,

More information

NetworX Series NX-4V2 Control Panel Installation and Startup

NetworX Series NX-4V2 Control Panel Installation and Startup NetworX Series NX-4V2 Control Panel Installation and Startup 2005 GE Security All rights reserved. These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide every

More information

Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions NX-148E-RF LCD Touchpad with Receiver 466-2198C February 2006 Copyright 2006, GE Security Inc. Contents Product summary 1 Installation 1 Transmitter programming 2 Touchpad programming 5 Reference tables

More information

VISTA-10SE. Security System. Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions

VISTA-10SE. Security System. Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Security System VISTA-10SE THIS ISSUE INCLUDES THE NEW QED (QUICK ENROLLMENT OF DEVICES) PROCEDURE FOR 5800 SERIES TRANSMITTERS Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Installation Instructions

More information

icontrol OpenHome Converge Panel Interface Module Installation Guide Congratulations on purchasing your Panel Interface module.

icontrol OpenHome Converge Panel Interface Module Installation Guide Congratulations on purchasing your Panel Interface module. icontrol OpenHome Converge Panel Interface Module Installation Guide Congratulations on purchasing your Panel Interface module. The icontrol Networks, Inc. OpenHome Converge Panel Interface Module (PIM)

More information

System Introduction. 1.1 Specifications S E C T I O N 1

System Introduction. 1.1 Specifications S E C T I O N 1 System Introduction S E C T I O N 1 1.1 Specifications Control Panel Specifications Flexible Zone Configuration: 8 Fully Programmable Zones 37 Access Codes: 32 User, 1 System Master, 2 Partition Master

More information

P Zone Expandable Hybrid Security System

P Zone Expandable Hybrid Security System Page 1 of 11 up to 8 hardwired keypads and 4 wireless keypads 4 hardwired keypads available with zone input PWLS910 wireless handheld keypad added wireless control is provided by - PWLS908 wireless panic

More information

Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions g 466-2339A October 2009 2009 GE Security, Inc. Introduction This is the GE. Installations should only be done by trained professionals. Use this document to install the system with default settings that

More information

Table of Contents. All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.3. Programming Guide. Model # MG-6060 / MG-6030

Table of Contents. All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.3. Programming Guide. Model # MG-6060 / MG-6030 All-In-One Wireless Security System V1.3 Programming Guide Model # MG-6060 / MG-6030 Table of Contents Things You Should Know... 2 About This Programming Guide... 2 Conventions... 2 Installer Code (Default:

More information

VISTA-50P VISTA-50PUL

VISTA-50P VISTA-50PUL VISTA-50P VISTA-50PUL PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM with SCHEDULING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and PROGRAMMING GUIDE N5944-6V1 10/97 ADDENDUM TO: VISTA-40, VISTA-50P, VISTA-50PUL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

More information

VISTA-20HWSE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM

VISTA-20HWSE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM VISTA-20HWSE 2-PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Principal changes between the VISTA-20HWSE and the former VISTA-20HW are indicated by margin lines. N7526-2V2 8/97 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR

More information

MR-2602 Two Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel

MR-2602 Two Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel MR-2602 Two Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel Installation Manual Secutron LT-2015 Rev.3 July 2010 Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit... 11 1.1.1 General features...

More information

SENTROL ZX400/ZX410. Security System Control. Programming

SENTROL ZX400/ZX410. Security System Control. Programming SENTROL ZX400/ZX410 Security System Control Programming 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents Operating the System... 5 Introduction...5 Powering Up With the Control Station...5 Control Stations...6

More information

KT-100 Door Controller

KT-100 Door Controller WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully

More information

Carbon Monoxide Transmitter

Carbon Monoxide Transmitter Introduction The CO Transmitter uses an electrochemical sensor to monitor the carbon monoxide level and outputs a field-selectable 4-20 ma or voltage signal. The voltage signal may also be set to 0-5 or

More information

NetworX NX-8V2. LED Keypad User Manual

NetworX NX-8V2. LED Keypad User Manual NetworX NX-8V2 LED Keypad User Manual POWER Light is on when AC power is present; flashes to indicate a low battery condition. ARMED Light is on when armed; off when disarmed; flashes to indicate a previous

More information

SENTROL ZX200/ZX210. Security System Control. Installation/ Programming

SENTROL ZX200/ZX210. Security System Control. Installation/ Programming SENTROL ZX200/ZX210 Security System Control Installation/ Programming 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents Feature Overview... 5 A New Standard For Value...5 ZX System Advantages...5 More Than A Security

More information

USER'S GUIDE FA1220CV. 2-Partition Security System N7003-1V2 7/98

USER'S GUIDE FA1220CV. 2-Partition Security System N7003-1V2 7/98 USER'S GUIDE FA1220CV 2-Partition Security System N7003-1V2 7/98 SYSTEM OVERVIEW... 3 General... 3 A Partitioned System... 3 Zones... 3 Burglary Protection... 4 Fire Protection... 4 Alarms... 5 Emergency

More information

VISTA-100 Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned System

VISTA-100 Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned System VISTA-100 Commercial Fire & Burglary Partitioned System 4XLFN6WDUW Step-by Step Programming Procedure Single and Multiple Programming Forms System Worksheets FIRE FIRE * PULL VISTA-100PR Rev B 4/99 TABLE

More information

U ser's Guide PC6010

U ser's Guide PC6010 User's Guide PC6010 Quick Reference Guide This manual is for Basic and Advanced users. Each of these types of user can access a different set of functions. The and symbols next to the title of each procedure

More information

Laptop / PC Programming Manual

Laptop / PC Programming Manual Laptop / PC Programming Manual Doc. # Fire PC Program rev B 01.07 This Document is property of Evax Systems, Inc. The Evax Fire Solutions Programmer Components 2 1.0 System Setup 4 1.1 Interface Setup

More information

System Introduction. Digital Communicator Specifications: Supports all Major Formats including SIA and Contact ID Event Initiated Personal Paging

System Introduction. Digital Communicator Specifications: Supports all Major Formats including SIA and Contact ID Event Initiated Personal Paging 1.1 Specifications System Introduction S E C T I O N 1 Control Panel Specifications Flexible Zone Configuration: 8 Fully Programmable Zones 38 Access Codes: 32 User, 1 System Master, 2 Partition Master,

More information

VISTA-32FBPT. Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security Systems with Scheduling. User Guide /12 Rev. B

VISTA-32FBPT. Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security Systems with Scheduling. User Guide /12 Rev. B VISTA-32FBPT Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security Systems with Scheduling User Guide 800-11045 2/12 Rev. B 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM OVERVIEW...5 General...5 A Partitioned System...5 Zones...6

More information

RE6100 Series Helix Security and Automation Platform

RE6100 Series Helix Security and Automation Platform CONFIGURATION Resolution Compatibles RE6100 Series Helix Security and Automation Platform C G UI D E Configuration Settings Table 1 - Panel Settings Table 2 - Zone Settings Table 3 - Device Settings Table

More information

Security System With Scheduling. User Guide. N5943-8V4 7/04 Rev A

Security System With Scheduling. User Guide. N5943-8V4 7/04 Rev A ADEMCO VISTA-120 Security System With Scheduling User Guide N5943-8V4 7/04 Rev A Your Honeywell security system is designed for use with devices manufactured or approved by Honeywell for use with your

More information

VISTA-128FBP/ V128FBP-24 Commercial Fire and Partitioned Burglary Alarm Control Panel

VISTA-128FBP/ V128FBP-24 Commercial Fire and Partitioned Burglary Alarm Control Panel VISTA-128FBP/ V128FBP-24 Commercial Fire and Partitioned Burglary Alarm Control Panel Designed to integrate seamlessly with, access control, and ADEMCO s full range of fire and burglary components, the

More information

TECHNICAL DATA OBSOLETE

TECHNICAL DATA OBSOLETE Deluge Devices 270a 1. PRODUCT NAME VIKING PAR-3 Available since 1991 2. MANUFACTURED FOR: THE VIKING CORPORATION 210 N. Industrial Park Road Hastings, Michigan 49058 U.S.A. Telephone: (269) 945-9501 (877)

More information

INSTALLATION MANUAL PC15OO

INSTALLATION MANUAL PC15OO INSTALLATION MANUAL PC15OO This device complies with Parts 15 and 68 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

More information

Specification/ Data Sheet

Specification/ Data Sheet Specification/ Data Sheet TRITON RP Agent Release Control Panel FEATURES Agent Release Control Panel designed specifically for suppression release operation with: Four initiating device circuits (IDCs)

More information

Quick Programmer s Manual

Quick Programmer s Manual Version 2.604 (31/03/05) p1 Quick Programmer s Manual 2005. Inner Range Pty. Ltd. Part Number: 630048V2 p2 Version 2.604 (31/03/05) TABLE OF CONTENTS. 1. PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART. The following flowchart

More information

NX-4V2 Control Panel Installation Instructions

NX-4V2 Control Panel Installation Instructions 4V2 Control Panel Installation Instructions Introduction This is the 4V2-Control Panel Installation Instructions. Installations should only be done by trained professionals. Use this document to install

More information

Fire Command Keypad. XR5 User s Guide

Fire Command Keypad. XR5 User s Guide Fire Command Keypad XR5 User s Guide Silencing an Alarm While the fire alarm horns, strobes, or sirens are sounding use one of the following methods to silence the alarm depending on which type of keypad

More information

IDS S E C U R I T Y IDS816. User Manual MANUAL NO C ISSUED APRIL 2005 VERSION 2.00

IDS S E C U R I T Y IDS816. User Manual MANUAL NO C ISSUED APRIL 2005 VERSION 2.00 INHEP DIGITAL IDS S E C U R I T Y IDS816 User Manual MANUAL NO. 700-283-01C ISSUED APRIL 2005 VERSION 2.00 Contents 1. Introduction to the IDS816... 4 2. Understanding the Keypad Indicators... 4 3. Programmable

More information

30.45 Electric Release PDRP-2001

30.45 Electric Release PDRP-2001 The PDRP-2001 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) is a six-zone control panel for single and dual hazard deluge and preaction applications. The FACP is compatible with conventional input devices (2-wire or

More information

ADEMCO 4208SNF V-Plex Universal Class A Module INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE

ADEMCO 4208SNF V-Plex Universal Class A Module INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE K3179V2 2/11 Rev. A ADEMCO 4208SNF V-Plex Universal Class A Module INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE FEATURES The ADEMCO 4208SNF Universal Class A Module can be used in either of two different applications.

More information

ACSI MODEL 1410 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

ACSI MODEL 1410 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS II 1400-3 ACSI MODEL 1410 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Features: For use with doors or groups of doors that must interlock with each other to regulate control of accessing one area from another,

More information

Installation, Operating and Maintenance Manual

Installation, Operating and Maintenance Manual STATUS ZONES CONTROLS FIRE FAULT DISABLED FIRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TEST FAULT DISABLED 1 5 BUZZER SILENCE RESET 1 2 TEST 2 6 LAMP TEST 3 SUPPLY 3 7 SYSTEM FAULT 4 8 SOUNDERS ACTIVATE/ SILENCE 4 FAULTS INSTRUCTIONS

More information

To operate the 5207 you can use either the built-in touchpad or the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator.

To operate the 5207 you can use either the built-in touchpad or the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator. Section 5 Operation To operate the 5207 you can use either the built-in touchpad or the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator. Figure 5-1 Built-in Touchpad (Seven-Segment Display) Figure 5-2 Model 5230 Remote

More information

Digiplex LED Keypads. User s Manual

Digiplex LED Keypads. User s Manual Digiplex LED Keypads User s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION... 6 1.1 Legend...6 BASIC OPERATION... 7 2.1 Auditory Feedback (Beep Tones)...8 2.2 Keypad Indicator Lights...8 2.3 LED Keypads...8 2.4

More information

XRSuper6. User s Guide

XRSuper6. User s Guide XRSuper6 User s Guide Silencing an Alarm All/Perimeter and Home/Away Systems While the alarm bell or siren is sounding, enter your user code. DISARM SILENCE. Select SILENCE to stop the bell or siren. This

More information

OJD ITB No Attachment E Duress Alarm Equipment Specifications

OJD ITB No Attachment E Duress Alarm Equipment Specifications Duress Alarm Equipment Specifications PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duress devices. B. Alarm control panel. C. Signaling devices. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code;

More information

Summit 3208GLD USER MANUAL. Electronics Line

Summit 3208GLD USER MANUAL. Electronics Line Summit 3208GLD USER MANUAL Electronics Line Table of Contents 1: Introduction... 2 2: Overview... 3 3: Keypad Functions... 4 3.1: Keypads... 4 3.2: 3108 LCD Keypad Layout... 4 4: Basic System Operation...

More information

The most user friendly Security Alarm System L S Section 1 Overview of System Section 2 Planning your Installation

The most user friendly Security Alarm System L S Section 1 Overview of System Section 2 Planning your Installation The most user friendly Contents Section 1 Overview of System 1.1 Kit Contents 1.2 Tools Required 1.3 System Features Security Alarm System L S 4 0 0 Section 2 Planning your Installation 2.1 Location of

More information

Alarm Control Panel WIC-16Z4P WIC-5Z2P. User Instructions

Alarm Control Panel WIC-16Z4P WIC-5Z2P. User Instructions WIC-16Z4P WIC-5Z2P User Instructions Page : 2/14 INDEX # Function Page 1 Add a New User Code 11 2 Arm or Disarm All Areas or Disarm Selected Areas (Partitioned System) 8 3 Arming the System (Away Mode)

More information